F193-Flow Control Gate PDF

COMPONENTS
Technical Documentation
Assembly, Operation and Maintenance
Client: TCDRI FOR PAKISTAN

Client order no.: 1/17.4573/2-01
Document file no: 02-0/250883-152/A-00.en
CPP order no.: 02-0/250.883/613
Date: 16.03.2017
A Langley Holdings Company ©

Supplier: Claudius Peters (China) Ltd.
Unit 1705-1706, 17/F Laws Commercial Plaza
788 Cheung Sha Wan Road, Lai Chi Kok
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Telephone: +852 25441848
Telefax: +852 28540011
hongkong@claudiuspeters.com
www.claudiuspeters.com
Project manager: Mr. Samuel Wat

Telephone: +86 139 10023480
Samuel.wat@claudiuspeters.com
Assembly / commissioning: Mr. Denis Foo

Telephone: +86 135 01167283
Denis.foo@claudiuspeters.com
Spare parts: Ms. Yan Yan

Telephone: +86 135 01123846
Yan.yan@claudiuspeters.com
Beijing@claudiuspeters.com
A Langley Holdings Company ©

2/449
APR: Pop, Nicolae // DES: Pop, Daniela // 16/03/2017 13:31 // ID 13497504
TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION
Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date
0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 02-0/250883-153/A-00.en 00 16.03.2017

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ASSEMBLY, OPERATION AND
0 1 02-0/250883-152/A-00.en 00 16.03.2017
MAINTENANCE
1 PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES 596.0009.1000A/11.en 00 16.03.2017
2 SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT 32.596.0021.0021A/01.en 00 16.03.2017
3 GENERAL LISTS , CERTIFICATES, DOCUMENTS
3 1 SUPPLY AND SPARE PART LIST 02-0/250883-150/B-00.en 00 16.03.2017
3 2 STORAGE,PACKING AND PRESERVATION CNP147 POL-CPN147-Rev2010-12 00 16.03.2017
4 EQUIPMENT
4 1 AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H TYPE 14
4 1 1 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H P01.643.17.0205-0212.ED 00 16.03.2017
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H: TYPE 14 AND 18, DRIVE: HAND,
4 1 2 643.0009.0014A/03.en 00 16.03.2017
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4 1 3 AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H, TYPE 14, DIMENSION SHEET 643.0000.0014A/10.ED 00 16.03.2017
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H, DRIVE: HAND, SPARE PARTS
4 1 4 643.0010.0014A/08.SV 00 16.03.2017
DRAWING
AEROSLIDE PROGRAM TYPE 1, HOLE PATTERN, DIMENSION
4 1 5 625.0000.0021A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
SHEET
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE, HOLE PATTERN TYPE 14,
4 1 6 625.0000.0028A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
DIMENSION SHEET
AEROSLIDE GASKET FOR AEROSLIDE TYPE 1, PROFILED,
4 1 7 626.0000.1032A/00.ED 00 16.03.2017
DIMENSION SHEET
4 2 FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE P
P01.682.17.0514-519.ED
4 2 1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE P 00 16.03.2017
P01.682.17.0526-527.ED
P01.682.17.0514-519.ED
4 2 2 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE P 00 16.03.2017
P01.682.17.0526-527.ED
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 P, DRIVE: PNEU, OPERATING
4 2 3 682.0009.1074A/10.en 00 16.03.2017
INSTRUCTIONS
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 P, DRIVE: PNEU, DIMENSION
4 2 4 682.0000.1074A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
SHEET
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 P, DRIVE: PNEU, SPARE PARTS
4 2 5 682.0010.1074A/08.SV 00 16.03.2017
DRAWING
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 P, DRIVE: PNEU, CONNECTION
4 2 6 682.0017.1074A/05.en 00 16.03.2017
DIAGRAM
4 2 7 FLOW CONTROL GATE SHEET OF CONSTRUCTION 682.0022.0021A/05.SV 00 16.03.2017
4 2 8 FABRIC FOR AERATION ELEMENTS, DESCRIPTION 621.0009.0022A/13.en 00 16.03.2017
4 2 9 625.0000.0021A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
SHEET
CASSETTE TYPE FLOW CONTROL GATE, HOLE PATTERN INLET
4 2 10 625.0000.0026A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
SIDE
4 2 11 626.0000.1032A/00.ED 00 16.03.2017
DIMENSION SHEET
4 2 12 PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 698.0026.0021A/10.en 00 16.03.2017
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION KINETROL-
4 2 13 Maintenance Instruction en. 00 16.03.2017
ACTUATORS
4 2 14 LIMIT SWITCH UNIT - KINETROL
4 2 14 1 LIMIT SWITCH UNIT, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 697.0009.0023A/06.en 00 16.03.2017
4 2 14 2 UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH BOX, DIMENSION SHEET 180109-01_en 00 16.03.2017
4 2 14 3 LIMIT SWITCH UNIT - KINETROL 697.0010.0021A/00.SV 00 16.03.2017
4 2 14 4 LIMIT SWITCH UNIT , CONNECTION DIAGRAM 697.0017.0035A/07.en 00 16.03.2017
4 2 15 SOLENOID VALVE NORGREN-HERION
5/2 AND 5/3 GLANDLESS VALVES SOLENOID AND PILOT
4 2 15 1 SXE9573-A71-00 00 16.03.2017
ACTUATED
02-0-250883-153-A-00-en.xls 1/2 16.03.2017
3/449
APR: Pop, Nicolae // DES: Pop, Daniela // 16/03/2017 13:31 // ID 13497504
TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION
Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date
4 3 FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE MP / MCD

4 3 1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FLOW CONTROL GATE MP P01.682.17.0520-0525.ED 00 16.03.2017
4 3 2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FLOW CONTROL GATE MCD P01.682.17.0528-0529.ED 00 16.03.2017
4 3 3 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FLOW CONTROL GATE MP P01.682.17.0520-0525.ED 00 16.03.2017
4 3 4 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FLOW CONTROL GATE MCD P01.682.17.0528-0529.ED 00 16.03.2017
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 MP, MCD,DRIVE: MOT,
4 3 5 682.0009.1080A/09.en 00 16.03.2017
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4 3 6 FLOW CONTROL GATE M, MP,MCD, DIMENSION SHEET 682.0000.1080A/04.ED 00 16.03.2017
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 MP, MCD, DRIVE: MOT, SPARE
4 3 7 682.0010.1080A/06.SV 00 16.03.2017
PARTS DRAWING
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 MP, MCD, DRIVE: MOT,
4 3 8 682.0017.1080A/09.en 00 16.03.2017
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
4 3 9 FLOW CONTROL GATE SHEET OF CONSTRUCTION 682.0022.0021A/05.SV 00 16.03.2017
4 3 10 FABRIC FOR AERATION ELEMENTS, DESCRIPTION 621.0009.0022A/13.en 00 16.03.2017
4 4 11 625.0000.0021A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
SHEET
CASSETTE TYPE FLOW CONTROL GATE- HOLE PATTERN INLET
4 3 12 625.0000.0026A/06.ED 00 16.03.2017
SIDE
4 3 13 626.0000.1032A/00.ED 00 16.03.2017
DIMENSION SHEET
INSTRUCTIONS FOR START-UP, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE
4 3 14 DEUFRA-SQ-Bedienung. 00 16.03.2017
SQ FOR TYPE MP
INSTRUCTIONS FOR START-UP, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE
4 3 15 CP Betriebsanl.CP-2, CP-4 00 16.03.2017
CP-2, CP-4, FOR TYPE MCD
POSIGAM+ / MODUGAM+ POSITIONER - COMMISSIONING
4 3 16 Integral+ Steuerungen2008 00 16.03.2017
INSTRUCTIONS
4 3 17 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DEUFRA SQ-25, FOR TYPE MP declaration - machine inc 00 16.03.2017
4 3 18 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DEUFRA CP-2, FOR TYPE MCD declaration - machine inc 00 16.03.2017
02-0-250883-153-A-00-en.xls 2/2 16.03.2017
4/449
CHAPTER 1
PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES
CHAPTER 1 PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES
5/449
Claudius Peters
Basic safety instructions
596.0009.1000A/11.en
6/449
Contents
1 Preface to the Safety Instructions ......................................................................................... 4
2 Local Warning and Mandatory Signs .................................................................................... 5
3 Information on Copyright and Protection Rights as per DIN ISO 16016............................... 5
4 Basic Safety Instructions ....................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Warnings and Symbols as per DIN ISO 3864-2 ................................................................... 6
4.2 Basic Principle / Designated Use .......................................................................................... 7
4.3 Organisational Procedures .................................................................................................... 8
4.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities ................................... 9
5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases ........................................................... 10
5.1 Packing.................................................................................................................................. 10
5.2 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 10
5.3 Storage .................................................................................................................................. 11
5.4 Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 12
5.5 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................... 15
5.6 Operation............................................................................................................................... 17
5.6.1 Maintenance, repair and inspection openings ...................................................................... 18
5.7 Maintenance, repair and other special work ......................................................................... 18
5.7.1 Doors and covers for maintenance/repair work and inspections .......................................... 21
5.8 Dismantling and disposal ...................................................................................................... 21
5.9 Notes for Particularly Hazardous Jobs .................................................................................. 23
5.9.1 Electrical Energy ................................................................................................................... 23
5.9.2 Pneumatics / Hydraulics ........................................................................................................ 25
5.9.3 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke.................................................................................................. 27
5.10 Protective Measures ............................................................................................................. 27
5.10.1 Protection from Heat ............................................................................................................. 27
5.10.2 Noise Protection .................................................................................................................... 27
5.10.3 Protection from Materials and Substances ........................................................................... 28
5.10.4 Protection against slipping, tripping and falling ..................................................................... 28
5.10.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials ............................................................................... 28
5.11 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment .......................................... 28
5.11.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 28
5.11.2 Safety from Coal Dust Explosions......................................................................................... 29
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 2 of 32
7/449
5.11.3 Explosion Protection ............................................................................................................. 29
5.11.3.1 Primary Explosion Protection ................................................................................................ 29
5.11.3.2 Secondary Explosion Protection ........................................................................................... 30
5.11.3.3 Tertiary Explosion Protection ................................................................................................ 30
5.11.4 Division into Zones in Accordance with the 2014/34/EU Directive ....................................... 30
5.11.5 Surface Temperature ............................................................................................................ 31
5.11.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo ................................................................................................ 31
5.11.7 Electrical Equipment ............................................................................................................. 32
5.11.8 Health Hazards...................................................................................................................... 32
5.11.9 The Workplace ...................................................................................................................... 32
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 3 of 32
8/449
1 Preface to the Safety Instructions
These Basic Safety Instructions apply to all Claudius Peters products, as are described more precisely in
individual Operating and Assembly Instructions.
These Basic Safety Instructions will make it easier to operate the plant, machines and subassemblies safely,
correctly and economically.
Like the relevant Operating and Assembly Instructions for plant, machines and subassemblies, these Basic
Safety Instructions contain important information. Observing them will help to avoid risks, to minimise repair
costs and downtime, and to increase the reliability and service life of the plant, machines and
subassemblies.
These Basic Safety Instructions are to be supplemented by further instructions based on national regulations
for accident prevention and for environment protection.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be permanently available at the place of operation of the plant,
machines and subassemblies.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be read and used by every person charged with working on the plant,
machines and subassemblies. This includes all life cycle phases:
• Packing, Transport, Storage, Assembly
• Commissioning
• Operation
• Maintenance and Repair
• Dismantling and Disposal
Operations occuring during these life cycle phases are, for instance:
• Operation
including setting-up, fault rectification during the course of work, removal of production waste, care,
disposal of operating and auxiliary materials
• Inspection
• Servicing
• Repair
In addition to these Basic Safety Instructions, the following points must also be observed:
• the accident prevention regulations mandatory in the country of use and at the place of operation
• the generally recognised and applicable technical rules for safe and professional work in the country of
use and at the place of operation.
Non-compliance with the safety instructions can endanger persons and the environment and machines as
well.
Non-compliance with the safety instructions renders all guarantee and liability entitlements null and void.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 4 of 32
9/449
2 Local Warning and Mandatory Signs
The operator must affix the warning and mandatory signs illustrated below in such a way that they are clearly
visible at all times.
Warning of suspended loads
Wear hard hat
Wear protective gloves
Use protective footwear
Use ear protectors
Wear safety goggles
Wear face mask
3 Information on Copyright and Protection Rights as per DIN ISO

16016
The reproduction, distribution and utilisation of this document as well as the communication of its contents to
others without express authorisation are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of
damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 5 of 32
10/449
4 Basic Safety Instructions
4.1 Warnings and Symbols as per DIN ISO 3864-2
The following designations and symbols are used in the Operating and Assembly Instructions for extremely
important information:
DANGER!
Information warning of immediately dangerous

situations which can cause serious injury or death!
Observe these "DANGER!" instructions, and behave with particular care under the relevant circumstances.
Also inform other users of all safety instructions. General safety and accident prevention regulations must
also be observed in addition to the instructions provided in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the
Operating and Assembly Instructions!
WARNING!
Information warning of potentially dangerous

situations which may cause serious injury or death!
Observe these "WARNING!" instructions, and behave with particular care under the relevant circumstances.
Also inform other users of all safety instructions. General safety and accident prevention regulations must
also be observed in addition to the instructions provided in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the
Operating and Assembly Instructions!
CAUTION!
Information warning of potentially dangerous situations

which may cause minor or moderate injury!
Observe these "CAUSION!" instructions, and behave with care under the relevant circumstances. Also
inform other users of all safety instructions. General safety and accident prevention regulations must also be
observed in addition to the instructions provided in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the Operating and
Assembly Instructions!
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 6 of 32
11/449
NOTE!
Information warning of damage to mechanical equipment!
"NOTE!" is printed at those locations in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the Operating and Assembly
Instructions that call for particular attention in order to satisfy guidelines, regulations, instructions and
working procedures, and in order to prevent damage or destruction of the machine and/or other parts of the
plant.
4.2 Basic Principle / Designated Use

The Claudius Peters products described in these operating instructions are subject to the 2006/42/EC
machine directive and are commissioned as equipment or as a machine in accordance with Article 1,
Section 1 a). They are only suitable for handling/conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The Claudius Peters products described in these assembly instructions are marketed as an assembly. They
are only suitable for handling/conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The plant, machines and subassemblies are intended exclusively for use in accordance with the chapter on
"Designated use". The content of this chapter is to be found in the individual operating or assembly
instructions.
Any other use, e.g. conveying toxic goods, shall not be regarded as designated, and will result in all
performance and operating guarantees becoming null and void. Deliberate modifications to the plant,
machines and subassemblies will release the manufacturer from all liability for any subsequent damage
incurred by such modifications. The risk shall be borne solely by the user.
Designated use includes also observation of the Operating and Assembly Instructions that belong to the
relevant plant, machines and subassemblies, along with observation of the inspection and servicing
specifications and the use of original spare parts.
The plant, machines and subassemblies are designed in accordance with the state of the art and generally
recognised safety guidelines. Nevertheless, they can pose a risk of injury and danger for operating personnel
or third parties. Furthermore, damage can be incurred by the plant, machines and subassemblies or other
equipment. They may therefore only be operated when in perfect technical condition for designated use and
under observation of the Operating and Assembly Instructions.
The plant, machines and subassemblies must not be operated unless they are properly installed and have
been commissioned.
The plant, machines and subassemblies, furthermore, may only be operated by personnel who are aware of
the hazards associated with the use of products of this sort. Malfunctions, in particular any that impair the
safety of the plant, machines and subassemblies, must therefore be rectified immediately.
Consultation with Claudius Peters is essential if it is intended to make any other use of the equipment.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 7 of 32
12/449
4.3 Organisational Procedures
Keep the Operating and Assembly Instructions for the plant, machines and subassemblies and these Basic
Safety Instructions permanently on hand at the place of operation.
In addition to the Operating and Assembly Instructions, observe and provide instructions covering generally
applicable legal and other mandatory regulations governing accident prevention and protection of the
environment.
Such responsibilities may also concern, for example, the handling of dangerous materials, the provision and
wearing of personal protection equipment, or traffic regulations.
The Operating and Assembly Instructions are to be supplemented by instructions including obligatory
control, supervision and reporting relevant to features specific to the company, e.g. with respect to work
organisation, work flow and personnel.
Before starting work, the personnel required to perform activities associated with the plant, machines and
subassemblies must have read and understood the Operating and Assembly Instructions. The chapter
covering "Safety instructions" must be given particular attention. It will be too late to do so once work has
started.
Above all, this applies to personnel who are only occasionally involved, for instance those employed to set
up or service the plant, machines and subassemblies.
It is necessary to check that personnel are working in a safety-conscious manner, aware of risks, and in
observance of the Operating and Assembly Instructions.
Personnel must not allow long hair to hang open, and must not wear loose clothing or jewellery, including
rings. There is a risk of injury if such items become caught up or drawn into the machinery.
Ensure that the working area at and around the plant, machines and subassemblies is clear and clean.
Any personal protective equipment that is required must be used, in particular when this is called for by
regulations.
Safety equipment must never be dismantled or taken out of operation.
Observe and follow any safety or danger signs at the plant, machines and subassemblies.
All safety and danger signs at the plant, machines and subassemblies must be complete and maintained in a
legible condition.
In the event of safety-related modifications to the plant, machines and subassemblies, or if the operational
behaviour changes, the plant, machines and subassemblies must immediately be stopped using the main
command equipment, and the malfunction must be reported without delay to the responsible body or person.
Changes, additions and modifications to the plant, machines and subassemblies must not be carried out
without the approval of Claudius Peters. This also includes the fitting and adjustment of safety devices and
safety valves, and to welding at supporting structures.
Spare parts must meet Claudius Peters technical specifications. Conformity is only guaranteed in the case
of original spare parts.
Do not make any changes to programs (software) in programmable control systems.
Replace hydraulic hoses at the stated times, or at appropriate short intervals, even if no faults that could
endanger safety are visible.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 8 of 32
13/449
Keep to the timetable of recurring tests and inspections specified or indicated in the Operating and Assembly
Instructions. Regular servicing is the precondition for reliable operation of the plant, machines and
subassemblies.
It is essential that the appropriate workshop equipment is used in order to carry out maintenance or repair
work.
Make the location and method of use of fire extinguishers known. Note what facilities exist for raising a fire
alarm and for fire fighting.
Hazardous areas are to be marked and guarded by a barrier. Only authorised personnel may enter such
areas.
4.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities
Any work on the plant, machines and subassemblies must only be performed by reliable and qualified
personnel. Observe the minimum legally permitted age.
The safety instructions applicable in the country of use must be observed. These include the regulations
governing social insurance against occupational accidents, operational safety decrees, various EU
guidelines and implementation thereof within the framework of national legislation.
Only use trained or instructed personnel. Make sure that the responsibilities of the personnel for operating,
setting up, servicing and repair are clearly specified.
Make sure that only personnel who have been charged with the job carry out work at the plant, machines
and subassemblies.
Clearly specify the responsibilities of the operator of the plant or machine, and make it possible for him to
decline instructions from third parties that conflict with safety.
Personnel who are being trained, or are in the process of learning or being instructed, or who are involved in
general education may only work at the plant, machines and subassemblies under the constant supervision
of an experienced person.
Work at the electrical equipment of the plant, machines and subassemblies must only be performed by an
electrician or by instructed persons under the guidance and supervision of an electrician, in accordance with
electrical engineering regulations.
Work on gas appliances (equipment that consumes gas) must only be performed by specially trained
personnel.
Only persons with special knowledge and experience in hydraulics and pneumatics may work on the
hydraulic or pneumatic equipment.
Work on plant equipment in contact with or within areas of explosive hazard may only be performed by
persons who are authorised in accordance with the operational safety decrees or performed under
supervision of such persons. Such work must be co-ordinated from ONE responsible point; any requisite
approvals for work (e.g. fire permit) must be granted by this area. If necessary, fire watches must be
organised.
Personnel who are operating coal grinding or coal dispensing equipment must immediately report any
changes in the fine coal system that could have an effect on safety to the works management.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 9 of 32
14/449
5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases
5.1 Packing
The plant, machines and subassemblies are delivered in accordance with the requirements governing
transport by road, sea or air.
The use of packing material is limited to a maximum storage period of 2 years. The guidelines specified in
the CPN 147 (Claudius Peters standard) must also be observed.
Symbols that may be found on the packing must be observed!
topside fragile, handle with care keep dry centre of gravity fix rope here
5.2 Transport
WARNING!
Do not stay or work below suspended loads!

The operator must affix a warning sign in accordance with chapter 2!
Safety helmets, gloves and safety shoes must always be worn during
transport work! The operator must affix a warning sign in accordance with
chapter 2!
NOTE!
Electrical components (such as motors, terminal boxes etc.), drive components
(undercarriages etc.) and inlet and outlet nozzles must never be used as anchorages.
During transport it is important to ensure that components reach the assembly location
without having been twisted or deformed through the use of unsuitable carrying devices or
attachment methods.
Only use transport vehicles, lifting gear and load carrying equipment that is in proper technical condition and
has sufficient loading capacity for loading and unloading work.
Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.
Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.
Only charge experienced personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor
must keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 10 of 32
15/449
Closed boxes should be kept closed for as long as possible, and should be transported as close as possible
to the fitting location.
Only lift plant, machines and subassemblies using professional lifting equipment in accordance with the
instruction manual (attachment points for load suspension devices, etc.).
Both before and immediately after completion of the loading work, equipment components, machines and
assemblies must be secured against unintentional changes in position using equipment that is
recommended for the purpose or is supplied. Affix relevant warning signs!
Even if a change in its location is very small, equipment components and machines must be disconnected
from every external source of energy! Before starting operation again the equipment components and
machines must be properly connected to the mains.
Before starting operation again, carefully dismantle any items that have been attached for transport
purposes. Before restarting operation, carefully remount any items that have been detached for transport
purposes.
Carefully remove any auxiliary equipment before starting operation again.
Proceed only in accordance with the instruction manual to restart operation.
5.3 Storage
During storage, ensure that the plant, machines and subassemblies are dry or are covered in position for
mounting.
CAUTION!
Avoid setting loads down on or standing on the plant, machine or assembly!
Climbing on the equipment, machines and assemblies

is not permitted!
NOTE!
The specifications outlined in the CPN 147 shall also apply!
The materials incurred when removing packaging must be disposed of

in accordance with local disposal guidelines!
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 11 of 32
16/449
5.4 Assembly
WARNING!
The safety rules for conveying equipment, electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic
systems must always be observed (see sections 5.7, 5.9.1 and 5.9.2)!
Do not enter or work in the area underneath a suspended load!

Plant, machines and subassemblies must not be used as climbing aids!
assembly work! In addition, safety glasses and dust masks must be worn
when performing assembly work inside existing plant!
The operator must affix warning signs in accordance with chapter 2!
Electrical connections may only be carried out by an electrician!
Assembly work may only be carried out by trained specialists who

have received instruction on the plant, machines and subassemblies
and who can foresee and avoid possible hazards!
Any time that plant or machine parts are transported, raised or lowered, the work must only be done whilst
observing the basic safety instructions in accordance with chapter 5.2.
During fitting, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully attached to
lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically correct
lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity.
Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.
areas.
Under no circumstances may safety equipment be blocked, bridged or made ineffective.
If local rules or requirements from the operator make further safety procedures necessary, these must also
be implemented.
Observe any applicable national regulations!
The list of supplies contains all main parts required for assembly of the installations, machines and
components. Which of these parts have to be supplied by Claudius Peters or the customer is defined in the
order. Parts to be supplied by the customer have to be delivered in due time for assembly.
The place of assembly must be suitable for all static and dynamic loads and must be free of vibrations.
During planning a clearance of sufficient size around the installations, machines and components must be
provided in order to facilitate assembly and maintenance.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 12 of 32
17/449
Assembly of the installations, machines and components has to be carried out on the basis of the lastest
foundation plans, dimension sheets, plant drawings and assembly drawings.
Before start of assembly the existing connection points have to be checked for dimensional accuracy in
accordance with the arrangement drawing.
We recommend to have Claudius Peters personnel carry out the assembly work. For damages caused by
inadequate execution we do not assume liabiliy!
For any assembly work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out assembly work at greater heights.
Keep all handles, steps, side rails, platforms, stages and ladders free from dirt and from snow and ice.
Before welding, burning or grinding, clean dust and combustible materials from the plant, machines and
subassemblies and its surroundings, and provide sufficient ventilation (explosion hazard).
Lay and assemble hydraulic and compressed-air piping in a proper manner. Do not mix up connections.
Fittings and the length and quality of the hose pipes must satisfy the relevant requirements.
Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).
When using oil, grease and other chemical materials, observe the safety regulations relevant to each
product.
Work at gas engineering appliances (equipment that consumes gas) must only be performed by specially
trained personnel.
Any work on the electrical plant, machines or operating material must only be performed by an electrical
specialist or under the guidance and supervision of an electrical specialist in accordance with the electrical
engineering regulations.
For a safe and trouble-free operation a stable network has to be made available. The data of the
specification must be checked.
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.
Clean oil, fuel or other maintenance materials off connections and screwed joints.
Dry cleaning of the surfaces is required by the Operating and Assembly Instructions. The dry cleaning is
preferably to be carried out with a dry vacuum cleaner.
If it is necessary to clean with water or any other cleaning agent, any openings into which, for reasons of
safety and/or function, neither water or cleaning agent may penetrate must be covered or sealed. Electric
motors and control cabinets are at particular risk.
Aggressive cleaning agents must not be used!
Use lint-free cleaning cloths instead. It is forbidden to use high-pressure cleaners on the surfaces. This will
protect any personnel who are occupied with work at the equipment, machines or assemblies, as well as
other personnel in the hazardous area, from particles or small parts that might be thrown around.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 13 of 32
18/449
Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).
A check must be made to see that all relevant blocking units are appropriately switched or secured before
switching on or starting up individual parts of the plant (components). Safety valves must be fitted at the
prescribed positions.
The following regulations must be observed for assembly in the explosively hazardous area:
a. A check must always be made first to examine whether the explosive atmosphere can be prevented.
b. Written job approvals must be available.
c. Only low-spark tools may be used in the vicinity of the IIC explosion group.
d. Tools and equipment made of aluminium may not be used.
e. Sufficient fire-extinguishing equipment must be available.
f. Escape routes must be clearly marked and workers must be familiar with them.
g. Workers must be familiarised with the local regulations governing conduct.
h. Fire permits must be available when necessary.
i. A fire watch must be co-ordinated with the fire brigade when necessary.
j. Sufficient measuring instruments for monitoring concentration in the workplace must be available.
k. All motorised and/or electric devices and auxiliary materials must be certified for the respective local
zone as well as being in impeccable conditions.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 14 of 32
19/449
5.5 Commissioning
WARNING!
Only commence operation of the equipment, machines or assemblies if all
safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g. removable or fixed guards,
emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place and are
fully functioning!
Open inlets, outlets and inspection openings are strictly not allowed!
During commissioning safety helmet and safety shoes must be worn at all
times! The operator must affix warning signs in accordance with chapter 2!
Commissioning should be carried out under the leadership of a commissioning engineer from Claudius
Peters.
Before commissioning, the manufacturer's operating manuals for all the drive units and the data on the type
plates must be observed.
Before commissioning of the installations, machines and components it has to be checked if:
• the assembly has been carried out in accordance with the operating instructions,
• no foreign matter (tools, auxiliary means, etc.) are located in / at the installation parts, machine and
components,
• the drive unit (motor, gear) has been installed and aligned adequately and has been filled with lubricant
acc. to the lubrication list,
• the correct sense of rotation of the drive is ensured,
• the operating voltage is in accordance with the motor name plate,
• the provided safety devices have been installed acc. to their function, have been integrated in the control
and are ready for functioning.
Before start, ensure that no one will be endangered by the starting installation parts and machines.
areas.
Under no circumstances must safety equipment be prevented from operating.
Under no circumstances may safety equipment be blocked and/or bridged and/or made ineffective.
Observe and follow any safety or danger signs at the plant, machines and subassemblies.
be taken into account and implemented.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 15 of 32
20/449
In addition to the instruction manual, observe generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations
governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of commissioning the plant, machines and subassemblies must
have read and understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety
Instructions". It will be too late to do so once work has started.
For any work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have been
provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb on.
Wear safety devices to prevent falling when working at greater heights.
Any personal protective equipment that is required must be used, in particular when this is called for by
regulations.
Observe monitoring indicators and the starting and stopping procedures in accordance with the operating
instructions.
The operator may only start the machine up when he has convinced himself that it is in proper condition, that
there is nobody in the hazardous area, and that nobody can be put at risk when the plant, machines and
subassemblies starts.
If the plant, machines and subassemblies are completely switched off during commissioning, they must be
safeguarded against being switched on again unexpectedly:
• lock the main switch and withdraw the keys
Always properly tighten screwed joints that have been loosened during commissioning work.
If it is necessary to dismantle safety equipment in the course of the commissioning work, then refitting and
inspection of the safety equipment must be carried out immediately this work has been completed.
Spare parts must meet Claudius Peters technical specifications. Conformity is always guaranteed in the
case of original spare parts.
Make sure that operating materials, auxiliary materials and spare parts are disposed of safely and in an
environmentally friendly manner.
product.
Work at gas engineering appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially
trained personnel.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 16 of 32
21/449
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.
Be careful when using hot operating or auxiliary materials (burning or scalding hazard).
5.6 Operation
WARNING!
Only commence operation of the equipment, machines or assemblies if all
safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g. removable or fixed guards,
emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place and are
fully functioning!
Open inlets, outlets and inspection openings are strictly not allowed!
During commissioning safety helmet and safety shoes must be worn at all
times! The operator must affix warning signs in accordance with chapter 2!
Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety. Take measures to ensure that the plant,
machines and subassemblies are only operated only in a safe and properly functioning condition!
be implemented.
Check the plant, machines and subassemblies for externally detectable damage or defects at least once per
shift. Notify the responsible body or person immediately of any changes (including any deviations from the
operating behaviour). If necessary, stop and safeguard the plant, machines and subassemblies immediately.
In case of malfunction, stop and safeguard the plant, machines and subassemblies immediately. Have the
malfunction rectified immediately.
Observe monitoring indicators and the starting and stopping procedures in accordance with the Operating
and Assembly Instructions.
The operator may only start the plant and machine up when he has assured himself that it is in proper
condition, that there is nobody in the hazardous area, and that nobody can be put at risk when the plant or
machine starts.
The selector switch must be positioned to NORMAL OPERATION and must be locked.
Do not switch off or remove vacuum or ventilation equipment during operation of plant, machines and
subassemblies.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 17 of 32
22/449
5.6.1 Maintenance, repair and inspection openings
The following safety rule has to be observed for all silos, bins, machines and subassemblies which are
equipped with a door or a cover:
WARNING!
Doors and covers for maintenance and repair work have to be

kept closed during operation!
5.7 Maintenance, repair and other special work
WARNING!
systems must always be observed (see chapter 5.7, 5.9.1 and 5.9.2)!

Safety helmets, gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses and dust masks must
always be worn during maintenance and repair work!
Maintenance and repair work at electrical components may only

be carried out by an electrician!
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by trained specialists
who have received instruction on the plant, machines and subassemblies
The timetable of adjustment, servicing and inspection tasks specified in the Operating and Assembly
Instructions must be maintained. Observe the instructions on the exchange of parts or equipment sections.
Only specialist staff may carry out this work.
Operating personnel must be informed before starting any maintenance and repair work. A supervisor must
be nominated.
In any work related to the operation, adaptation to manufacture, conversion or adjustment of the equipment,
machine, assemblies or their safety equipment, it is necessary to observe the procedures for switching the
equipment on and off in accordance with the Operating and Assembly Instructions. Instructions must again
be followed.
The procedures for switching on and switching off must also be followed during servicing or repair work.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 18 of 32
23/449
Plenty of space must be secured around the area where the maintenance and repair work is being carried
out.
During replacement, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully
attached to lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically
appropriate lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity!
Only charge skilled personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor must
keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
For any assembly work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise appropriately safe. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out maintenance work at greater heights.
Before starting any servicing, repair, dismantling or disposal work, oil, fuel, cleaning agents and residues of
the conveyed material must be cleaned off plant, machines and subassemblies, including, in particular, the
connections and screwed joints.
Dry cleaning of the surfaces is specified by the Operating and Assembly Instructions. The dry cleaning is
preferably to be carried out with a dry vacuum cleaner.
If it is necessary to clean with water or any other cleaning agent, any openings into which, for reasons of
safety and/or function, neither water or cleaning agent may penetrate must be covered or sealed. Electric
motors and control cabinets are at particular risk.
Aggressive cleaning agents must not be used! Use lint-free cleaning cloths instead.
It is forbidden to use high-pressure cleaners on the surfaces. This will protect any personnel who are
occupied with work at the equipment, machines or assemblies, as well as other personnel in the hazardous
area, from particles or small parts that might be thrown around.
When cleaning the machine cabin, make sure that temperature sensors in the fire detection and
extinguishing appliance do not come into contact with the hot cleanser. Otherwise the fire extinguisher might
be activated.
Completely remove covers and glue after cleaning.
After cleaning, check all fuel, motor oil or hydraulic oil hoses for leaks, loose joints, chafing or other damage.
Repair any faults discovered immediately.
After maintenance or repair work, always firmly tighten screwed joints that have been undone.
If it has been necessary to dismantle safety equipment for the purposes of fitting, servicing or repair work,
the safety equipment must be refitted and tested immediately after the fitting, servicing or repair work has
been carried out.
Make sure that operating materials, auxiliary materials and spare parts are disposed of safely and in an
environmentally friendly manner.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 19 of 32
24/449
4 Safety rules for conveying equipment
• Rule 1 - Disconnect the supply of material
The devices that feed in material must be closed.
The material channels must be run until empty. It may be necessary to observe follow-up times.
All ventilating units such as fans must be stopped and secured to prevent them being accidentally switched
on again.
If pressurised containers or pressure reservoirs are installed in the conveying equipment, they must be run
until empty and pressure must be discharged.
• Rule 2 - Secure against unintentional restarting
The servicing slide must be closed.
The drives of any machines that are located in the part of the plant that is to be serviced must be
disconnected from electrical power and secured to prevent them being accidentally switched on again.
The safety switch must be operated.
• Rule 3 - Check that no material is present
The parts of the equipment must be checked visually to see that no material residues are left. If any material
is left, it must be removed before this work begins.
• Rule 4 - Avoid hazards from neighbouring equipment
If there is any possibility of interference (vibrations etc.) from other parts of the equipment, the connections
must be securely disconnected, and operation of the parts of the equipment concerned must be stopped.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 20 of 32
25/449
5.7.1 Doors and covers for maintenance/repair work and inspections
The material contained in silos, bins and hoppers can emerge unexpectedly when opening doors or covers
and can cause serious injuries or even death.
Inside silos, bins and hoppers material can form bridges which may collapse unexpectedly and fall down.
To avoid harm to persons and damage to property the following has to be observed:
WARNING!
5.8 Dismantling and disposal
WARNING!

always be worn during dismantling work!
Dismantling of electrical components may only be carried out

by an electrician!
Dismantling work may only be carried out by trained specialists who

have received instruction on the plant, machines and subassemblies
Operating personnel must be informed before starting any disassembly and disposal work. A supervisor
must be nominated.
Before disassembly all plant components and machines must be disconnected from all external power
supply! Observe the notes for particularly hazardous jobs as per chapter 5.9!
Provide for a safe and environmentally-friendly disposal of consumables and ancilliary materials!
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 21 of 32
26/449
areas.
Under no circumstances may safety equipment be blocked, bridged or made ineffective.
be implemented.
For any dismantling work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out dismantling work at greater heights.
Before burning or grinding, clean dust and combustible materials from the plant, machines and
subassemblies and its surroundings, and provide sufficient ventilation (explosion hazard).
product.
Work at gas engineering appliances (equipment that consumes gas) must only be performed by specially
trained personnel.
For disassembly individual parts and large sub-assemblies have to be fastened and secured carefully in
hoisting equipment to prevent that they can become a hazard. Use only suitable and technically perfect lifting
gear and suspension systems with adequate lifting capacity!
Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.
Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.
Only charge experienced personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor
must keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
Both before and immediately after completion of the loading work, equipment components, machines and
assemblies must be secured against unintentional changes in position. Affix relevant warning signs!
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 22 of 32
27/449
The following regulations must be observed for assembly in the explosively hazardous area:
a. Explosive atmospheres must be prevented!

b. Written job approvals must be available.
c. Only low-spark tools may be used in the vicinity of the IIC explosion group.
d. Tools and equipment made of aluminium may not be used.
e. Sufficient fire-extinguishing equipment must be available.
f. Escape routes must be clearly marked and workers must be familiar with them.
g. Workers must be familiarised with the local regulations governing conduct.
h. Fire permits must be available when necessary.
i. A fire watch must be co-ordinated with the fire brigade when necessary.
j. Sufficient measuring instruments for monitoring concentration in the workplace must be available.
k. All motorised and/or electric devices and auxiliary materials must be certified for the respective local
zone as well as being in impeccable conditions.
5.9 Notes for Particularly Hazardous Jobs
5.9.1 Electrical Energy
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating. In case of malfunctions in the electrical energy
supply, switch off the plant, machines and subassemblies immediately.
Plant or machine parts on which inspection, servicing or repair are being performed, must, if so specified, be
disconnected from the electrical power. First check that the isolated parts are not live, then connect to earth
and attach circuit shorts, as well as isolating neighbouring live parts.
The electrical equipment of plant, machines and subassemblies must be inspected and checked at regular
intervals. Defects such as loose connections or scorched cables must be repaired immediately.
If work on live parts does become necessary, call in a second person who can actuate the emergency or
main switch in case of emergency. Block off the working area with a red and white safety chain and a danger
sign. Only use electrically isolated tools.
When carrying out work on high voltage assemblies, connect the supply cable to ground after isolation from
the supply, and short circuit components such as capacitors using an earthing rod.
Carry out regular inspections of the electrical equipment and plants. Observe the inspection intervals and
regulations valid at site. Portable electrical equipment, however, must be checked at least every two years
and stationary electrical equipment at least every four years by qualified personnel with proper testing tools!
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 23 of 32
28/449
5 Safety rules for the electrical system
• Rule 1 - Electrical disconnection (mains isolator in accordance with EN 60204-1)
All the conductors connecting the electrical equipment, machines or assemblies must be disconnected from
electrically live parts. Depending on the operating voltage, a different isolating distance will need to be
created between those parts that are electrically live and those that are not.
For reasons of safety, any work on electrical operating equipment working at voltages above 50 V AC or
120 V DC requires electrical disconnection unless special measures have been taken for working when the
equipment is live.
Before starting the work, all electrical connections to electrically live cables must be switched off. This can be
done in one of the following ways:
- operating the main switch
- proper removal of the fuses
- withdrawing plugs
- lock the main switch and withdraw the keys
If those working on the equipment cannot make the disconnection themselves, the work must only begin
after confirmation of the disconnection, whether given orally, by phone, in writing or through
telecommunications. It is not permitted to merely agree a time during which the power will be disconnected.
The personnel required to do the work on site must use suitable measuring or test equipment to check that
all the connectors are free from voltage (for voltages < 1 kV use two-pole test equipment, but for voltages >
1 kV use single-pole high-voltage testers or capacitative test equipment appropriate for the level of voltage).
• Rule 2 - Secure against being switched back on
The plant, machines and subassemblies on which work is to be done must be reliably secured to prevent
them accidentally being switched back on. This can be done, for instance, by replacing fuses that have been
unscrewed with lockable dummy elements, or circuit breakers can be secured with adhesive foil. If it is also
possible to protect the equipment from being accidentally switched back on by securing the main switch, the
switch cabinet or the fuse box with a padlock. A sign forbidding the equipment from being switched back on it
must be applied for the duration of the work.
• Rule 3 - Check that no voltage is present
Checking the absence of voltage in low-voltage networks, i.e. electrical equipment operating at up to 1 kV,
may only be done by a qualified electrician or an electrically trained person, and it may only be done with
devices or equipment suitable for the purpose.
Checking the absence of voltage on high-voltage equipment operating at voltages greater than 1 kV may
only be carried out by qualified electrician, and only using devices or equipment suitable for the purpose.
Due to the high risk of accidents in high-powered equipment, the use of multimeters is forbidden. Absence of
voltage must always be checked at each individual conductor.
Voltage checking devices for equipment operating at up to 1 kV usually have two poles. Voltage checking
devices for equipment rated at more than 1 kV only have one pole.
The voltage checking devices used must be appropriate for the nominal voltage concerned, and must be
tested before and after being used for checking the absence of voltage. For this purpose, the functioning of
the voltage checker must be tested on something that is definitely live:
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 24 of 32
29/449
- beforehand, because the voltage checker may be faulty
- afterwards, because the voltage checker may have developed a fault after the initial test.
• Rule 4 - Ground and short-circuit
After establishing that there is no voltage, the power conductors and the electrical ground must be joined by
a short-circuit-proof grounding and shorting equipment. As a result, the upstream over-current protectors will
trigger if the lines are accidentally switched on, and charging from parallel lines (e.g. overhead lines) is also
prevented.
It is also necessary to ensure that the grounding is done first, then the shorting. With the exception of
overhead lines and distribution networks, the grounding and short circuiting can be omitted for equipment
rated at up to 1 kV, provided Rules 1 to 3 have been followed correctly.
• Rule 5 - Cover or prevent access to neighbouring electrically live parts
Insulating cloths or hoses are sufficient for equipment operating at less than 1 kV. Additional warning panels,
ropes or barrier panels are required for voltages greater than 1 kV. Body protection, close fitting clothing and
gloves must be worn.
5.9.2 Pneumatics / Hydraulics
WARNING!
For all work at pneumatic / hydraulic equipment wear

safety goggles!
Check all conduits, hoses and screwed joints for leaks and externally visible defects at regular intervals.
Repair defects immediately. Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
Depressurise any parts of the system and pressure pipes (hydraulic, compressed air) that will have to be
opened, in accordance with the description of the relevant assemblies, before starting any repair work.
Lay and assemble hydraulic and compressed-air piping in a proper manner. Do not mix up connections.
Fittings and the length and quality of the hose pipes must satisfy the relevant requirements.
Carry out pressure test by stepwise increase of the pressure! After each increase check all lines, hoses and
screwed connections for leaks!
At no time may safety equipment be blocked, bypassed or made ineffective.
Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 25 of 32
30/449
5 Safety rules for pneumatic and hydraulic systems
• Rule 1 - Disconnect the power supply
All drives must be switched off. The pneumatic or hydraulic equipment must be disconnected from the
distribution system at the main switch.
• Rule 2 - Secure against being switched back on
The pneumatic or hydraulic system must be secured to prevent it being switched back on (secure the main
switch against being turned on again).
If only particular regions of the pneumatic or hydraulic system are to be disconnected from the common
pressure supply, it is necessary to check that the correct joint has been disconnected.
• Rule 3 - Release pressure from the system, including any pressure reservoirs; lower any loads that are
being held up, or support them from underneath, and release any remaining energy
Pressure must be released from the pneumatic or hydraulic system before starting the work.
Pressure reservoirs that are connected to the pneumatic or hydraulic system must also be disconnected from
the equipment or discharged. No new hazards must be created by the discharge. Check that the pressure
has been fully released.
Loads that are held up pneumatically or hydraulically can create significant pressure in parts of the
pneumatic or hydraulic system, even when the power supply is switched off. In complex equipment or
machines, this pressure can be transferred to other parts of the installation. For this reason, loads that are
held up, such as conveyed material or machine components, must be lowered before beginning the work,
secured using available locks, or securely supported. After all the pressure feeds in the pneumatic or
hydraulic system have been discharged, it is still possible for residual pressures to be present in compressed
air lines or fluid columns under pressure between valves and other components. These must also be
released, for instance by operating the valves repeatedly, or in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
• Rule 4 - Check that no pressure is present
After the pressure has been released, the screwed connections in pneumatic or hydraulic lines should at first
be opened slowly and carefully. Undoing the screwed connections should be continued with care, so that
any possible hazards from pressure in the compressed air or the hydraulic fluid can be noticed in time, and
suitable precautions can be taken. If there is any pressure, the screwed connection must not be undone any
further. Release of pressure from the system must be repeated, and its effectiveness checked again.
• Rule 5 - Avoid hazards from neighbouring equipment
Any hazards arising from neighbouring equipment, or risks to those working with neighbouring equipment,
must be prevented.
When the work has been completed, all the connections and components must be checked to see that they
agree with the specifications of the circuit diagram. All screws that have been undone, line connections and
electrical plug-in connections must be tightened and checked.
Supports and fastenings for loads that are being held up must not be removed until the load is again
securely supported by pneumatic or hydraulic means.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 26 of 32
31/449
5.9.3 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke
Only perform welding, torch or grinding work on the plant, machines and subassemblies if this has been
explicitly approved. A risk of fire or explosion can arise.
Dust and combustible materials must be cleaned off plant, machines and subassemblies and their
surroundings before welding, burning or grinding. Adequate ventilation must also be ensured (risk of
explosion)!
During working observe any national regulations that may apply!
5.10 Protective Measures
5.10.1 Protection from Heat
The plant, machines and subassemblies are, depending on the particular version, designed for materials at a
high temperature. If such hot material is conveyed, the equipment can be expected to have an increased
surface temperature. In this case, the plants, machines and subassemblies have to be marked with a
warning sign (see the warning note below).
Whether or not it is permitted to isolate equipment, machines or assemblies must be determined from the
corresponding operating or assembly instructions.
CAUTION!
The surface must not be touched when it is operating - risk of burning!
NOTE!
Plant, machines and subassemblies must always be kept clear of dirt and excessive dust!
5.10.2 Noise Protection
Sound insulation appliances at the equipment or machine must be in their protective position during
operation. Wear prescribed ear muffs.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 27 of 32
32/449
5.10.3 Protection from Materials and Substances
WARNING!
During operation, the servicing openings on the plant, machines and

subassemblies must be kept closed!
5.10.4 Protection against slipping, tripping and falling
WARNING!
The area around the plant, machines and subassemblies must always be
kept clear of dirt and excessive dust!
5.10.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials
product.
Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).
5.11 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment
5.11.1 General
Coal dust that is stirred up into the air presents a risk of fire and explosion. Coal dust should never therefore
be agitated.
Fires in coal dust stored in bunkers or heaps must not be fought with a water jet, but only using a suitable
extinguishing procedure. Appropriate involvement of the responsible fire service is necessary.
Even small quantities of accumulated coal dust tend to ignite spontaneously; such dust must be removed
with a suitable vacuum cleaner.
Some types of coal release gases that are toxic and that present a risk of explosion.
Never open manholes or explosion flaps in the grinding and bunkering equipment during operation, because
the entry of air into the partially pressurised system can create an explosively hazardous mixture of dust and
air. For the same reasons, any leaks that might arise in containers or pipelines must be rectified immediately.
Never enter any area of the plant (bins, mill and others) full of coal dust; only enter bins that have been
emptied after obtaining approval from the works management, after sufficient ventilation, and in the presence
of a second person. Persons who enter must be attached to ropes, and oxygen equipment must be kept
ready.
And any kind of work (such as welding - fire permit required!) on pipes that carry coal dust is only permitted
when the equipment is switched off, after thorough cleaning, and whilst taking strict safety precautions.
Approval must be obtained from the works management.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 28 of 32
33/449
5.11.2 Safety from Coal Dust Explosions
Dust is created industrially through grinding procedures (flour, sugar, paint, plastic or coal), or may arise as a
waste product (abrasion, grinding). If the material is combustible, i.e. if it reacts exothermically with oxygen,
the powder product is referred to as "combustible dust".
Combustible dust has a tendency to ignite spontaneously when heated. Particular safety regulations must be
observed in order to avoid explosion or fire.
The following points in particular must be taken account when designing transport equipment for coal or coal
dust, coal grinding equipment, or storage silos for coal dust:
SR Coal Dust (SR-Kohlestaub)

TRD 413
VDI 2263, 3676
VDE 0165
AD Instruction Leaflets (AD-Merkblätter)
The circumstances that make a dust explosion likely are present when the three following conditions are
simultaneously present:
1. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
2. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
3. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A dust explosion cannot occur if even one of these preconditions is absent – this decision can however
seldom be made by the worker independently.
5.11.3 Explosion Protection
A distinction is made between primary, secondary and tertiary explosion protection.
5.11.3.1 Primary Explosion Protection
Primary explosion protection prevents the occurrence of an explosion. An explosion can be reliably
prevented if any one of the three following conditions is absent:
A. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
B. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
C. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A) Combustible dust that is sufficiently fine is generally present within the parts of the metering
equipment or the grinding plant. Condition A is therefore always present.
B) To a large extent, sources of ignition with sufficient energy can be avoided by taking specific measures
(see the electrical and mechanical engineering documentation). It is not, however, possible to avoid
some residual risk. Care must be taken to see that all pipes that carry coal dust are always grounded, so
that electrostatic discharges are avoided, and that any potentially insulating locations are bridged by an
earth strap.
C) An inert atmosphere is maintained in all parts of the equipment in which coal dust is transported or
stored under all operating conditions. The oxygen concentration is maintained below the critical limit.
This reliably prevents a coal dust explosion.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 29 of 32
34/449
If the equipment is operated and maintained in accordance with regulations using the available techniques,
the occurrence of a coal dust explosion can be ruled out as far as it is humanly possible to judge.
5.11.3.2 Secondary Explosion Protection
When the combustible dust and a requisite oxygen percentage cannot be avoided, all electrical and
mechanical operating materials must have the same method of construction which is resistant to blast.
In combination with additional measures, e.g. proper installation, regular maintenance and preventive
servicing, the possible ignition sources can be controlled to such an extent that no ignition arises when the
equipment is correctly operated. If ignition does nevertheless occur, the equipment is designed (e.g. through
pressure-resistant encapsulation) to withstand the stress, and the fire cannot escape from the unit.
5.11.3.3 Tertiary Explosion Protection
In the case of tertiary explosion protection, an explosion is permitted. Precautions must however be taken to
prevent the effects of the explosion posing a danger for the life and health of people. Tertiary explosion
protection can be achieved by means of appropriate design and construction (for example, design that is
resistant to pressure and shock), or through explosion suppression, or by means of explosion pressure relief.
5.11.4 Division into Zones in Accordance with the 2014/34/EU Directive
In order to assess the extent of the measures that need to be taken, areas at risk of explosion are divided
into zones [see 1999/92/EC Directive (ATEX 137)].
For combustible dusts, these are:
Zone 20 A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is
present continuously, for long periods, or frequently.
likely to occur occasionally in normal operation.
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will only persist for a short period.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 30 of 32
35/449
5.11.5 Surface Temperature
The maximum permissible surface temperature of plant components is specified according to the
• smouldering temperature of the accumulated coal dust, T GI
or the
• ignition temperature of the coal dust, T Z
For stored coal dust, the max. permissible surface temperature is (T GI – 75°C).
WARNING!
The examples outlined below merely represent an 80% regulation for

atmospheric conditions. Under special conditions – or in the case of special
types of coal – these values may not be reached.
The real values are indicated in the data sheets available on site!
For hard coal dust, the lowest smouldering temperature of a layer of dust 5 mm thick is: T GI ,min = 245°C.
The permissible surface temperature for a layer of dust 5 mm thick is therefore 170°C. If the layer of dust is
thicker, the permissible surface temperature must be further reduced.
For agitated dust the max. permissible surface temperature is: 2/3 of the ignition temperature T Z .
For hard coal dust, the lowest ignition temperature is given by T Z,min = 550°C.
This means that the permissible surface temperature for hard coal dust that has been stirred up is 367°C.
Usually, this value must not be reached on the operating materials as coal dust can be deposited practically
anywhere. In this case, a limit of 170°C applies from the calculation of the smouldering temperature outlined
above.
5.11.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo
The measures outlined here represent recommendations; the operator (employer) must include, explain and
monitor these measures (and more) in his documents governing explosion protection.
• Monitoring the internal atmosphere inside the coal dust silo through continuous measurement of the
oxygen concentration.
• Monitoring for the development of smouldering within the coal dust silo through continuous measurement
of the CO concentration.
• Monitoring the temperature in the upper part of the coal dust silo through continuous temperature
measurement.
• Supplementary injection of CO 2 into the coal dust silo if a specified limit for the CO concentration within
the silo is exceeded.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 31 of 32
36/449
5.11.7 Electrical Equipment
The measures outlined here represent recommendations; the operator (employer) must include, explain and
monitor these measures (and more) in his documents governing explosion protection.
• Implemented to meet protection class IP 65
• The zones on site are outlined in the employer’s documents governing explosion protection; the
electrical (and mechanical) operating materials must be designed with explosion protection features for
the requirements arising on site.
• Within parts of the plant that carry coal dust the implementation is protected against explosion.
• Surface temperatures of drives less than 120°C.
• All parts of the plant that carry coal dust are earthed.
• Select and dimension cables and lines in accordance with the requirements.
• Observe the specifications governing set-up, e.g. EN 60079-14.
5.11.8 Health Hazards
Incorrect operation, servicing, assembly or conversion of the coal grinding and metering equipment can give
rise to the following hazards to personnel:
• Burns through heat radiation, through touching a hot surfaces, or through the escape of hot materials
• Hearing loss through medium to high noise emission
• Risk of fire or explosion through the escape of coal dust, gas or oil
• Electrical hazards through shorts to ground, short circuits or capacitative discharge
• A risk of slipping, stumbling or falling presented by pools of oil, dust or coal, or through inadequate
lighting
• Breathing in gases or coal dust released through faulty seals
• Risks of being crushed or struck by parts of the machine, or resulting from missing protective equipment
or warnings
5.11.9 The Workplace
Throughout the entire coal grinding and metering area, work places, in the sense of workplace guidelines,
are the particularly identified, closed rooms such as control and operating rooms as well as other offices and
workshops that are not classified as being under the immediate influence of the coal grinding and metering
equipment, and which therefore must be protected from noise and dust.
596.0009.1000A/11.en
Release 11: 01.09.2016
Page 32 of 32
37/449
CHAPTER 2
SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT
SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT

CHAPTER 2
38/449
Spare Parts Management
The storage of key spare and wear parts at the plant site is an important prerequisite for
the continuous functioning and availability of the plant and the Claudius Peters
equipment.
Only original spare parts delivered by Claudius Peters are subject to:
• guarantee commitment
• material and quality control
• technical improvements and upgrades
• Full replacement capability for 10 to 20 years
• DIN ISO 9001
We would like to emphasize that spare parts and accessories can only be claimed, which
have been delivered by Claudius Peters. The installation and/or the use of
non-original spare parts may have a negative influence on strength and static properties of
the equipment and/or the installation, which can considerably impair the active and/or
passive safety of the installation.
Claudius Peters does not accept any liability nor does it guarantee for damages caused
by the use of spare parts and accessories, which are non-original.
Please note that Claudius Peters often has special manufacturing specifications for its
products, and therefore will only offer spare parts, which are state-of-the-art and according
to latest legal and technical regulations.
For spare parts orders please provide the following information for correct identification of
parts:
• designation [description] of the equipment and its type
• Claudius Peters order-confirmation number
• spare parts drawing number
• Claudius Peters part no (OPTIONAL)
Any spare part requirement can then be processed correctly and without delay.
Please contact:
Claudius Peters (China) Ltd.
Unit A, 10F
Two Chinachem Placa
68 Connaught Road Central
HONG KONG
Tel: + 86 10 6501 3831
Fax: + 86 10 6501 3803
E-Mail: beijing@claudiuspeters.com
32.596.0021.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 09.11.2010
Page 1 of 1
39/449
CHAPTER 3
GENERAL LISTS, CERTIFICATES,

DOCUMENTS
CHAPTER 3 GENERAL LISTS, CERTIFICATES, DOCUMENTS
40/449
APR: Irimie, Mircea // DES: Pop, Daniela // 21/03/2017 10:28 // ID 13497500
SUPPLY AND SPARE PART LIST
REVISION: 00
STATUS: FINAL
LEGEND
E: Spare part
V: Wear part
NAME:
DATE
DANIELA POP KEYWORD
21.03.2017
ORDER NO.:
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
02-0/250883/613
PAGE:
02-0/250883-150/B-00.en 1
41/449
Table of contents
Main Plant (075941-01) 3
aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 250 H type 14 (118398-01002) 4
flow control gate 250 P, pneumatic shut-off (121410-01027) 6
rotary wing drive 124-100 (180114-01) 9
flow control gate 250 MP, motorized positioning (133844-01029) 10
aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 400 H type 14 (118398-01003) 13
flow control gate 400 P, pneumatic shut-off (121410-01024) 15
rotary wing drive 124-100 (180114-01) 18
flow control gate 400 MCD, motorized control (133844-01023) 19
Page 2 / 21 21.03.2017
42/449
Main Plant (075941-01) Supply List

supply position Description Article no. Sparepart parts Total unit Total Unit CP spare part drawing supplier dispatch
weight weight weight quantity date
0010 0010 aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 250 H type 14 118398-01002 61,300 367,80 KG 6,00 pc 643.0010.0014A/08.SV CP 31.03.17
0010 0020 hexagon head screw M10 x 40 031488-01 0,030 1,08 KG 36,00 pc CP 31.03.17
0010 0040 hexagon regular nut M10 012425-01 0,010 0,36 KG 36,00 pc CP 31.03.17
0010 0050 washer 11 012760-01 0,010 0,96 KG 96,00 pc CP 31.03.17
0010 0060 aeroslide gasket 1-250, profiled 003296-01 E 0,500 3,00 KG 6,00 pc CP 31.03.17
0020 0010 flow control gate 250 P, pneumatic shut-off 121410-01027 88,520 531,12 KG 6,00 pc 682.0010.1074A/07.SV CP 31.03.17
0030 0010 flow control gate 250 MP, motorized positioning 133844-01029 97,990 587,94 KG 6,00 pc 682.0010.1080A/06.SV CP 31.03.17
0040 0010 aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 400 H type 14 118398-01003 73,400 146,80 KG 2,00 pc 643.0010.0014A/08.SV CP 31.03.17
0040 0050 washer 11 012760-01 0,010 0,34 KG 34,00 pc CP 31.03.17
0050 0010 flow control gate 400 P, pneumatic shut-off 121410-01024 113,680 227,36 KG 2,00 pc 682.0010.1074A/07.SV CP 31.03.17
0060 0010 flow control gate 400 MCD, motorized control 133844-01023 127,310 254,62 KG 2,00 pc 682.0010.1080A/06.SV CP 31.03.17
Page 3 / 21 21.03.2017
43/449
aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 250 H type 14 (118398-01002)
Page 4 / 21 21.03.2017
44/449
aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 250 H type 14 (118398-01002) spare part list

supply position Description Article no. Sparepart Item no. parts Total unit Total Unit
weight weight weight quantity
0010 0010 slide plate 250,vertical 149491-02 E 10.20 5,000 30,00 KG 6,00 pc
0010 0010 stuffing box gland 250 101631-01 E 10.40 2,300 13,80 KG 6,00 pc
0010 0010 sealing cord 10x10 061610-01 V 10.210 0,141 1,182 KG 6,00 M
0010 0010 nut for shut-off gate type 14-18 101642-01 V 20.60 1,000 6,00 KG 6,00 pc
0010 0010 spindle 110261-01 V 20.70 2,000 12,00 KG 6,00 pc
0010 0010 bushing 2020 DU 043070-01 V 20.160 0,015 0,18 KG 12,00 pc
0010 0010 handwheel 200 x 18 208948-01 E 20.170 0,800 4,80 KG 6,00 pc
0010 0010 parallel key A 6 x 6 x 22 106105-01 E 20.260 0,012 0,072 KG 6,00 pc
Page 5 / 21 21.03.2017
45/449
flow control gate 250 P, pneumatic shut-off (121410-01027)
Page 6 / 21 21.03.2017
46/449
Page 7 / 21 21.03.2017
47/449
flow control gate 250 P, pneumatic shut-off (121410-01027) spare part list
supply position Description Article no. Sparepart Item no. parts Total unit Total Unit CP spare part drawing
0020 0010 housing 250, design A0, flow control gate 119573-01 E 10.100 39,100 234,60 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 cassette frame 250; type 2000 107364-01 E 10.110.10 4,500 27,00 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 clamping frame 250 109976-01 E 10.110.20 3,800 22,80 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 cover plate 250 ; type 2000 107372-01 E 10.110.30 0,400 2,40 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 flat gasket f.flow control gate 250 014959-01 V 10.110.50 0,040 0,24 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 roller seal f. flow control gate 250 013304-01 V 10.110.60 0,300 1,80 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 round bar sice 250 013786-01 E 10.110.90 0,200 1,20 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 pivot bearing GE 30 C 019856-01 V 10.140 0,160 1,92 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 spring washer B 30, curved 118186-01 E 10.150 0,030 0,36 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 perforated plate 250 canted 067243-02 E 10.170 0,400 2,40 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 sealing cover f. flow control gate sealing cover 064068-01 E 10.250 1,200 14,40 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 hexagon nut M6 055653-01 E 10.280 0,010 0,12 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 safety washer VS12 020972-01 E 10.310 0,001 0,012 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 hub 119503-01 E 10.340 2,000 24,00 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 rotary shaft seal A 30 x 47 x 7 019858-01 V 20.10 0,020 0,48 KG 24,00 pc
0020 0010 valve base plate ISO 1 078171-01 E 30.125 0,400 2,40 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 hexagon socket screw plug G 1/8 A 083886-01 E 30.126 0,007 0,042 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 angular screw-in connection G3/8A 064911-01 E 30.170 0,070 0,84 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 straight screw-in connection 067353-01 E 30.185 0,030 0,54 KG 18,00 pc
0020 0010 throttle valve 064941-01 E 30.190 0,100 1,20 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 polyamide-pipe PA 8 x 1,0 white polyamide-pipe natur 064945-01 E 30.200 0,200 0,12 KG 6,00 M
0020 0010 polyamide-pipe PA 8 x 1,0 blue polyamide-pipe blue 064945-02 E 30.201 0,200 0,12 KG 6,00 M
0020 0010 plate 125655-01 E 30.220 1,300 7,80 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 direction arrow 10x60 self-sealing 121163-01 E 30.350 0,010 0,12 KG 12,00 pc
0020 0010 wrench 183720-01 E 30.360 0,600 3,60 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 wing nut M6 012476-01 E 30.370 0,010 0,06 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 stud M6 x 20 067271-01 E 30.400 0,020 0,12 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 fabric for flow control gate 250 067233-01 V 40 0,110 0,66 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 console design C 123403-01 E 50 3,500 21,00 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 shaft 250, flow control gate 074166-01 E 60 2,480 14,88 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 roller 250; M220 097247-02 V 70 12,200 73,20 KG 6,00 pc
0020 0010 limit switch unit 4 M 180109-01 E 99 2,500 15,00 KG 6,00 pc 697.0010.0021A/00.SV
0020 0010 rotary wing drive 124-100 180114-01 E 101 7,300 43,80 KG 6,00 pc wear_parts_set
0020 0010 5/2-way-solenoid valve ISO size 1 131841-01 E 102 0,330 1,98 KG 6,00 pc
Page 8 / 21 21.03.2017
48/449
rotary wing drive 124-100 (180114-01) spare part list

0020 0010 sealing set f.pneumatic actuator 070124-01 V 101.10 0,380 2,28 KG 6,00 pc
Page 9 / 21 21.03.2017
49/449
flow control gate 250 MP, motorized positioning (133844-01029)
Page 10 / 21 21.03.2017
50/449
flow control gate 250 MP, motorized positioning (133844-01029)
Page 11 / 21 21.03.2017
51/449
flow control gate 250 MP, motorized positioning (133844-01029) spare part list
0030 0010 flat gasket f.flow control gate 250 014959-01 V 10.110.50 0,040 0,24 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 roller seal f. flow control gate 250 013304-01 V 10.110.60 0,300 1,80 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 hub 119503-01 E 10.340 2,000 24,00 KG 12,00 pc
0030 0010 stud M10 x 25 058712-01 E 30.230 0,020 0,48 KG 24,00 pc
0030 0010 adapter 25/25 133691-01 E 30.270 0,400 2,40 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 key for SW 25 074838-01 E 30.360 0,400 2,40 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 wing nut M6 012476-01 E 30.370 0,010 0,06 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 stud M6 x 20 067271-01 E 30.400 0,020 0,12 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 roller 250;P200 097247-10 V 70 12,400 74,40 KG 6,00 pc
0030 0010 actuating drive SQ25 133894-02 E 101 20,000 120,00 KG 6,00 pc
Page 12 / 21 21.03.2017
52/449
aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 400 H type 14 (118398-01003)
Page 13 / 21 21.03.2017
53/449
aeroslide shut-off gate 1 - 400 H type 14 (118398-01003) spare part list

0040 0010 slide plate 400,vertical 149491-05 E 10.20 8,100 16,20 KG 2,00 pc
0040 0010 stuffing box gland 400 103097-01 E 10.40 3,500 7,00 KG 2,00 pc
0040 0010 sealing cord 10x10 061610-01 V 10.210 0,141 0,508 KG 2,00 M
0040 0010 nut for shut-off gate type 14-18 101642-01 V 20.60 1,000 2,00 KG 2,00 pc
0040 0010 spindle 110261-01 V 20.70 2,000 4,00 KG 2,00 pc
0040 0010 bushing 2020 DU 043070-01 V 20.160 0,015 0,06 KG 4,00 pc
0040 0010 handwheel 200 x 18 208948-01 E 20.170 0,800 1,60 KG 2,00 pc
0040 0010 direction arrow plate, design B 20x80 003872-01 E 20.190 0,010 0,04 KG 4,00 pc
Page 14 / 21 21.03.2017
54/449
Page 15 / 21 21.03.2017
55/449
Page 16 / 21 21.03.2017
56/449
flow control gate 400 P, pneumatic shut-off (121410-01024) spare part list
supply position Description Article no. Sparepart Item no. parts Total unit Total Unit CP spare part drawing
0050 0010 flat gasket f.flow control gate size 400 015133-01 V 10.110.50 0,050 0,10 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 roller seal f.flow control gate 400 013307-01 V 10.110.60 0,400 0,80 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 hub 119503-01 E 10.340 2,000 8,00 KG 4,00 pc
0050 0010 valve base plate ISO 1 078171-01 E 30.125 0,400 0,80 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 angular screw-in connection G3/8A 064911-01 E 30.170 0,070 0,28 KG 4,00 pc
0050 0010 straight screw-in connection 067353-01 E 30.185 0,030 0,18 KG 6,00 pc
0050 0010 throttle valve 064941-01 E 30.190 0,100 0,40 KG 4,00 pc
0050 0010 polyamide-pipe PA 8 x 1,0 white polyamide-pipe natur 064945-01 E 30.200 0,200 0,04 KG 2,00 M
0050 0010 polyamide-pipe PA 8 x 1,0 blue polyamide-pipe blue 064945-02 E 30.201 0,200 0,04 KG 2,00 M
0050 0010 plate 125655-01 E 30.220 1,300 2,60 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 wrench 183720-01 E 30.360 0,600 1,20 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 wing nut M6 012476-01 E 30.370 0,010 0,02 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 stud M6 x 20 067271-01 E 30.400 0,020 0,04 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 Coupling piece SP 264 062125-01 E 60.20 0,600 0,60 KG 1,00 pc
0050 0010 roller 400; M470 097251-02 V 70 20,000 40,00 KG 2,00 pc
0050 0010 limit switch unit 4 M 180109-01 E 99 2,500 5,00 KG 2,00 pc 697.0010.0021A/00.SV
0050 0010 rotary wing drive 124-100 180114-01 E 101 7,300 14,60 KG 2,00 pc wear_parts_set
0050 0010 5/2-way-solenoid valve ISO size 1 131841-01 E 102 0,330 0,66 KG 2,00 pc
Page 17 / 21 21.03.2017
57/449
rotary wing drive 124-100 (180114-01) spare part list

0050 0010 sealing set f.pneumatic actuator 070124-01 V 101.10 0,380 0,76 KG 2,00 pc
Page 18 / 21 21.03.2017
58/449
flow control gate 400 MCD, motorized control (133844-01023)
Page 19 / 21 21.03.2017
59/449
flow control gate 400 MCD, motorized control (133844-01023)
Page 20 / 21 21.03.2017
60/449
flow control gate 400 MCD, motorized control (133844-01023) spare part list
0060 0010 flat gasket f.flow control gate size 400 015133-01 V 10.110.50 0,050 0,10 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 roller seal f.flow control gate 400 013307-01 V 10.110.60 0,400 0,80 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 hub 119503-01 E 10.340 2,000 8,00 KG 4,00 pc
0060 0010 stud M10 x 25 058712-01 E 30.230 0,020 0,16 KG 8,00 pc
0060 0010 key 24 142830-01 E 30.360 0,200 0,40 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 wing nut M6 012476-01 E 30.370 0,010 0,02 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 stud M6 x 20 067271-01 E 30.400 0,020 0,04 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 shaft 400 M, flow control gate M 133530-01 E 60 3,700 7,40 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 roller 400; C370 097251-12 V 70 20,600 41,20 KG 2,00 pc
0060 0010 actuating drive CP-2 143959-07 E 101 24,000 48,00 KG 2,00 pc
Page 21 / 21 21.03.2017
61/449
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
APR: Bock, Uwe // DES: Dahl, Anke // 05.12.2013 15:06
Storage, packing and preservation CPN 147

Regulations for machine and plant components
Supersedes 02.09 edition

1 General
This regulation is valid for all Claudius Peters product areas and their spare parts.
Storage entails the keeping between manufacturing and commissioning of machines and plant
components. This regulation describes the storage conditions and the necessities resulting from storage
duration and climatic conditions.
Packing protects the parts from influences which are to be expected during transportation and storage.
Preservation is the treatment of surfaces against corrosion. This regulation describes the preservation
measures which are necessary to maintain the product at as-new value in the time between
manufacturing and commissioning.
1.1 Also valid CPN (Claudius Peters Company Standard)
CPN 145 Coating regulations

Pre-treatment of ground before coating
CPN 146 Coating regulations

Coating for standards cases
2 Preservation of part surfaces
The coatings described below are valid for surfaces on aggregates, machine and accessory parts which
are manufactured out of metals or other corrosion susceptible materials, if no other regulations have
been issued.
Below two kinds of preservation of surfaces are distinguished:
The temporary coating
The temporary coating preserves parts surfaces during transportation and storage. Before
commissioning of the part the temporary coating is removed to be able to carry out the respective
assembly and setting works.
The permanent coating
The permanent coating preserves parts surfaces for example with lacquer. A permanent coating is done
before delivery and remains set during assembly, commissioning and operation of the part.
The pre-treatment for preservation of surfaces is to be carried out according to CPN 145.
The permanent coating of surfaces and the temporary preservation of blank surfaces are to be carried out
according to CPN 146.
NecM51ri1vNT4H1Nle0.doc
If not explicitly permitted, distribution, copying, use and disclosure of the contents of this document
are prohibited. Violations are subject to damage payments.
December 2010 Page 1 of 5

62/449

3 Packing of parts
The packing protects the parts against influences which are to be expected during transportation or
storage.
3.1 Packing for transportation
The execution of the transportation packing depends on the character of the part to be protected and the
conditions of the transport.
This regulation describes the features of the transportation packing, which are necessary to maintain the
part in its as-new value status.
Further features of the transportation packing, which result from the handling, securement of the part
and special conditions during transportation, are to be additionally fulfilled.
If a transportation packing is opened or damaged during transportation, this is to be immediately

remedied. The following has to be observed:
- Drying of the parts has to be carried out before renewed packing.
- Desiccants in the transportation packing have to be exchanged against new ones at each opening
or damaging of the packing.
- Possible damages to the part or its coating have to be remedied and documented by respective
reports, which are to be added in copy to the part.
- Any renewal of the packing has to be documented respectively and a copy of said documentation
added to the part.
3.2 Packing for storage
If the part is further stored after transportation, it is to be protected against environmental impact or
damages by a packing respective to the given conditions of the storage site. The requirements to the
packing for storage can vary greatly from the given packing for transportation.
It is always recommended to check the parts after transportation in regard to transportation damages. This
can only seldom be done without removal of the transportation packing. If the packing is done both for
transport and storage this has to be documented respectively.
Three realizable time frames are distinguished for the storage of parts.
Short, middle and long term storage


63/449

3.2.1 Packing for short term storage
The short term storage enables a storage period of max 3 months. In the time of the short term storage
it is possible to leave the parts in the transportation packing. To enable this it is necessary that the
transportation packing is non-damaged and suitable for the storage conditions.
In case of packing for short term storage the part is packed in VP1-paper and shrink-wrapped in PVC
1)
foil. For storage in tropical climates desiccant (VPI powder in gauze pouches) is added into the packing
in an amount respective of the climatic zone prior to shrink-wrapping.
3.2.2 Packing for middle term storage
The packing for middle term storage enables a storage period of max 6 months. During the middle term
storage it is not possible to leave the part in the transportation packing. Before packing the parts for
middle term storage it is necessary to carry out a treatment of the part according to chapter 4.
In case of packing for middle term storage the part is packed in VP1-paper and shrink-wrapped in PVC
1)
foil. For storage in tropical climates desiccant (VPI powder in gauze pouches) is added into the packing
in an amount respective of the climatic zone prior to shrink-wrapping.
To enable additionally necessary preservation measures the customer is to obtain a climate

specification and is to fulfil this.
3.2.3 Packing for long term storage
The packing for long term storage enables a storage period of max 12 months. During the long term
storage it is not possible to leave the part in the transportation packing. Before packing the parts for long
term storage it is necessary to carry out a treatment of the part according to chapter 4. Longer storage
times are admissible if the treatment of the part according to chapter 4 is carried out before renewal of
the packing for long term storage.
In case of packing for long term storage the part is packed in VP1-paper and shrink-wrapped in PVC foil.
Further desiccant (VPI powder in gauze pouches) is added into the packing in an amount respective of
the climatic zone prior to shrink-wrapping.
To enable additionally necessary preservation measures the customer is to obtain a climate

specification and is to fulfil this.
A high quality packing with sufficient desiccant as well as storage in temperature controlled rooms with
low humidity have a positive effect on the corrosion protection.

64/449

4 Storage of parts
For the storage a dry, shock-free and clean room is to be made available. Extreme temperature
deviations and water influence (i.e. by rain) are to be avoided.
The machines may not be susceptible to shock loads. A shock-free storage is to be guaranteed. The
drives, shafts and rotors are to be rotated 2-3 times every 6-8 weeks.
4.1 short term storage
The short term storage enables a storage period of max 3 months.
In the time of the short term storage it is possible to leave the parts in the transportation packing. To
enable this it is necessary that the transportation packing is non-damaged and suitable for the storage
conditions.
4.2 middle term storage
The packing for middle term storage enables a storage period of max 6 months.
To store the parts middle-term the transportation packing has to be removed and the preservation of the
parts has to be checked and maintained if necessary.
Shafts, bearings and drives are to be moved to obtain lubrication of all parts in the system.
The parts are to be dried and cleaned.
Before packing with a suitable packing the storage is to be recorded with respective documents. This
document is added to the part in copy in the packing.
4.3 long term storage
The long term storage enables a storage period of max 24 months, during which the packing has to be
renewed every 12 months.
For long term storage of the parts the previous packing is to be removed and the permanent coating of
the parts needs to be checked and maintained if necessary. The temporary coating of the part is to be
renewed (see chapter 2). Shafts, bearings and drive are to be moved to obtain lubrication of all parts in
the system.
The part is to be dried and cleaned.
Before packing with suitable packing the storage is to be recorded with respective documents. Here it
has to be observed that the complete history of the storage is comprehensibly documented. This
document is to be added to the part in copy in the packing.
Parts which are stored long-term have to be maintained before commissioning. Therefore it is important
that these parts are marked respectively during taking out of storage.

65/449

4.4 exceptional storage
An exceptional storage is given, when no suitable storage conditions are given or when the storage
period exceeds 24 months.
4.4.1 unsuitable storage conditions
If a suitable room for storage is not available the packing and preservation are to be checked in
respective intervals and if necessary to be amended or renewed.
In case of doubt a co-ordination of the measures is to be done with Claudius Peters. If damages are
determined during examination the Claudius Peters customer service is to be informed.
4.4.2 Exceedance of storage time
In case of exceedance of the storage time it is absolutely necessary that the complete history of the
storage is comprehensibly documented.
After exceedance of the planned storage time or in case of longer storage than 24 months a check of
the complete scope of supply is to be carried out by Claudius Peters.
5. Preservation, packing and storage of spare parts

All spare parts receive preservation and packing which is designed for a period of 3 months.
Prior editions: 02.09;
Changes:
CPP Layout;

66/449
CHAPTER 4
EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT
67/449
CHAPTER 4.1.
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H TYPE 14
CHAPTER 4.1. AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H TYPE 14
A Langley Holdings Company©
68/449
APR: Pop, Nicolae // DES: Pop, Nicolae // 16/03/2017 13:30 // ID 13388724
Technisches Datenblatt / Technical Data Sheet

Anhang zur technischen Dokumentation / attachment for technical documentation
Name und Anschrift des Herstellers: Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

Name and postal addrses of manufacturer: Schanzenstraße 40
DE 21614 Buxtehude (Germany)
Telefon: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 219
E-Mail: projects@claudiuspeters.com
Kommissionsnummer
02-0/250883
Commission-Number
COS-Position
0010-0010
COS-Position
Maschinennummer
P01.643.17.0205 bis/to 0210
Machine-Number
Kundenkennzeichnung
Tag-Number
KKS-Nummer
KKS-Number
Baujahr
2017
Year of construction
Kunde
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
Customer
Bezeichnung der Maschine RINNENABSPERRSCHIEBER 1 - 250 H

Description of machine TYP 14
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE 1 - 250 H
TYPE 14
Typnummer
643.0250.H.14
Typenumber
Gewicht der Maschine
61.1667 KG [kg]
Weight of machine
12.06: 595-0012-1389A/00ED_Technical-Data
Seite/Page 1/2
69/449
Technische Daten Wert Merkmal BRAIN

Technical data values designation BRAIN
Typ Rinne 1 TYPRIN

type of aeroslide 1
Größe Rinne 250 RINGRO

size aeroslide 250
Temp.Betriebs- zul. 220 °C ZUBETP

oper.temperat. adm. 220 °C
Druck Betriebsüb.pe 0.5 bar BETDRK

oper.overpress. pe 0.5 bar
Funktion Schieber Reparaturschieber FUNSCH

function gate Reparaturschieber
Art Antrieb hand ANTART

kind of drive hand
Staubdicht ? nein STAUDI

dust-tight ? nein
Verschleißschutz nein VERSCH

wear protection nein
Art Signalgeber --- SIGART

signal transmitter ---
Typ Endschalter --- TYPEND

type limit switch ---
Typ Nähergs.schalter --- TYPINI

type proxim. switch ---
Werkstoff-Nummer 1.0038 STOFNR

material-number 1.0038
Werkstoff Dichtung --- WERDIC

material sealing ---
Seite/Page 2/2
70/449


Telefon: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 219
Kommissionsnummer
02-0/250883
Commission-Number
COS-Position
0040-0010
COS-Position
Maschinennummer
P01.643.17.0211 bis/to 0212
Machine-Number
Kundenkennzeichnung
Tag-Number
KKS-Nummer
KKS-Number
Baujahr
2017
Kunde
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
Customer
Bezeichnung der Maschine RINNENABSPERRSCHIEBER 1 - 400 H

Description of machine TYP 14
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE 1 - 400 H
TYPE 14
Typnummer
643.0400.H.14
Typenumber
73 KG [kg]
Weight of machine
Seite/Page 1/2
71/449

Typ Rinne 1 TYPRIN

type of aeroslide 1
Größe Rinne 400 RINGRO

size aeroslide 400


Funktion Schieber Reparaturschieber FUNSCH

function gate Reparaturschieber
Art Antrieb hand ANTART

kind of drive hand
Staubdicht ? nein STAUDI

dust-tight ? nein

Art Signalgeber --- SIGART

signal transmitter ---
Typ Endschalter --- TYPEND

type limit switch ---
Typ Nähergs.schalter --- TYPINI

type proxim. switch ---
Werkstoff-Nummer 1.0038 STOFNR

material-number 1.0038
Werkstoff Dichtung --- WERDIC

material sealing ---
Seite/Page 2/2
72/449
Claudius Peters
Aeroslide shut-off gate H,

Type 14 and 18
Drive: HAND
Assembly instructions
643.0009.0014A/03.en
73/449
Contents
1 Safety instructions ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Safety instructions governing specific phases in the product lifecycle ...................................... 5
1.2 Warnings and symbols as per DIN ISO 3864-2 ......................................................................... 6
1.3 Local warning and mandatory signs........................................................................................... 7
1.4 Information on copyright and protection rights as per DIN ISO 16016 ...................................... 7
1.5 Manufacturer’s address as per 2006/42/EC Directive ............................................................... 7
2 Description ................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1 Designated use .......................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Structure and functioning ........................................................................................................... 9
3 Packing / Transport / Storage / Assembly .................................................................................. 12
3.1 Packing ....................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Transport .................................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Storage ....................................................................................................................................... 13
3.4 Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.1 Aeroslide shut-off gate H ............................................................................................................ 15
3.4.2 Aeration connection.................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.3 Aeration line ............................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.4 Electrical connection .................................................................................................................. 15
4 Operation .................................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Safety instructions ...................................................................................................................... 16
4.2 Protective features ..................................................................................................................... 16
4.2.1 Protecting against mechanical risks ........................................................................................... 16
4.2.2 Protecting against electrical risks ............................................................................................... 17
4.2.3 Protection from heat ................................................................................................................... 18
4.2.4 Protection against materials and substances ............................................................................ 18
4.3 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................... 18
5 Electrical switching elements ..................................................................................................... 19
5.1 Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 14 ............................................................................................. 19
5.2 Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 18 ............................................................................................. 20
6 Maintenance and repair ............................................................................................................. 21
6.1 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 22
6.2 Replacement of gate sealing (dust-tight design) ........................................................................ 23
6.2.1 Disassembly of gate sealing ...................................................................................................... 23
6.2.2 Assembly of the gate sealing ..................................................................................................... 23
7 Trouble shooting......................................................................................................................... 24
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 2 of 27
74/449
8 Dismantling and disposal ........................................................................................................... 25
9 Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 27
List of figures
Figure 2-1: Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 14 ........................................................................................ 10

Figure 2-2: Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 18 ........................................................................................ 10
Figure 2-3: Seal between housing and slide (dust-tight design) .............................................................. 11
Figure 4-1: Protective features ................................................................................................................. 16
Figure 4-2: Connection point for earthing band ........................................................................................ 17
Figure 5-1: Limit switches ......................................................................................................................... 19
Figure 5-2: Proximity switches (Option) .................................................................................................... 19
Figure 5-3: Limit switches ......................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 5-4: Proximity switches (Option) .................................................................................................... 20
List of tables
Table 7-1: Trouble shooting ...................................................................................................................... 24
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 3 of 27
75/449
Annex
With belonging:
Dimension sheets:
643.0000.0014A/NN.ED (Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 14, Drive: HAND)
643.0000.0018A/NN.ED (Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 18, Drive: HAND / lateral)
Assembly instructions:
621.0009.0022A/NN.en (Fabric for Aeration Elements)
Spare part drawings:

643.0010.0014A/NN.SV (Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 14, Drive: HAND)
643.0010.0018A/NN.SV (Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 18, Drive: HAND / lateral)
Connection diagram:
643.0017.0014A/NN.en (Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Drive: HAND)
Documentation of the outsourced items: (see manufacturer’s separate operating instructions)
Document no. Manufacturer Designation Remark

1099018 K. A. Schmersal Limit switch Z4VH335
1D2226/03 ifm elecronic Proximity switch, round, Option

IGM202, IGK3008BBPKG/M/6m
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 4 of 27
76/449
1 Safety instructions
1.1 Safety instructions governing specific phases in the product lifecycle
Claudius Peters' Basic Safety Instructions (Document 596.0009.1000A/NN) are to be observed during
transport, storage, assembly, commissioning, operation, servicing, repair, dismantling and disposal.
These safety instructions must be read and applied by anyone who deals with the aeroslide shut-off gate
during one of the named phases of the product lifecycle.
The instructions referred to above are supplemented by the national regulations and decrees governing the
prevention of accidents and environmental protection. Please read them carefully and follow the respective
instructions. The generally applicable technical regulations governing safe and proper work must be ob-
served.
The aeroslide shut-off gate complies with the state of the art in terms of technology and safety. Nevertheless,
the aeroslide shut-off gate can present a danger if used incorrectly and not as designated by untrained per-
sonnel.
This increases the risk of:
• danger incurred by injury
• danger for the plant and other economic values for the user
• inefficient work performed by the plant
The following safety rules must be observed when working on the aeroslide shut-off gate:
• Conveying equipment
Separate the material supply; secure against undesired restart of supply; check there is no material on
the equipment; prevent hazards from neighbouring equipment.
• Pneumatic and hydraulic systems
Disconnect power supply; secure against reconnection; remove pressure from the system, including any
pressure reservoir; lower any lifted loads or support them from underneath; disperse remaining energy;
check for absence of pressure; prevent hazards from neighbouring equipment.
• Electrical system
Disconnect; secure against being switched on again; check absence of voltage; ground and short-circuit if
appropriate; cover or guard neighbouring parts that are electrically live.
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 5 of 27
77/449
When connecting and disconnecting electrical equipment, the valid VDE guidelines must be observed. Elec-
trical protective measures (earthing resistance etc.) must be examined.
All functions of the indicating and adjusting devices have to be checked.
Maintenance and repair work may only be performed by specialist personnel.
Independent modifications or alterations to the aeroslide shut-off gate are prohibited.
1.2 Warnings and symbols as per DIN ISO 3864-2
The following designations and symbols are used in these instructions for extremely important information:
DANGER!
Information warning of immediately dangerous situations causing

serious injury or death!
WARNING!
Information warning of potentially dangerous situations which may cause

CAUTION!

minor or moderate injury!
NOTE!
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 6 of 27
78/449
1.3 Local warning and mandatory signs
The operator must attach the warning and mandatory signs illustrated below in such a way that they are
clearly visible at all times.
1.4 Information on copyright and protection rights as per DIN ISO 16016
others without express authorisation are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damag-
es. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
1.5 Manufacturer’s address as per 2006/42/EC Directive
Contact address:
Claudius Peters Projects GmbH
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
projects@claudiuspeters.com;
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 7 of 27
79/449
2 Description
The aeroslide shut-off gate is used in pneumatic aeroslide conveying systems to interrupt the material flow
coming from a silo or a bin with lateral outlet socket. The shut-off gate is suitable for the conveyance of
dustlike or fine-grained bulk solids.
The aeroslide shut-off gate serves as an emergency shut-off device and should only be used for mainte-
nance and repair work at devices connected behind. The aeroslide shut-off gate must not be used as a work-
ing gate actively in the process.
With the aeroslide shut-off gate it is not possible to seal the conveying route against overpressure.
2.1 Designated use

The aeroslide shut-off gate described in these assembly instructions is commissioned as an assembly. It is
only suitable for conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The aeroslide shut-off gate described in these assembly instructions is only suitable for conveying
dusts/materials that are specified in the associated order specification from Claudius Peters.
Any other use, e.g. conveying toxic goods, shall not be regarded as designated and will result in all perfor-
mance and operating guarantees becoming null and void. Deliberate modifications to the aeroslide shut-off
gate will release the manufacturer from all liability for any subsequent damage incurred by such modifica-
tions. The risk shall be borne solely by the user.
The aeroslide shut-off gate is designed in accordance with the state of the art and generally recognised safe-
ty guidelines. Nevertheless, the aeroslide shut-off gate can pose a risk of injury and danger for operating
personnel or third parties. Furthermore, damage can be incurred by the aeroslide shut-off gate or other
equipment. The aeroslide shut-off gate may therefore only be operated when in perfect technical condition
for designated use and under observation of the assembly instructions.
The aeroslide shut-off gate must not be operated unless it is installed.
Furthermore, the aeroslide shut-off gate may only be operated by personnel who are aware of the requisite
safety guidelines and familiar with the dangers associated with the aeroslide shut-off gate. Functional de-
fects, especially those which impair the safety of the aeroslide shut-off gate, must therefore be remedied
immediately.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the aeroslide shut-off gate shall require co-ordination with
Claudius Peters.
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 8 of 27
80/449
2.2 Structure and functioning
The aeroslide shut-off gate mainly consists of a housing (10.10), a slide plate (10.20) and the drive parts.
In standard design the housing of the aeroslide shut-off gate has a length of 100 mm and is un-aerated. Op-
tionally the housing can be extended by use of an aeroslide segment (300) with a length of 196 mm, this way
reaching a total length of 300 mm. For this design the delivery includes an additional sealing (310). The
aeroslide segment is equipped with an air connection socket to which conveying air as specified in chapter
3.4.2 has to be connected.
Shut-off is carried out either by a vertical or a horizontal slide plate, depending on the type of design.
The drive parts which open and close the slide plate consist of a hand wheel (20.170), a spindle (20.70) and
a spindle nut (20.60) at which the slide plate is fastened.
At the aeroslide shut-off gate with lateral drive (type 18) the rotation movement of the spindle can optionally
be realized by means of a chain wheel (20.165) with chain (20.270). At the variant with chain wheel a chain
protection (20.280) prevents that the chain can come off.
The working area of the spindle is closed by an upper and a lower cover plate (10.30, 10.35). The aeroslide
shut-off gate must not be operated without these cover plates.
Sealing towards the surroundings is realized by means of a stuffing box. The stuffing box consists of the
stuffing box packings (10.210), which are arranged around the slide plate and which are kept in position by
the stuffing box gland (10.40).
The dust-tight design of the aeroslide shut-off gate is a further design variant which is equipped with a seal-
ing frame all around (10.100). This consists of a rubber sealing and a felt sealing, which are fixed in their
position by cover brackets (10.120, 10.130).
The end positions of the slide plate are signalled by two limit switches (220.10). At the slide plate a switching
vane (10.60) is fastened which activates the corresponding limit switch. Optionally it is also possible to use
proximity switches. The limit switches or proximity switches and the switching cam are protected by a cover
(10.50) against accidental contact. The aeroslide shut-off gate must not be operated without this cover.
The cables of the limit switches and the proximity switches are connected to terminal blocks in the terminal
box (220.40).
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 9 of 27
81/449
Figure 2-1: Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 14
Figure 2-2: Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 18
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 10 of 27
82/449
Figure 2-3: Seal between housing and slide (dust-tight design)
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 11 of 27
83/449
3 Packing / Transport / Storage / Assembly
3.1 Packing
The aeroslide shut-off gate is supplied in accordance with the transport requirements for road, marine and air
transport.
The conveying distance is decisive for the type of packing material. If not contractually agreed otherwise, the
packing type will be in accordance with the packing guidelines HPE defined by the "Bundesverband
Holzmittel, Paletten, Exportverpackung e.V." and by the "Verband Deutscher Maschinen- und Anlagenbau".
Possible symbols on the packing must be observed!
topside fragile, handle with care keep dry gravity centre fix rope here
3.2 Transport
When lifting the aeroslide shut-off gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the lifting gear and the load sup-
porting equipment is in accordance with the weight of the aeroslide shut-off gate. For lifting use the stop
points at the housing. For reasons of safety and in order to avoid damages only the stop points are to be
used for transport.
WARNING!

The operator must attach a warning sign in accordance with Chapter 1.3!
Safety helmets, gloves and safety shoes must always be worn

during transport work!
The aeroslide shut-off gate may only be transported by suitably

qualified persons!
NOTE!
Drive parts and the drill holes in the flanges may not be used for
fastening points during transport!
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 12 of 27
84/449
3.3 Storage
During storage, ensure that the aeroslide shut-off gate is dry or covered in position for mounting. Damage to
mechanical and electrical components must be avoided.
CAUTION!
Avoid setting loads down on or standing on the aeroslide shut-off gate!
NOTE!

643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 13 of 27
85/449
3.4 Assembly
The following safety rules and working steps apply when assembling:
WARNING!
Safety rules for conveying equipment:

Separate the material supply; secure against undesired restart of supply;
check there is no material on the equipment;
prevent hazards from neighbouring equipment!
Safety rules for pneumatic and hydraulic systems:

Disconnect power supply; secure against reconnection;
remove pressure from the system, including any pressure reservoir;
lower any lifted loads or support them from underneath;
disperse remaining energy; check absence of pressure;
Safety rules for the electrical system:

Disconnect (Mains isolation equipment according to EN 60204-1);
secure against being switched on again; check absence of voltage;
ground and short-circuit if appropriate;
cover or guard neighbouring parts that are electrically live!
Ensure that a protective earth system is properly connected
(Protective earth system in accordance with EN 60204-1)!
when performing assembly work inside existing plant. The operator must
attach warning signs in accordance with Section 1.3!
Assembly work may only be carried out by trained specialists

who have received instruction on the aeroslide shut-off gate and who can
foresee and avoid possible hazards!
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 14 of 27
86/449
In accordance with the statutes governing technical working equipment (TechArbmG), the following must be
observed when connecting supply devices to the aeroslide shut-off gate:
WARNING!
Inspection covers with fast locking have to be installed in a distance of at

least 850 mm from the dangerous area!
For inspection covers which can only be opened by use of auxiliary tools,
the distance can be smaller.
3.4.1 Aeroslide shut-off gate H
The aeroslide shut-off gate is delivered with installed drive ready for assembly.
The conveying direction, which is marked by an arrow on the housing, has to be observed by all means dur-
ing assembly.
All flanges have to be dry and clean.
Depending on the flange size and operating conditions, a gasket must be fitted between each of the connect-
ing flanges. In the case of supply within the framework of a conveyor plant, the scope of supply must be ex-
amined to ensure that all gaskets are included.
The screws of the flange connection should be tightened up evenly crosswise.
The housing of the aeroslide shut-off gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connect-
ed installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
The energy supply lines are to be placed appropriately observing the valid safety regulations.
3.4.2 Aeration connection
An air connecting socket is located at the lower box of the optional aeroslide piece. Here compressed air
with less than 0.5 bar has to be connected.
In order to be able to switch off the aeration for maintenance and repair work it is convenient to install a shut-
off valve in the air pipe in front of the aeroslide shut-off gate.
3.4.3 Aeration line
The aeration line must be of sufficiently large cross section to avoid excessive pressure drop. The necessary
pressure reduction should take place immediately ahead of the aeroslide shut-off gate.
The aeration pressure most suitable for the conveyed material should be determined by the engineering
department.
3.4.4 Electrical connection
The connection diagrams for the aeroslide shut-off gate must be observed when marking the electrical con-
nections (see Document 643.0017.0014A/NN).
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 15 of 27
87/449
4 Operation
4.1 Safety instructions
Observe section 1 "Basic safety instructions" and, if required, additional national and regional regulations.
WARNING!
The aeroslide shut-off gate must only be operated when it is installed!
4.2 Protective features
4.2.1 Protecting against mechanical risks

In order to provide personal protection, the movable parts of the aeroslide shut-off gate have been made
inaccessible with cover plates (10.30, 10.35, 10.60).
Figure 4-1: Protective features
WARNING!
The aeroslide shut-off gate must not be used without covering plates
resp. the cover!
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 16 of 27
88/449
4.2.2 Protecting against electrical risks
The electrical equipment must be appropriate for the local environmental and operating conditions. Electri-
cally live parts must be fully insulated. The electrical equipment must meet the requirements applicable at
the place of installation.
It is possible to give the housing of the aeroslide shut-off gate an earthing connection for additional
equipotential bonding (see figure 4-2).
The connection point consists of a plate with an earthing symbol (A) and an M8 tapped hole.
The operator can screw in an earthing bolt (B) here with which an earthing band can be fitted.
Figure 4-2: Connection point for earthing band
NOTE!
If additional equipotential bonding is needed, the operator can screw an earthing

bolt into the hole provided.
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 17 of 27
89/449
4.2.3 Protection from heat
The aeroslide shut-off gate is, depending on design, for a maximum material temperature of 200 °C. If corre-
spondingly warm material is conveyed, an increased surface temperature of the aeroslide shut-off gate can
be anticipated. In this case, the aeroslide shut-off gate has to be marked with a warning sign (see the warn-
ing note below).
Insulating the aeroslide shut-off gate as a protective measure is not permissible.
CAUTION!
The surface of the aeroslide shut-off gate must not be touched when it is
operating – risk of burning!
NOTE!
Housing or insulating the aeroslide shut-off gate is not permissible!
The aeroslide shut-off gate must always be kept free of dirt and larger volumes of dust!
4.2.4 Protection against materials and substances
WARNING!
The maintenance opening must be kept closed during operation!
4.3 Commissioning
WARNING!
The equipment must only initially be brought into operation by trained

specialists who have received instruction on the
aeroslide shut-off gate and who can foresee and avoid possible hazards!
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 18 of 27
90/449
5 Electrical switching elements
5.1 Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 14
The both end positions of the slide plate are indicated by limit switches S1 + S2. As an option it is also pos-
sible to indicate the end positions by proximity switches.
It is not possible to start up and display intermediate positions.
For information on the allocation of terminals and switches refer to electric connection diagram
643.0017.0014A/NN.
Figure 5-1: Limit switches Figure 5-2: Proximity switches (Option)
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 19 of 27
91/449
5.2 Aeroslide shut-off gate H, Type 18
The both end positions of the slide plate are indicated by limit switches S1 + S2. As an option it is also pos-
sible to indicate the end positions by proximity switches.
It is not possible to start up and display intermediate positions.
643.0017.0014A/NN.
Figure 5-3: Limit switches
Figure 5-4: Proximity switches (Option)
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 20 of 27
92/449
6 Maintenance and repair
The following safety rules and working steps apply to maintenance and repair work:
WARNING!


disperse remaining energy; check absence of pressure

The effective operation of the protective earth system must be checked
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out

after the aeroslide shut-off gate has fully cooled down!
always be worn during maintenance and repair work! The operator must

Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by qualified

persons who have received instruction on the aeroslide shut-off gate
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 21 of 27
93/449
NOTE!
The aeroslide shut-off gate must be cleaned before starting any maintenance and
repair work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the aeroslide shut-off gate!
The use of compressed air is forbidden!
A dry vacuum cleaner is appropriate for cleaning.
6.1 Maintenance
The slide plate (10.20) has to be checked for smooth running once every month.
In accordance with the frequency of use and the accumulation of dirt, all deposits have to be removed from
the limit switches (220.10).
In order to avoid that material emerges, it is necessary to retighten the stuffing box gland (10.40) in accord-
ance with the actuation frequency of the slide plate.
Replacement of the packing (10.210) has to be carried out after 10000 switchings, at the latest, however,
after two years.
The sealing frame (10.100) of the dust-tight design of the aeroslide shut-off gate has to be replaced after
10000 switchings, however, at the latest after two years. Unfavourable random conditions may lead to prem-
ature wear.
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 22 of 27
94/449
6.2 Replacement of gate sealing (dust-tight design)
6.2.1 Disassembly of gate sealing
The gate sealing (10.100) has to be replaced in accordance with the instructions given in chapter 6.1.
For replacement of the sealing proceed as follows (see figure 2-3):
• The material flow in the conveying line where the aeroslide shut-off gate is installed, has to be sealed off.
It has to be ensured that no material is lying in front of the shut-off gate and that no more material can
come in.
• Move the aeroslide shut-off gate into position "OPEN".
• Disconnect the aeroslide shut-off gate electrically / pneumatically.
• Disassemble the aeroslide shut-off gate.
• Loosen the screws (10.140) and disassemble the four cover plates (10.120, 10.130).
• Disassemble the sealing frame (10.100) which is fixed to the housing (10.10) with glue.
• Clean the area of the sealing at the housing. Remove the sealing and glue residues and the deposits at
the slide plate.
6.2.2 Assembly of the gate sealing
Assembly of the gate sealing is carried out in inverted sequence of the disassembly. Fastening of the sealing
frame is realised with glue (silicone) with a heat resistance of up to 180 °C. The glue has to be applied to that
side of the sealing frame housing which runs parallel to the slide plate in a distance of 100 mm.
It has to be ensured that the sealing frame is installed in the correct installation position. The felt side of the
sealing has to fit closely to the slide plate, while the rubber side has to be glued to that side of the sealing
frame housing that runs parallel to the slide plate.
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 23 of 27
95/449
7 Trouble shooting
Fault Cause Repair

Material escapes at stuffing box Stuffing box leaky Disconnect aeroslide shut-off gate
Unscrew cover plates at housing
upper part
Tighten stuffing box; exchange stuff-
ing box packing, if necessary
Aeroslide shut-off gate does Slide plate blocked by foreign Disconnect aeroslide shut-off gate
not open / close matter
Remove foreign matter
- by repeated switching
- via cleaning cover connected
nearby
Sealing frame is worn out Disconnect the aeroslide shut-off
(dust-tight design) gate.
Replace the sealing frame (see
chapter 6.2)
Aeroslide shut-off gate is Sealing frame is worn out Disconnect the aeroslide shut-off
leaky (dust-tight design) gate.
Replace the sealing frame (see
chapter 6.2)
Pre-pressure > 0,5 bar Reduce pre-pressure to < 0,5 bar
Table 7-1: Trouble shooting
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 24 of 27
96/449
8 Dismantling and disposal
When decommissioning the aeroslide shut-off gate, the Basic Safety Information from Claudius Peters
(Document 596.0009.1000A/NN) must be observed.
The following safety rules and working steps apply when dismantling:
WARNING!



The aeroslide shut-off gate has to be secured with suitable lifting gears
and load supporting equipments!
Before disassembly of connected plant components, the aeroslide shut-off

gate must be secured vertically as well as horizontally!
The aeroslide shut-off gate must cool down completely before dismantling!
always be worn during dismantling! The operator must attach warning signs
in accordance with Section 1.3!

by an electrician!
Dismantling work may only be carried out by qualified

persons who have received instruction on the aeroslide shut-off gate
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 25 of 27
97/449
NOTE!
The aeroslide shut-off gate must be cleaned before starting any dismantling work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the aeroslide shut-off gate!
The aeroslide shut-off gate as well as all oils and grease must be disposed of
in accordance with local waste disposal guidelines!
• Disconnect energy supply lines
• Loose the screw connection at the air connection (Option)
• Loose the flange connections
• Dismantle the aeroslide shut-off gate
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 26 of 27
98/449
9 Technical data
Each aeroslide shut-off gate is specially manufactured for the technical requirement processes of the respec-
tive order. Accordingly, the optimum technical variant of the components is selected.
For this reason, technical data is job-related as well as being a component of the plant documentation.
643.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 13.12.2011
Page 27 of 27
99/449
595.0012.1380A/00
MASSE UNVERBINDLICH! DIMENSIONS SUBJECT TO CORRECTIONS!

KONSTRUKTIONSAENDERUNGEN VORBEHALTEN! CONSTRUCTION SUBJECT TO ALTERATIONS!
OPTIONAL: DUST TIGHT DESIGN
70
FOR AEROSLIDE TYPE 1
A C D H T Z
SIZE
1)
ENDSCHALTER 200 194 294 519 1143 122 347 4*M 8
LIMIT SWITCH
250 244 344 4*M10
300 294 394
150
1) 350 344 444 534 1150 129 355 5*M10
INKL. REINIGUNGSDECKEL 400 394 494
AEROSLIDE UNIT
INCL. INSPECTION COVER 500 494 594 6*M10
630 630 730 730 1350 525 7*M12
H
800 800 900 900 1520 155 695 9*M12

1000 1000 1100 1000 1620 795 11*M12
Z
D
OBERKANTE GEWEBE FOR AEROSLIDE TYPE 3

TOP OF FABRIC
A C D H T Z
SIZE
200 194 294 719 1343 122 4*M 8
T
250 244 344 4*M10

A
1 300 294 394
Rp 2 C 547
350 344 444 726 1342 129 6*M10
100 98 400 394 494
300 500 494 594 8*M10
AUF ANFRAGE 1) WAHLWEISE
ON REQUEST OPTIONAL
Claudius Peters MASSBLATT:/DIMENSION SHEET:

RINNENABSPERRSCHIEBER H
643.0000.0014A/10.ED
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE H Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
DRIVE: HAND, FOR AEROSLIDE TYPE 1 & 3
100/449
Claudius Peters
Rinnenabsperrschieber H
Aeroslide shut-off gate H
Vanne dárret dáeroglissiere H
Compuerta de aerodeslizador H
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dessin de Pieces de Rechange
Dibujo de Repuestos
643.0010.0014A/08.SV
101/449
Inhalt / Contents / Table des matières / Sumario
Aeroslide shut-off gate Н
Vanne dárret dáeroglissiere Н
Compuerta de aerodeslizador Н .............................................................................................................. 4
Abbildungsverzeichnis / List of figures / Tables des illustration / Lista de Figuras

Abb. 01: Rinnenabsperrschieber H
Fig. 01: Aeroslide shut-off gate H
Fig. 01: Vanne dárret dáeroglissiere H
Fig. 01: Compuerta de aerodeslizador H............................................................................................... 3
Achtung! / Attention! / Attention! / Atención!
Bei Anfragen oder Bestellung bitte Auftrags-Nr., Nummer dieser Ersatzteilzeichnung, die gewünschten Pos.-
Nr. und deren Benennungen, sowie alle Angaben des Typschildes angeben.
In case of inquiries or orders, please indicate comm. no., no. of this print, the designations and no. of the
requested parts and all data stated on the nameplate.
Pour toutes les demandes de prix ou des commandes veuillez indiquer le n° de la commande, le n° du des-
sin de pièce de rechange, les positions souhaitées et leurs désignations ainsi que toutes les données de la
plaque signalétique.
En caso de demandas o pedidos indiquen, por favor, el número de comisión, el número de este dibujo de
repuestos, el número de la posición requerida y su respectiva designación y todos los datos de la placa del
tipo.
643.0010.0014A/08.SV
Release 8: 16.07.2015
Seite / Page / Pagina 2 von / of / sur / de 4
102/449
Abb. 01: Rinnenabsperrschieber H
Fig. 01: Aeroslide shut-off gate H
Fig. 01: Vanne dárret dáeroglissiere H
Fig. 01: Compuerta de aerodeslizador H
643.0010.0014A/08.SV
Release 8: 16.07.2015
103/449
Aeroslide shut-off gate Н
01
Vanne dárret dáeroglissiere Н
Compuerta de aerodeslizador Н
Pos. Benennung Designation Designation Denominacion
10.20 Schieberblech Slide plate Plaque de coulisse Chapa de compuerta
10.40 Stopfbuchsenbrille Stuffing box gland Bride Brida de prensaestopa
10.210 * Dichtschnur Sealing cord Corde de garniture Cordon
20.60 * Mutter Nut Ecrou Tuerca
20.70 * Spindel Spindle Broche Husillo
20.160 * Buchse Bush Douille Casquillo
20.170 Handrad Hand wheel Roue a main Rueda manuel

1)
220.10 Endschalter Limit switch Fin de course Interrupteur final
1)
220.40 Klemmkasten Terminal Box Coffre de bornes Caja de bornes
1)
300 Rinnenstück Aeroslide piece Piece dáeroglissiere Parte dáerodeslizador
1)
300.20.120 * Gewebe Fabric Tissu Tejido
1)
300.20.140 Deckeldichtung Cover gasket Joint de couvercle Junta de tapa
1)
300.20.150 * Drahtgewebe Wire mesh Tissu metallique Tela metalica
1)
310 Rinnendichtung Aeroslide gasket Joint dáeroglissiere Junta dáerodeslizador
Staubdichte Ausführung / Dust tight design / Execution etanche aux poussieres / Diseno a prueba de polvo
1)
10.100 * Dichtungsrahmen Sealing frame Cardre détancheite Marco de empaquetadura
10.120
1)
Abdeckleiste, vertikal Cover ledge, vertical Liston de recouvrement Liston recubridora
vertical vertical
10.130
1) Abdeckleiste, horizon- Cover ledge, horizontal Liston de recouvrement Liston recubridora
tal horizontal horizontal
* = Verschleißteil / wear part / pièce dúsure / pieza de desgaste

1) = Option/Optional
643.0010.0014A/08.SV
Release 8: 16.07.2015
104/449
595.0012.1380A/00

o
k*m
d*e f f1 h i k*m o s w
SIZE
50 - 80
- 2*55 60
i
OBERKANTE GEWEBE 100 65 130 72 - 40

57
TOP OF FABRIC 150 3* 60 - 180 3*60 70
w
200 1* 80 75 230 97 60 65
250 3*100 - 300
h
s
300 2* 85 90 350
4*70
350 4*100 - 400 107 75 72 63
400 2*110 115 450 -
f d*e f 500 5*110 - 550
f1 630 4*115 680 7*73 84
110
800 6*105 850 130 - 10*68 85
85
1000 10*105 - 1050 10*78

RINNENPROGRAMM TYP 1
LOCHBILD 625.0000.0021A/06.ED
AEROSLIDE PROGRAM TYPE 1 Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
HOLE PATTERN
105/449
595.0012.1380A/00

k*m
d*e f h i k*m s w
SIZE
i
OBERKANTE GEWEBE
200 1* 80 75 97 60 4*M8 65 57
TOP OF FABRIC
w
250 3*100 - 4*M10

300 2* 85 90
4*70
h
107
s
350 4*100 - 75 5*M10 72 63

400 2*110 115
500 5*110 - 6*M10
f d*e f 630 4*115 7*73 84
7*M12
110
800 6*105 130 - 10*68 9*M12 85
85
1000 10*105 - 10*78 11*M12

RINNENABSPERRSCHIEBER
625.0000.0028A/06.ED
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
HOLE PATTERN FOR TYPE 14,15,16,17, AEROSLIDE TYPE 1
106/449
107/449
CHAPTER 4.2.
FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE P
FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE P

CHAPTER 4.2.
108/449
APR: Fruehling, Reiner // DES: Kramm, Gerhard // 06.02.2017 11:55 // ID 13388769
C
EG-Konformitätserklärung EC Declaration of Conformity
nach Richtlinie 2006/42/EG, acc. to Directive 2006/42/EC,

Anhang II, Nr. 1 Teil A Annex II, No. 1 Part A

Schanzenstraße 40
Name and postal address of manufacturer: DE 21614 Buxtehude (Germany)
Name des Bevollmächtigten für die technischen

Unterlagen gemäß Anhang II Teil A: Claudius Peters Projects GmbH
Schanzenstraße 40
Name of the representative for the technical DE 21614 Buxtehude (Germany)
documentation according to Annex II Part A:
DOSIERWALZE 250 P, PNEUMATISCH
Bezeichnung der Maschine:
ABSPERREN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 250 P, PNEUMATIC SHUT-
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0514 bis/to 0514
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:
Hiermit erklären wir, dass die oben genannte Maschine mit allen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der EG-
Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG in Übereinstimmung ist.
We herewith certify that the above mentioned machine is corresponding to all relevant regulations of the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Folgende harmonisierte Norm wurde angewendet:

Following harmonised standard is used:
Sicherheit von Maschinen - Allgemeine Gestaltungsleitsätze - Risikobeurteilung und

EN ISO 12100 Risikominderung
Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk assessment and risk reduction
Buxtehude, 06.02.2017
12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Die Verifizierung des Dokumentes erfolgt elektronisch und ersetzt die manuelle Unterschrift.
Verification of the document was done electronically; this replaces the handwritten signature.
Seite /Page 1/2

109/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0515 bis/to 0515
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

110/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0516 bis/to 0516
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

111/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0517 bis/to 0517
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

112/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0518 bis/to 0518
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

113/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0519 bis/to 0519
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

114/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0526 bis/to 0526
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

115/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
ABSPERREN
Name of machine:
OFF
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0527 bis/to 0527
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

116/449


Telefon: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 219
Kommissionsnummer
02-0/250883
Commission-Number
COS-Position
0020-0010
COS-Position
Maschinennummer
P01.682.17.0514 bis/to 0519
Machine-Number
Kundenkennzeichnung
Tag-Number
KKS-Nummer
KKS-Number
Baujahr
2017
Kunde
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
Customer
Bezeichnung der Maschine DOSIERWALZE 250 P, PNEUMATISCH

Description of machine ABSPERREN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 250 P,
PNEUMATIC SHUT-OFF
Typnummer
682.0250.P.A
Typenumber
88.5 KG [kg]
Weight of machine
Seite/Page 1/3
117/449

Baugröße Dosierwalze 250 GRODOS

size f.flow ctr.gate 250
Funktion Dosierwalze Auf-Zu WALFUN

function of roller Auf-Zu
Höhenabsatz D.Walze? ja HOABSA

level difference ? ja
Querschnitt Regel- 0 cm² REQUER

cross section 0 cm²
Form Ausschnitt Maximal- AUSCHT

desing cutout Maximal-

Art Kassette Standard ARTKAS

type cassette Standard
Position Antrieb links ANTSEI

position drive links

Temp.Umgebung min. -20 °C MIUMTE

ambient temp. min. -20 °C

Druckluftspeicher nein DRULSP

compressed-air store nein
Endschaltereinheit ? ja ENDEIN
limit switch unit ? ja
Code Endsch.einheit 02 ENDCOD

code lim.switch unit 02
Schalteinsatz ? nein SCHESA

switching unit ? nein
Anzahl Schalter 4 ANZSAL

number o.switches 4
Endlagen Microschalter ENDLAG

stop positions Microschalter
Zwischenpositionen --- ZWISCH

intermediate pos. ---
Seite/Page 2/3
118/449

Typ Potentiometer -- POTTYP

type potentiometer --
Ausf.Potentiometer -- AUSPOT
kind o.potentiometer --
Spannung Magnetvent. 230 V MAGSPG

volt. solenoid valve 230 V
Frequenz Magnetvent. 50 Hz MAGFRE

frequ.solenoid valve 50 Hz
Schutzart MagVent IP 65 MASCHA

prot. solen.valve IP 65
Seite/Page 3/3
119/449


Telefon: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 219
Kommissionsnummer
02-0/250883
Commission-Number
COS-Position
0050-0010
COS-Position
Maschinennummer
P01.682.17.0526 bis/to 0527
Machine-Number
Kundenkennzeichnung
Tag-Number
KKS-Nummer
KKS-Number
Baujahr
2017
Kunde
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
Customer
Bezeichnung der Maschine DOSIERWALZE 400 P, PNEUMATISCH

Description of machine ABSPERREN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 400 P,
PNEUMATIC SHUT-OFF
Typnummer
682.0400.P.A
Typenumber
113.5 KG [kg]
Weight of machine
Seite/Page 1/3
120/449


Funktion Dosierwalze Auf-Zu WALFUN

function of roller Auf-Zu


Form Ausschnitt Maximal- AUSCHT

desing cutout Maximal-


Position Antrieb links ANTSEI

position drive links



Druckluftspeicher nein DRULSP

compressed-air store nein
Endschaltereinheit ? ja ENDEIN
limit switch unit ? ja
Code Endsch.einheit 02 ENDCOD

code lim.switch unit 02
Schalteinsatz ? nein SCHESA

switching unit ? nein
Anzahl Schalter 4 ANZSAL

number o.switches 4
Endlagen Microschalter ENDLAG

stop positions Microschalter
Zwischenpositionen --- ZWISCH

intermediate pos. ---
Seite/Page 2/3
121/449

Typ Potentiometer -- POTTYP

type potentiometer --
Ausf.Potentiometer -- AUSPOT
kind o.potentiometer --
Spannung Magnetvent. 230 V MAGSPG

volt. solenoid valve 230 V
Frequenz Magnetvent. 50 Hz MAGFRE

frequ.solenoid valve 50 Hz
Schutzart MagVent IP 65 MASCHA

prot. solen.valve IP 65
Seite/Page 3/3
122/449
Claudius Peters
Flow control gate 2000.1 P,

Drive: PNEU
Operating instructions
682.0009.1074A/10.en
123/449
Contents
1 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 Safety instructions governing specific phases in the product lifecycle ................................. 5
1.2 Warnings and symbols as per DIN ISO 3864-2 .................................................................... 6
1.3 Local warning and mandatory signs ..................................................................................... 7
1.4 Information on copyright and protection rights as per DIN ISO 16016 ................................. 7
1.5 Manufacturer’s address as per 2006/42/EC Directive .......................................................... 7
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 8
2.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Structure and functioning ...................................................................................................... 9
3 Packing / Transport / Storage / Assembly............................................................................. 12
3.1 Packing.................................................................................................................................. 12
3.2 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Storage .................................................................................................................................. 13
3.4 Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.1 Flow control gate ................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.2 Aeration connection .............................................................................................................. 15
3.4.3 Aeration line .......................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.4 Control air connection ........................................................................................................... 16
3.4.5 Electrical connection ............................................................................................................. 16
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Protective features ................................................................................................................ 17
4.2.1 Protection from heat .............................................................................................................. 17
4.3 Pneumatic drive .................................................................................................................... 18
4.4 Separate compressed-air reservoir (option) ......................................................................... 18
4.5 Manual emergency operation................................................................................................ 20
4.6 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................... 21
5 Maintenance and repair ........................................................................................................ 22
5.1 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 23
5.2 Lubrication ............................................................................................................................. 23
5.3 Exchange of roller sealing ..................................................................................................... 23
5.3.1 Cassette removal .................................................................................................................. 24
5.3.2 Exchange of roller sealing ..................................................................................................... 25
5.3.3 Assembly of cassette ............................................................................................................ 26
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 2 of 35
124/449
5.3.4 Adjustment of spacer screws ................................................................................................ 27
5.4 Exchange of roller ................................................................................................................. 27
5.4.1 Roller removal ....................................................................................................................... 27
5.4.2 Assembly of roller .................................................................................................................. 29
5.4.3 Adjustments........................................................................................................................... 30
5.5 Exchange of fabric ................................................................................................................ 30
6 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................................... 31
7 Dismantling and disposal ...................................................................................................... 32
8 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 34
9 Conformity acc. to Directive 2006/42/EC .............................................................................. 35
List of figures
Figure 2-1: Flow control gate 2000.1 P .................................................................................................... 10

Figure 2-2: Pneumatic circuit diagram OPEN-CLOSE ............................................................................. 11
Figure 4-1: Compressed-air reservoir ....................................................................................................... 19
Figure 5-1: Cassette removal ................................................................................................................... 24
Figure 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing ...................................................................................................... 25
Figure 5-3: Roller removal ........................................................................................................................ 28
List of tables
Table 2-1: Signal position ......................................................................................................................... 11

Table 5-1: Maintenance work ................................................................................................................... 23
Table 5-2: Maximum adjusting torque ...................................................................................................... 26
Table 6-1: Trouble shooting ...................................................................................................................... 31
Table 8-1: Technical data ......................................................................................................................... 34
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 3 of 35
125/449
Annex
With belonging:
Dimension sheets:
682.0000.1074A/NN.ED (Flow control gate 2000.1 P)
682.0000.0034A/NN.ED (Flow control gate 2000.1 P-HO)
621.0009.0022A/NN.en (Fabric for Aeration Elements)
697.0009.0023A/NN.en (Limit switch unit - KINETROL)
697.0009.1001A/NN.en (Switching unit)
698.0026.0021A/NN.en (Pneumatic actuator)
Spare part drawings:

682.0010.1074A/NN.SV (Flow control gate 2000.1 P)
697.0010.0021A/NN.SV (Limit switch unit - KINETROL)
697.0010.1001A/NN.SV (Switching unit)
Connection diagrams:
682.0017.1074A/NN.en (Flow control gate 2000.1 P)
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 4 of 35
126/449
These safety instructions must be read and applied by anyone who deals with the flow control gate during
one of the named phases of the product lifecycle.
instructions. The generally applicable technical regulations governing safe and proper work must be
observed.
The flow control gate complies with the state of the art in terms of technology and safety. Nevertheless, the
flow control gate can present a danger if used incorrectly and not as designated by untrained personnel.
The following safety rules must be observed when working on the flow control gate:
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 5 of 35
127/449
When connecting and disconnecting electrical equipment, the valid VDE guidelines must be observed.
Electrical protective measures (earthing resistance etc.) must be examined.
Independent modifications or alterations to the flow control gate are prohibited.
DANGER!

WARNING!

CAUTION!

NOTE!
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 6 of 35
128/449
Contact address:
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 7 of 35
129/449
2 Description
The flow control gate is a dosing device. It is appropriate for the installation into pneumatic aeroslide
installations where pulverized or fine material is being conveyed.
Additionally, the flow control gate can also assume the function of a shut-off device.
The flow control gate is operated pneumatically. It has an OPEN – CLOSE function.
2.1 Designated use
The flow control gate described in these operating instructions is subject to the 2006/42/EG machine
directive and is commissioned as an machine in line with Article 1, section 1 a). It is only suitable for
conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The flow control gate described in these operating instructions is only suitable for conveying dusts/materials
that are specified in the associated order specification from Claudius Peters.
Any other use, e.g. conveying toxic goods, shall not be regarded as designated and will result in all
performance and operating guarantees becoming null and void. Deliberate modifications to the flow control
gate will release the manufacturer from all liability for any subsequent damage incurred by such
modifications. The risk shall be borne solely by the user.
The flow control gate is designed in accordance with the state of the art and generally recognised safety
guidelines. Nevertheless, the flow control gate can pose a risk of injury and danger for operating personnel
or third parties. Furthermore, damage can be incurred by the flow control gate or other equipment. The flow
control gate may therefore only be operated when in perfect technical condition for designated use and
under observation of the operating instructions.
The flow control gate must not be operated unless it is installed.
Furthermore, the flow control gate may only be operated by personnel who are aware of the requisite safety
guidelines and familiar with the dangers associated with the flow control gate. Functional defects, especially
those which impair the safety of the flow control gate, must therefore be remedied immediately.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the flow control gate shall require co-ordination with Claudius
Peters.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 8 of 35
130/449
The flow control gate consists of a steel housing with a mounted roller. The roller is sealed ready for
operation by means of a cassette with inserted roller sealing. The cassette and hence the roller sealing can
be easily replaced. In CLOSE-position the flow control gate shuts off the material flow.
The roller is equipped with a flow opening. By turning the roller the flow opening is released. A scale shows
the position of the roller.
Adjustment of the roller is carried out by means of a pneumatically rotating actuator (101). An electro-
magnetically actuated 5/2-way valve (102) is installed at the rotating actuator which closes the flow control
gate in current-free state.
The pneumatic actuator is equipped with two throttles (30.190). The adjustment of the throttles determines
the exhaust air velocity and hence the adjustment velocity.
In order to indicate that the end positions have been reached, the flow control gate is fitted with a limit switch
unit (99) with 2 or 4 signal transducers.
As an alternative, the flow control gate may incorporate a switch insert (100). Inside the switch insert there is
a cam-controlled position switch to provide feedback on the position.
For assembly and connection: see separate operating instructions and connection diagram.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 9 of 35
131/449
Figure 2-1: Flow control gate 2000.1 P
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 10 of 35
132/449
Function * Valve Y1
Opening 1
Closing 0
* 0 = Voltage OFF
1 = Voltage ON
Table 2-1: Signal position
Figure 2-2: Pneumatic circuit diagram OPEN-CLOSE
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 11 of 35
133/449
3.1 Packing
The flow control gate is supplied in accordance with the transport requirements for road, marine and air
transport.
3.2 Transport
When lifting the flow control gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the lifting gear and the load supporting
equipment is in accordance with the weight of the flow control gate. For lifting use the stop points at the
housing. For reasons of safety and in order to avoid damages only the stop points are to be used for
transport.
WARNING!

The operator must attach a warning sign in accordance with Chapter 1.3!

The flow control gate may only be transported by suitably qualified persons!
NOTE!
Drive parts resp. inlets and outlets may not be used for
fastening points during transport!
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 12 of 35
134/449
3.3 Storage
During storage, ensure that the flow control gate is dry or covered in position for mounting. Damage to
CAUTION!
Avoid setting loads down on or standing on the flow control gate!
NOTE!

682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 13 of 35
135/449
3.4 Assembly
WARNING!



Prior to commencing assembly work, please ensure that the flow control gate
is in CLOSED position and can not be operated by unauthorised persons!

who have received instruction on the flow control gate and who can
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 14 of 35
136/449
observed when connecting supply devices to the flow control gate:
WARNING!

3.4.1 Flow control gate
The flow control gate is delivered with installed drive ready for assembly.
The conveying direction, which is marked by an arrow on the housing, has to be observed by all means
during assembly.
Depending on the flange size and operating conditions, a gasket must be fitted between each of the
connecting flanges. In the case of supply within the framework of a conveyor plant, the scope of supply must
be examined to ensure that all gaskets are included.
The housing of the flow control gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connected
installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
The energy supply lines are to be placed appropriately observing the valid safety regulations (see chapter 8:
Technical data).
An air connecting socket is located at the lower box of the flow control gate. Here compressed air with less
than 0.5 bar has to be connected. The air connecting socket is equipped with an aperture for quantity
metering.
off valve in the air pipe in front of the flow control gate.
3.4.3 Aeration line
pressure reduction should take place immediately ahead of the flow control gate.
department.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 15 of 35
137/449
3.4.4 Control air connection
At the customer's side, dry, unoiled and clean control air must be provided which complies with purity
classes 5, 4 and 3 in accordance with the ISO 8573-1 standard. Please refer to the following list for the
values of the purity classes referred to:
Solid content: 1.0 < d ≤ 5.0 μm (class 5)
Pressure dew point: ≤ +3 °C (class 4)
Oil content: ≤ 1 mg/m³ (class 3)
If bio-oil is used for lubricating the compressor, the control air must comply with purity classes 5, 4 and 2 in
accordance with the ISO 8573-1 standard.
Oil content: ≤ 0.1 mg/m³ (class 2)
The control air must be supplied with overpressure of min. 5.0 to max. 6.0 bar.
The pressure dew point at operating overpressure of the compressed air system must be specified at 20 °C
below the lowest anticipated ambient temperature.
The connection diagrams for the flow control gate must be observed when marking the electrical connections
(see Document 682.0017.1074A/NN).
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 16 of 35
138/449
4 Operation
WARNING!
The flow control gate must only be operated when it is installed!

The flow control gate is, depending on design, for a maximum material temperature of 200 °C. If
correspondingly warm material is conveyed, an increased surface temperature of the flow control gate can
be anticipated. In this case, the flow control gate has to be marked with a warning sign (see the warning note
below).
Insulating the flow control gate as a protective measure is not permissible.
CAUTION!
The surface of the flow control gate must not be touched when it is
operating – risk of burning!
NOTE!
Housing or insulating the flow control gate is not permissible!
The flow control gate must always be kept free of dirt and larger volumes of dust!
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 17 of 35
139/449
WARNING!
The area around the flow control gate be kept clear of dirt
and excessive dust!
4.3 Pneumatic drive
The flow control gate is adjusted by means of a double acting pneumatically rotating actuator. For manual
adjustment the pneumatic actuator is equipped with an external square (see also Chapter 4.5, Manual
Emergency Operation).
Pressure is fully removed from the pneumatic actuator by taking the two compressed air lines out of their
screwed connections.
If the flow control gate shall be quickly locked out of the OPEN-position, the solenoid valve (Y1) must be de-
activated. The same effect will show if the control voltage fail for other reasons.
The exact range of the pivot is factory-set by an adjusting screw (A) at each side on the housing of the
pneumatic actuator. The adjusting screws act as mechanical stops for the rotary wing (see Fig. 2-1).
NOTE!
The two set screws of the rotary wing must not be turned - they are adjusted at the works!
4.4 Separate compressed-air reservoir (option)
The flow control gate features a compressed-air reservoir (Figure 4-1) as an extra option. It has the task of
an additional EMERGENCY closing function, i.e. the flow control gate is closed securely once using the
compressed-air reservoir in the event of the system’s compressed-air network failing or operating pressure
falling below 3.7 bar.
NOTE!
If the specified operating pressure is fallen short of, the roller closing function can fail,
i.e. the flow control gate comes to a standstill with an open roller profile section!
An EMERGENCY closing function prevents this using a separate compressed-air reservoir.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 18 of 35
140/449
The permissible operating pressure is 10 bar, whereby the operating overpressure to be set is 5-6 bar. The
permissible operating temperature range is -10 °C to +50 °C. For exact instructions regarding correct
operation as well as periodic maintenance and inspection of this compressed-air reservoir, refer to the
attached certificate.
The compressed-air reservoir essentially comprises a compressed-air container (1000.10), a non-return

valve (1000.80) and a pressure switch (1000.110) for setting at 3.7 bar for safe operation. The pressure
switch is in the immediate vicinity of the flow control gate to enable swift closure of the roller in the event of a
drop in pressure.
During operation, condensation forms; this must be drained periodically via the ball valve (1000.40).
Figure 4-1: Compressed-air reservoir
For reasons of space, the compressed-air reservoir can also be installed in the vicinity of the flow control
gate.
NOTE!
In this connection, it should be ensured that the reservoir is mounted on rubber mounts due
to vibration!
The maintenance intervals for the compressed-air reservoir are stipulated in Chapter 5 and must be
observed.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 19 of 35
141/449
4.5 Manual emergency operation
The flow control gate makes manual emergency operation possible. The necessary fork wrench (30.360) is
located at the device (refer to figure 2-1).
CAUTION!
Prior to all manual emergency operation, the flow control gate must be
secured against unauthorised operation.
The pneumatic system must be pressureless!
The following measures must be taken prior to any manual emergency operation:
• Pull both of the compressed air lines out of their screwed connections, so that pressure is removed from
the chambers of the rotary vane drive.
• Turn roller into the required position. Use fork wrench (30.360) at the external square of the shaft at the
rotating actuator.
• Insert both compressed air lines into their screwed joints in order to connect control air to the rotary vane
drive again.
NOTE!
Normal operation is not possible if compressed air lines are pulled off!
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 20 of 35
142/449
4.6 Commissioning
First of all the mechanic function of the flow control gate has to be checked. For this purpose the roller, with
the compressed air lines pulled out, is to be turned at the drive using the open-ended spanner (30.360).
However, the necessary adjusting moment shall not exceed the double of the values on table 5-2.
The compressed air and electrical connections must be checked next.
The interlocks required with the upstream and downstream processes for each particular case must also be
checked.
After the compressed air lines have again been connected to the drive, the flow control gate can be moved
to the end positions by manually operating the solenoid valves.
It is then necessary to check that the flow control gate can be moved with the aid of the external controller.
WARNING!

specialists who have received instruction on the flow control gate and who
can foresee and avoid possible hazards!
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 21 of 35
143/449
WARNING!



Prior to commencing maintenance and repair work, please ensure that the
flow control gate is in CLOSED position and can not be operated by
unauthorised persons!

after the flow control gate has fully cooled down!
always be worn during maitenance and repair work! The operator must attach
warning signs in accordance with Section 1.3!


persons who have received instruction on the flow control gate
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 22 of 35
144/449
NOTE!
The flow control gate must be cleaned before starting any maintenance and repair work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the flow control gate!
5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance work Intervals

Check the fabric 1 Yearly
Check roller for smooth running 1 month
Visual inspection of the roller 1 month
Visual inspection of the roller sealing 1 month
Check compressed-air reservoir In accordance with
manufacturer information
Condensate outlet through ball valve at compressed air Regular
reservoir
Table 5-1: Maintenance work
5.2 Lubrication
For the flow control gate no lubrication is required.
5.3 Exchange of roller sealing
A worn roller sealing has to be exchanged in time in order to avoid unnecessary wear of the flow control
gate.
Leakages and/or an uneven or extended actuating time indicate wear.
The cassette (5.110) has to be removed for replacing the roller sealing.
The repair work described in the following can be effected easily and fast. No special tools are required.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 23 of 35
145/449
5.3.1 Cassette removal
Roller position Operation Roller position Cassette exchange
Figure 5-1: Cassette removal
• The shut-off gate arranged in front of the flow control gate has to be closed or the silo resp. the storage
bin has to be discharged completely.
• Disconnect rotating actuator from pressure, use pressure reducer (adjustment: 0 bar)
• Release flexible connections between controller and drive
• Disassemble rotating actuator (101).
• Mark position of roller shaft.
• Disassemble lateral sealing cover.
• Unscrew the 4 cassette screws (10.420).
• Turn roller by appr. 135° past position OPEN up to the stop (10.300) into the position for cassette
removal - use provided wrench.
• Disassemble cassette (5.110) laterally.
NOTE!
The spacer screws (10.270) must not be shifted during cassette removal!
The spacer screws (10.270) must however be adjusted after removing the cassette
(refer to Chapter 5.3.4)!
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 24 of 35
146/449
5.3.2 Exchange of roller sealing
• Loosen screws.
• Remove roller sealing from the cassette.
• Insert new roller sealing in the cassette.
Do not assemble the clamping frame twistedly but in a way that it ends on the same level as the
cassette.
• Tighten screws evenly but not too firm (distortion of the cassette is possible).
• Check the flat sealing glued to the cassette frame for firm position.
If the flat sealing has loosened, fasten it again by use of the appropriate glue.
Figure 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 25 of 35
147/449
5.3.3 Assembly of cassette
• Clean feed housing.
• Position cassette in the cassette opening so that the projecting ends of the feed housing will be identical
at both sides.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.420) slightly.
Ensure that during this procedure the cassette will lie on both spacer screws (10.270). This will help to
fasten the cassette in its original height.
• Turn roller back into the direction CLOSED of the operating position.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws with approx. 25 Nm.
• Check for smooth turning of the roller. Use fork wrench!
Size 200 250 300 350 400 500 630 800

Md [Nm] 40 45 50 60 70 90 125 160
Table 5-2: Maximum adjusting torque
If smooth turning cannot be reached, evenly unscrew the spacer screws (10.270) a bit and adjust them
anew, if necessary (refer to chapter 5.3.4).
• Assemble lateral sealing cover.
• Turn marking of the roller shaft in such a way that the roller shaft marking faces the marking at the drive.
• Move rotating actuator drive on the roller shaft and fasten with screws.
• Connect compressed air lines.
• Test the flow control gate in manual mode.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 26 of 35
148/449
5.3.4 Adjustment of spacer screws
After replacing the complete cassette or through mechanic changes of the existing cassette, it might be
necessary to adjust the spacer screws (10.270) anew:
• Remove cassette: Refer to chapter 5.3.1.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.420) so far that the cassette is just movable.
• Turn back roller into direction CLOSED against stop (10.300).
Since the cassette has not been adjusted yet, lift the cassette so far that the clamping frame will show an
even distance all around the roller.
• Tighten evenly the 4 cassette screws at the perimeter (approx. 25 Nm).
Make sure that there is an even pressure of the cassette on the spacer screws by unscrewing and
tightening of the spacer screws until contact of the lower side of the cassette is established.
• Secure spacer screws.
• Further working steps: Refer to chapter 5.3.3.
5.4 Exchange of roller
5.4.1 Roller removal
• Close the shut-off device before flow control gate or completely discharge the silo resp. storage silo.
• Electronically release the drive unit and secure against unintended starting.
• Dismount the plant parts installed at the outlet side so that the entrance to the outlet side of the flow
control gate is accessible.
• Turn the 4 cassette cabinets.
• Dismount the drive unit and draw the drive shaft (A) out of the inner square of the roller shaft (B). Mark
the position of the drive shaft (A) to the inner square of the roller shaft (B).
• Dismount the plate with the solenoid valve (C).
•
1)
Dismount the switching unit (D).
•
1)
Remove the cylinder bolt (E) from the roller shaft (B).
• Loose the 2 cylinder screws M8 x 16 (F) at the hubs of the roller. Now, the roller is not fixed into axial
direction any longer.
• Drive the roller shaft (B) out of the housing by use of a bolt (possibly made of brass). Check feather key
A8 x 7 x 36 (G) for damages and replace, if necessary. Do not lose spacer washers (H) between housing
and roller.
• The roller is now free and can be lifted from the housing.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 27 of 35
149/449
Figure 5-3: Roller removal
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 28 of 35
150/449
5.4.2 Assembly of roller
• Before installation of the new roller check bearing and radial sealing rings with regard to damages and if
necessary install a new one.
NOTE!
When installing the roller shaft pay attention to the position of the roller part.
• Mount the roller shaft on the drive side by pushing-in the roller shaft (B).
NOTE!
Install the shims (H) on both sides between roller and housing.
• Install the two parallel keys (G).
• Fasten the 2 cylinder screws M8 x 16 (F).
NOTE!
The roller must be installed 22 mm out of the housing on the switch unit side.
•
1)
Insert cylinder bolt (E) into roller / driver bolt for switching unit.
•
1)
Mount the switching unit (D).
• Mount the plate with the solenoid valve (C).
• Mount the drive unit.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 29 of 35
151/449
5.4.3 Adjustments
• Adjust cassette and check soft-running of the roller (see chapter 5.3.4).
• Check adjustments in the limit switch unit resp. switching unit and adjust new if necessary.
See also:
Limit switch unit

CP- Document: 697.0009.0023A/NN
Switching unit
CP- Document: 697.0009.1001A/NN
• Install following plant parts and commission the flow control gate.
1)
The flow control gate may be equiped without a switching unit. In this case this working step is not apply.
5.5 Exchange of fabric
The aeration fabric (40)) must be examined annually for wear and a secure fit. If the fabric requires
changing, please refer to Document 621.0009.0022A/NN.
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 30 of 35
152/449
6 Trouble shooting
Fault Cause Repair

Flow control gate is leaky Roller or sealing is worn Ensure that the flow control gate is
pressureless
Remove cassette
Check parts and exchange, if necessary
Roller does not open and/or Roller blocked by foreign Ensure that the flow control gate is
close matter pressureless
- by repeated switching in manual
emergency operation or
- via cleaning cover at the distributor
connected in front
Air pressure too low Adjust air pressure to 5-6 bar
Air quantity too low Clean air filter
Hose couplings are pulled off Connect hose couplings
Throttle valves are closed Open resp. clean throttle check valves.
and/or dirty
Pressure switch on Replace pressure switch
compressed-air reservoir is
defective
Check valve on compressed- Replace check valve
air reservoir is defective
Bleed valve on compressed- Close or replace bleed valve
air reservoir is open or
defective
Roller does not reach the Position switch is misadjusted Readjust position switch (refer to separate
preselected position or has an or defect operating instruction)
extended actuating time Roller blocked by foreign Ensure that the flow control gate is
matter pressureless
- by repeated switching in manual
- via cleaning cover at the distributor
connected in front
Sealing is damaged Ensure that the flow control gate is
pressureless
Remove cassette
Check parts and replace, if necessary
Throttle valves are dirty Clean resp. adjust check valves
and/or misadjusted
Roller does not close during Connections at rotating Connect rotating actuator correctly (refer to
power failure actuator are exchanged pneumatic circuit diagram)
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 31 of 35
153/449
When decommissioning the flow control gate, the Basic Safety Instructions from Claudius Peters
WARNING!



The flow control gate has to be secured with suitable lifting gears
Before disassembly of connected plant components, the flow control gate

must be secured vertically as well as horizontally!
The flow control gate must cool down completely before dismantling!

by an electrician!

682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 32 of 35
154/449
NOTE!
The flow control gate must be cleaned before starting any dismantling work!
The flow control gate as well as all oils and grease must be disposed of
• Release the flange connection
• Dismantle the flow control gate
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 33 of 35
155/449
8 Technical data
Each flow control gate is specially manufactured for the technical process requirements of the respective job.
For this, the optimum technical flow control gate variant is selected.
For this reason, the technical data is job-related and a component of the plant documentation.
Standard Option
Function flow control gate OPEN - CLOSE (P)
Power solenoid valve 6/5 VA / 2 W
Protection class solenoid valve IP67
Control air pressure 5,0...6,0 bar over pressure
3
Control air consumption 0,08 m /h
at 6,0 bar and 60 full lifts/h
Control air quality Dry, unoiled and clean
(acc. to ISO 8573-1) Solid content: 1,0 < d ≤ 5,0 μm
Pressure dew point: ≤ +3°C,
however min. 20°C below the
lowest anticipated ambient
temperature
Oil content: ≤ 1 mg/m³
1
Compressed-air reservoir ) Per. operating pressure 10 bar
Per. operating temperature
-10°C and +50°C
Cable ducts M 16
Closing time Fast closing: < 4 sec
Aeration connection Max. 0,5 bar over pressure
Temperature of material to be conveyed max. 140°C max. 200°C
Ambient temperature -20 ... +50°C - 40°C
Number of limit switches 2 pieces
Micro switch IP 40, 6 A, 24...380 V
Proximity switches PNP IP 54, 0,1 A, 10...30 V-DC
Proximity switches NAMUR IP 67, 3 mA, 8 V-DC
1)
Option
Table 8-1: Technical data
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 34 of 35
156/449
9 Conformity acc. to Directive 2006/42/EC
682.0009.1074A/10.en
Release 10: 15.03.2011
Page 35 of 35
157/449
595.0012.1380A/00

2)
DRUCKLUFTSPEICHER
LOCHBILD NACH STELLE MONTIERT 2)

COMPRESSED AIR STORE ENDSCHALTEREINHEIT
HOLE PATTERN ACC. TO LIMIT SWITCH UNIT
INSTALLED AT FLOW CONTROL
195
625.0000.0021A/NN
GATE OR ON SUITABLE PLACE
SCHLAUCH AUSSEN
LOCHBILD NACH 625.0000.0026A/NN
60
HOLE PATTERN ACC. TO TUBE OUTER
3)
RIGHT-HAND DESIGN 130

E
F
E
2)
SCHALTEINSATZ
1) SWITCHING UNIT
F
1)
60
30
60
1
12 Rp 2 100 12 D C D1
300 B A 50
A B C D/D1 E F
SIZE
200 450 350 290 340 375 485
250 475 375 340 350 1) OBERKANTE GEWEBE
300 500 400 390 400 TOP OF FABRIC
350 525 425 440 450 398 520 2) OPTION
400 550 450 490 500 3) ANTRIEBSPOSITIONEN NACH BAUFORMBLATT 682.0022.0021A/NN.SV
500 600 500 590 600 POSITION OF DRIVE ACC. TO
630 670 565 730 730 575 730 D/D1 (ALTERNATIV) = AUSBAUMASS KASSETTE
800 755 650 900 900 745 900 DISMANTLING DIMENSION FOR CASSETTE

DOSIERWALZE 2000.1 P
ANTRIEB: PNEU, AUF-ZU 682.0000.1074A/06.ED
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 P Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
DRIVE: PNEU, ON-OFF
158/449
Claudius Peters
Dosierwalze P
Flow control gate P
Vanne doseuse P
Cilindro dosificador P
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dibujo de Repuestos
682.0010.1074A/08.SV
01.06 CPTNOT1
159/449
Dosierwalze P
Flow control gate P
Vanne doseuse P
Cilindro dosificador P ............................................................................................................................... 4
Abbildungsverzeichnis / List of figures / Tables des illustration / Lista de figuras

Abb. 01: Dosierwalze P
Fig. 01: Flow control gate P
Fig. 01: Vanne doseuse P
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador P ................................................................................................................ 3
In case of enquiries or orders, please indicate comission no., no. of this spare part drawing, the required
position nos. and their designations as well as all data stated on the nameplate.
tipo.
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1074A/08.SV
Release 08: 01.03.2017
Seite / Page / Página 2 von / of / sur / de 5
160/449
01.06 CPTNOT1
Abb. 01: Dosierwalze P

Fig. 01: Flow control gate P
Fig. 01: Vanne doseuse P
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador P
682.0010.1074A/08.SV
Release 08: 01.03.2017
161/449
Dosierwalze P
Flow control gate P
01
Vanne doseuse P
Cilindro dosificador P
3)
5
3) Kassette, kpl. Cassette, cpl. Cassette, cpl. Cajita, cpl.
(10.110)
3)
5.10 Kassettenrahmen Cassette frame Cadre de cassettent Marco de cajita
3)
(10.110.010)
3)
5.20 Klemmrahmen Clamping frame Cadre de serrage Marco de enclavar
3)
(10.110.020)
3)
5.30 Abdeckblech Cover plate Tole de recouvrement Chapa recubridora
3)
(10.110.030)
3)
5.50* Flachdichtung Flat gasket Joint plate Junta plana
3)
(10.110.050) *
3)
5.60 * Walzendichtung Roller seal Joint de tambour Junta de cilindro
3)
(10.110.060) *
3)
5.90 Rundstab Round rod Baguette ronde Barra redonda
3)
(10.110.090)
10.140 Gelenklager Pivot bearing Articulation a rotule Cojinete de rotula
10.150 Federscheibe Spring washer Rondelle elastique Disco de resorte
10.170 Lochblech Perforated plate Tole perforee Chapa perforada
10.230 Passfeder Parallel key Chavette Chaveta
10.250 Dichtungsdeckel Seal cover Couvercle Tapa de

détancheite empaquetadura
10.340 Nabe Hub Moyeu Maza
20.10 * Wellendichtring Rotary shaft seal Bague détancheite Annillo de abturaction

dárbre para ejes
30.125 Anschlussplatte Gr.1 Connecting plate Plaque de Placa de conexion

size 1 raccordement taille 1 tamano 1
30.160 Skala Indicator scale Cadran Escala
30.170 Winkelstück Elbow Coude Codo
30.181 Winkeleinschraub- Angular screw-in Raccord a vis coude Attornilladura de angulo

01.06 CPTNOT1
verbindung connection
30.185 Gerade Straight screw-in Raccord visse droit Attornilladura recta

Einschraubverbindung connection
30.190 Ausblasdrossel Throttle valve Soupape de reglage Valvula de maripesa
30.200 Kunststoffschlauch Plastic hose Manche plastique Tubo de plastico
682.0010.1074A/08.SV
Release 08: 01.03.2017
162/449
30.201 Kunststoffschlauch, blau Plastic hose, blue Manche plastique, Tubo de plastico, azul
bleu
30.350 Richrtungspfeil Direction arrow Flèche de direction Flecha de sentido
2)
30.360 Schlüssel Key Clef Llava
30.410 Stecknippel Plug-in nipple Nipple enfichable Bogilla de enchufe
30.420 Verschlusskupplung Self locking nipple Obturator express Acomplomiento de

cierre
30.430 Dichtring Seal ring Baque détancheite Annillo de

empaquetadura
40 * Gewebe Fabric Tissu Tejido
60 Welle Shaft Arbre Eje
70 * Walze Roller Tambour Liston de carcasa,

inferior
99 Endschaltereinheit Limit switch unit Unite de fins de course Unidad de interruptor

final
100 Schalteinsatz Switch unit Groupe de commande Dispositivo de conexion

intercalado
101 Drehflügel Rotating wing Aile Aleta
102 5/2 Wegeventil 5/2 Way valve Soupape a 5/2 voies Valvula de 5/2 vias
1)
108 Isolierscheibe Isolation disk Disque isolant Arandela a isoladora
1000.10
1)
Druckbehälter Pressure vessel Réservoir sous Depósitio de presión
pression
1000.40
1)
Minikugelhahn Mini ball cock Mini-robinet à Llave esférica mini
boisseau sphérique
1000.110
1)
Druckschalter Pressure switch Interrupteur Interruptor de presión
manométrique
1000.120
1) Befestigung für Fastening for Fixation pour réservoir Fijación para depósitio
Druckbehälter pressure vessel sous pression de presión
* = Verschleißteil / wear part / pièce d’ usure / pieza de desgaste

1)
= Optional an geeigneter Stelle montiert / Optionally installed at suitable place /
En option monté à l’endroit adéquat / Opcionalmente instalado en lugar adecuado
01.06 CPTNOT1
2)
= Nicht dargestellt / Not shown / Sont pas représentées / No son indicadas
3)
= Pos.-Nr. temperaturabhängig 5… ab 180°C; 10.110.… bis 180°C / Pos. no. depending on
temperature 5… starting at 180°C; 10.110.... to 180°C / Numéro de position en fonction de la
température 5…. a partir de 180°C ; 10.110…. à 180°C / N° de pos. depende de la temperature
5.... desde 180°C; 10.110.... hasta 180°C
682.0010.1074A/08.SV
Release 08: 01.03.2017
163/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
11 A
8
12
CONSTRUCTION
9
2 1
ENDEIN = YES
ENDCOD= 02
-S1, -S3 MICRO SWITCH -S2, -S4 MICRO SWITCH
SANDWICH MOUNTED SANDWICH MOUNTED
6
5
3
PLUG 4
1 2
PG 9
B
M20
-Y1
CONNECTION -S1 -S2 -S3 -S4
4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 C
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TERMINAL CONNECTION
OF PLUG PG 9
4 SPDT SWITCHES
SIZE ACC. DIN 41635 D
STATE OF SIGNAL
LIMIT SWITCH: (S) VOLT LOAD (A)
RIGHT HAND ANTSEI LEFT HAND ANTSEI AC DC RESISTOR INDUCTIVE INDICATORS
VALVE: (Y) = RIGHT = LEFT
DESIGN DESIGN
250 10 10 1
Y1 S1 S2 S1 S2 125 10 10 1
FUNCTION S3 S4 S3 S4 15 15 15 1.5
30 10 10 1.5
GATE = OPEN 1 1 0 0 1
125 0.5 0.07 0.5 E
250 0.25 0.03 0.25
GATE = CLOSED 0 0 1 1 0
0 = NOT ACTIVATED
1 = ACTIVATED
VIEW INTO DIRECTION OF MATERIALFLOW:
DRIVE ON RIGHT = RIGHT HAND DESIGN
DRIVE ON LEFT = LEFT HAND DESIGN
F
7 Datum 06.09.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM KT-682-0017_
6 Bearbeiter Mol
5 REVISION 11.2009 Mol Geprüft Cord
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm FLOW CONTROL GATE P, DRIVE: PNEU CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1074A/05.en Blatt 01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 164/449
595.0012.1380A/00

L R L R L R
ANTRIEB: HAND O O O O O O
DRIVE: MANUAL
COMMANDE: MAIN
ACCIONADO: MANO
ANTRIEB: PNEUMATISCH
DRIVE: PNEUMATIC
COMMANDE: PNEUMATIQUE
ACCIONADA: NEUMATICO
L R L R L R
U U U U U U
POS. ANTRIEB / POS. DRIVE / POS. COMMANDE/ POS. ACCIONADA

L LINKS/LEFT/A GAUCHE/ SINISTRA
R RECHTS/ RIGHT/A DROITE/DESTRA
O OBEN/ABOVE/EN HAUT/ ARRIBA ANTRIEB: MOT
U UNTEN/BELOW/EN BAS/ABAJO DRIVE: MOT
COMMANDE: MOT
ACCIONADA: MOT
Claudius Peters
DOSIERWALZE
FLOW CONTROL GATE
BAUFORMBLATT:/SHEET OF CONSTRUCTION:
FICHE DE CONTRUCTION:/HOJA DE DISENO:
VANNE DOSEUSE
682.0022.0021A/05.SV
RODILLO DE DOSIFICACION Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
PAGINA DE
165/449
Claudius Peters
Fabric for
aeration elements
621.0009.0022A/13.en
166/449
Contents
1 General reference ................................................................................................................. 3
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 4
3 Polyester fabric...................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 Characteristics of fabric ......................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Changing the fabric ............................................................................................................... 5
4 Meta - and Para - Aramide fabric .......................................................................................... 6
5 Sealing compound ................................................................................................................ 7
5.1 Chemical characterization ..................................................................................................... 7
5.2 Characteristics....................................................................................................................... 7
6 Protecting the fabric during welding ...................................................................................... 7
7 Stretching the fabric liner ...................................................................................................... 8
List of figures
Fig. 7-1: Stretching unit for an aeroslide.................................................................................................... 8
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 2 of 8
167/449
1 General reference
Contact address:
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 3 of 8
168/449
2 Description
The fabric serves towards fluidising the conveyor material.
2.1 Designated use
The fabric types described in these assembly instructions may only be used for the assemblies outlined be-
low. They are only suitable for conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The fabric types described in these assembly instructions are only suitable for conveying dusts/materials that
are specified in the associated order specification from Claudius Peters.
mance and operating guarantees becoming null and void. Deliberate modifications to the fabric types will
release the manufacturer from all liability for any subsequent damage incurred by such modifications. The
risk shall be borne solely by the user.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the fabric shall require co-ordination with Claudius Peters.
These assembly instructions apply in connection with the following Claudius Peters products:
®
FLUIDCON Pipe complete Assembly no 362
Airlift Assembly no 382
Homogenizer Assembly no 612
Aeroslide type 2 / ADS- Pipe system Assembly no 621
Gravity separator Assembly no 638
Aeroslide shut-off gate Assembly no 643
Mobile loader Assembly no 652
Lump breaker Assembly no 653
Splitter / Diverter / Distributer / Two-way gate Assembly no 660
Aeroslide type 1 and 3 Assembly no 661
Flow control gate Assembly no 682
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 4 of 8
169/449
3 Polyester fabric
The aeration elements are regularly equipped with polyester fabric.
3.1 Characteristics of fabric
• smooth surface
• high temperature resistance up to 150 °C
• high tearing resistance in direction of warp
• it does not rot
3.2 Changing the fabric
After removing of the old fabric and the remains of the sealing compound, the new fabric can be fitted.
When doing this, the following points should be observed:
• An air permeability test must be performed on the fabric in accordance with Document
595.0037.0007A/NN.
• All sealing surfaces which come into contact with the fabric have to be covered with a sealing compound
(e.g. “highpressure Fermit brown”, see chapter 5).
• The fabric must be tautened lengthwise during assembly (max. 2 %). See also chapter 7.
• The mounting holes for aeroslides type 2 (open aeroslides) must be produced using a hot mandrel. It is
sufficient to drill the mounting holes for the other ventilation elements.
• Cut edges should be sealed with a soft flame. If the welding has been done properly, the cut edges will
have a lightbrown colour.
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 5 of 8
170/449
4 Meta - and Para - Aramide fabric
Meta-Aramide fabric will be used for temperatures of up to 200 °C, and Para-Aramide fabric for temperatures
of up to 250 °C.
The air permeability corresponds to the one of the polyester fabric.
• smooth surface
• high temperature resistance
• high solidity
• it does not rot
• free of asbestos
595.0037.0007A/NN.
• The mounting holes for type 2 channels (open channels) must be produced using a hot mandrel. It is
sufficient to drill the mounting holes for the ventilation elements.
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 6 of 8
171/449
5 Sealing compound
A sealing compound which is also suitable for sealing of threads, flanges and surfaces of highpressure
plants, turbine housings, etc. is to be used.
5.1 Chemical characterization
The sealing compound consists of mineral oil, abiettic acid and chalk.
5.2 Characteristics
• ointment like
• heat and highpressure resistant
• non-drying
• poisonless
6 Protecting the fabric during welding

In the event of subsequent welding or burning of cut-outs in existing sheet metal bodies at the construction
site, e.g., installation of loose supports provided or subsequent installation of an observation hatch, the fabric
must be protected against spatter by carefully covering it with fireproof material.
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 7 of 8
172/449
7 Stretching the fabric liner
Example:
The fabric liner (B) is attached to an aeroslide (A) with the aid of a stretching device (C). See the following
illustration.
Fig. 7-1: Stretching unit for an aeroslide
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 8 of 8
173/449
595.0012.1380A/00

o
k*m
SIZE
50 - 80
- 2*55 60
i

57
TOP OF FABRIC 150 3* 60 - 180 3*60 70
w
200 1* 80 75 230 97 60 65
250 3*100 - 300
h
s
300 2* 85 90 350
4*70
350 4*100 - 400 107 75 72 63
400 2*110 115 450 -
f d*e f 500 5*110 - 550
f1 630 4*115 680 7*73 84
110
800 6*105 850 130 - 10*68 85
85
1000 10*105 - 1050 10*78

LOCHBILD 625.0000.0021A/06.ED
HOLE PATTERN
174/449
595.0012.1380A/00

f d*e f
t=12
A1 d *e f h i k *m s w
SIZE
n1*
200 190 1 * 80 75 97 60 14 *M8 65 57
n2*
250 240 3 *100 -

300 290 2 * 85 90
4*70
350 340 4 *100 - 107 75 10 *M10 72 63
k* m
400 390 2 *110 115
500 490 5 *110 -
630 620 4 *115 7*73 84
110 130 - 10 *M12 85
800 790 6 *105 10*68 85
170
A1 OBERKANTE GEWEBE
TOP OF FABRIC
w
h
DESIGN WITH HEIGHT DIFFERENCE
ONLY FOR SIZE 200 - M8 TAP HOLES

KASSETTEN DOSIERWALZE
LOCHBILD EINLAUFSEITE 625.0000.0026A/06.ED
CASSETTE TYPE FLOW CONTROL GATE Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
HOLE PATTERN INLET SIDE
175/449
176/449
Pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/10.en
177/449
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Packing.................................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Storage .................................................................................................................................. 8
3.4 Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.4.1 Pneumatic actuator ............................................................................................................... 10
3.4.2 Quality of control air .............................................................................................................. 11
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 Adjustment of the set screws ................................................................................................ 12
5.1 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 14
5.2 Repair .................................................................................................................................... 14
5.2.1 Dismounting of drive ............................................................................................................. 15
5.2.2 Assembly of wing .................................................................................................................. 15
5.2.3 Assembly of drive .................................................................................................................. 16
7 Spare parts ............................................................................................................................ 19
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 2 of 19
178/449
List of figures
Figure 2-1: Pneumatic actuator ................................................................................................................ 7

Figure 7-1: Spare parts drawing ............................................................................................................... 19
List of tables
Table 7-1: Spare parts list.......................................................................................................................... 19
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 3 of 19
179/449
These safety instructions must be read and applied by anyone who deals with the pneumatic actuator during
observed.
The pneumatic actuator complies with the state of the art in terms of technology and safety. Nevertheless,
the pneumatic actuator can present a danger if used incorrectly and not as designated by untrained
personnel.
The following safety rules must be observed when working on the pneumatic actuator:
Disconnect; secure against being switched on again; check absence of voltage; ground and short-circuit
if appropriate; cover or guard neighbouring parts that are electrically live.
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 4 of 19
180/449
Independent modifications or alterations to the pneumatic actuator are prohibited.
DANGER!

WARNING!

CAUTION!

NOTE!
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 5 of 19
181/449
Contact address:
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 6 of 19
182/449
2 Description
2.1 Designated use
The pneumatic actuator described in these assembly instructions is commissioned as an assembly.
Deliberate modifications to the pneumatic actuator will release the manufacturer from all liability for any
subsequent damage incurred by such modifications. The risk shall be borne solely by the user.
The pneumatic actuator is designed in accordance with the state of the art and generally recognised safety
guidelines. Nevertheless, the pneumatic actuator can pose a risk of injury and danger for operating
personnel or third parties. Furthermore, damage can be incurred by the pneumatic actuator or other
equipment. The pneumatic actuator may therefore only be operated when in perfect technical condition for
designated use and under observation of the assembly instructions.
The pneumatic actuator must not be operated unless it is installed.
Furthermore, the pneumatic actuator may only be operated by personnel who are aware of the requisite
safety guidelines and familiar with the dangers associated with the pneumatic actuator. Functional defects,
especially those which impair the safety of the pneumatic actuator, must therefore be remedied immediately.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the pneumatic actuator shall require co-ordination with
Claudius Peters.
The constructional concept of the pneumatic actuator dispenses with lever arms, toothed racks and
transmissions and allows for a direct transmission of the torque without disturbing lateral forces at the drive
journal. The drives are light and compact, the degree of efficiency is high. In addition the drives require
hardly any maintenance. The life of the pneumatic can be compared to that of regular pneumatic cylinders
due to the longevity of the lip seals.
The pneumatic actuator is suited for the adjustment of an operation angle of 90° ± 5°. The exact angle of
rotation can be adjusted by means of stops integrated in the housing.
Figure 2-1: Pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 7 of 19
183/449
3.1 Packing
The pneumatic actuator is usually part of a machine, and is only shipped separately as a spare part. In this
case, the pneumatic actuator is supplied in accordance with the transport requirements for road, marine and
air transport.
3.2 Transport
In closed condition the pneumatic actuator can be transported without any special measures.
3.3 Storage
During storage, ensure that the pneumatic actuator is dry or covered in position for mounting. Damage to
CAUTION!
Avoid setting loads down on the pneumatic actuator!
NOTE!

698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 8 of 19
184/449
3.4 Assembly
WARNING!




who have received instruction on the pneumatic actuator and who
can foresee and avoid possible hazards!
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 9 of 19
185/449
3.4.1 Pneumatic actuator
Usually, the drive is installed at the machine at works. If during maintenance works a drive had to be
dismantled it will have to be installed again as follows.
The life of drive and machine shaft as well as the tightness of the sealing depend to a large extent on
the care during erection.
• Check whether the coupling piece can be moved onto the spindle of the machine and onto the drive shaft
without any efforts. Possible edges or damages at the shafts can be easily removed by means of
scrapers or files. Production tolerances can be influenced in the same way.
NOTE!
Never hit drive housing, drive shaft, machine spindle or coupling with a hammer!
A light lubrication of the shaft ends before erection will facilitate assembly and will prevent possible
corrosion.
• First check whether drive and machine are in the same final position.
It will be the decision of the erector whether the machine or the drive will first be screwed to the mounting
component. In any case the screws are only to be tightened loosely at first. In order to retain the screws
it is appropriate to use a liquid screw retainer (e.g. LOCTITE) during erection. As soon as mounting
component and drive are screwed to each other - do not forget to install coupling - the most critical
phase of erection approaches: the adjustment.
NOTE!
The quality of your work will depend to a large extent on the fact that machine spindle
and drive shaft are in alignment with each other in both end positions
of the shut-off device!
• Check whether the mounting component is positioned vertically and horizontally to all respective levels or
axles of the machine. If necessary correct the position by hitting the mounting component slightly with a
mallet. Tighten assembly screws at the machine.
• Check whether the drive shaft is positioned directly in the centre above the machine spindle. Take care
that the shaft axles are in alignment and are not facing each other in an obtuse angle.
• If necessary correct position of drive by loosening the fastening screws and by moving the drive within
the drilling tolerances of the mounting component. Tighten fastening screws.
• Connect drive according to the pneumatic connection plan. Before the functional test of the drive is
effected, adjust drive to "slow" at the throttle check valves. Actuate several times and observe the
installed unit. If drive and machine move relatively to each other and the mounting component twists, this
indicates an alignment error of the two axles which has to be corrected.
• The correct position of the shut-off device in its end position can be easily regulated via the two
adjustable end stops of the pneumatic actuator.
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 10 of 19
186/449
3.4.2 Quality of control air
At the customer's side, dry, unoiled and clean control air must be provided which complies with purity
classes 5, 4 and 3 in accordance with the ISO 8573-1 standard. Please refer to the following list for the
values of the purity classes referred to:
Solid content: 1.0 < d ≤ 5.0 μm (class 5)
Pressure dew point: ≤ +3 °C (class 4)
Oil content: ≤ 1 mg/m³ (class 3)
If bio-oil is used for lubricating the compressor, the control air must comply with purity classes 5, 4 and 2 in
accordance with the ISO 8573-1 standard.
Oil content: ≤ 0.1 mg/m³ (class 2)
The control air must be supplied with overpressure of min. 5.0 to max. 6.0 bar.
The pressure dew point at operating overpressure of the compressed air system must be specified at 20°C
below the lowest anticipated ambient temperature.
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 11 of 19
187/449
4 Operation
WARNING!
The pneumatic actuator must only be operated when it is installed!
4.2 Adjustment of the set screws
The exact range of the pivot is factory-set by an adjusting screw (A) at each side on the housing of the
pneumatic actuator. The adjusting screws act as mechanical stops for the rotary wing (see Fig. 2-1).
NOTE!
The two set screws of the rotary wing must not be turned - they are adjusted at the
works!
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 12 of 19
188/449
WARNING!





persons who have received instruction on the pneumatic actuator
NOTE!
The pneumatic actuator must be cleaned before starting any maintenance and repair work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the pneumatic actuator!
A lint-free cleaning cloth should be used for cleaning.
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 13 of 19
189/449
5.1 Maintenance
The pneumatic actuator requires hardly any maintenance. If the drive is erected accurately and if the control
air is according to the regulations the drive can reach a durability comparable to that of regular pneumatic
cylinders.
If drives are installed e. g. at components which vibrate heavily (e.g. close to pumps) we recommend to
check all screwed connections at regular intervals for firm positioning.
If a repair of the drive should become necessary after a long time of operation refer to chapter 5.2.
5.2 Repair
Position numbers refer to figure 7-1.
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 14 of 19
190/449
5.2.1 Dismounting of drive
• Dismount pneumatic actuator from mounting component.
• Check both shaft ends of drive for correct edges. Flatten possible damages with file since otherwise shaft
bearings and shaft sealings will be damaged during dismounting.
• Set clamping pins (11) in the lateral housing flanges back to the partition line by means of a flat ejector
drift of appropriate size.
• Remove housing screws (14) and separate both housing parts by blowing-in compressed air.
• Remove housing parts (10) from wing (1) without force.
• Clean surface of housing and sealings.
• Dismount and clean wing (1).
• Check shaft bearing (13) and shaft sealings (12) and replace them if necessary.
Housings with damaged surfaces cannot be repaired completely.
NOTE!
Never hit housing parts or shaft ends with hammer, this could lead to damages
at the inner surfaces!
5.2.2 Assembly of wing
• Check whether the stud bolts (6 / 7) are located centrally and whether they are still fixed, if not readjust
using LOCTITE.
• Move O-rings (9) over stud bolts.
• Install wing sealings (3) and spring plates (4).
NOTE!
Sealing profile and wing profile have to be identical. The spring plate is marked where it
will touch the wing shaft. Lip seals and teeth of the spring plates have to be turned
away from the wing.
• Install lateral plates (5) and fix with nuts (8); use a bit of LOCTITE for this procedure.
Torques for the nuts (8): 3.5 Nm
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 15 of 19
191/449
5.2.3 Assembly of drive
• Lubricate lip seals, bearings and inner sliding surface of the housing slightly with MoS2 grease.
• Spread sealing material slightly over both parts of the housing and distribute the material with the tops of
your fingers.
• Remove excess sealing material carefully especially from the running surface.
• Install wing in one of the housing parts, position second housing part on top and press down carefully
with your hands.
Do not use a hammer!
• Take care that the wing seal is not damaged or jammed in between the sealing surfaces.
• Press spring-type straight pins (11) carefully into the drillings of the second housing part.
• Install housing screws and nuts and tighten them with 120 Nm.
• Move wing manually from stop to stop into both directions in order to remove sealing paste which has
probably passed out at the inside.
• After 20 minutes of drying: effect a functional test with 7 bar compressed air.
• Retighten housing screws again.
Sealing material: commercial silocon caoutchouc mass,

e.g. Silastic 732 RTV by Wacker Chemie AG
Grease: non-saponifying and acid-free high-performance grease,

e.g. MoS 2 grease by CASTROL
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 16 of 19
192/449
When decommissioning the pneumatic actuator, the Basic Safety Information from Claudius Peters
WARNING!




by an electrician!
Dismantling work may only be carried out by qualified persons who have
received instruction on the pneumatic actuator and who can foresee
and avoid possible hazards!
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 17 of 19
193/449
NOTE!
The pneumatic actuator must be cleaned before starting any dismantling work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the pneumatic actuator!
The pneumatic actuator as well as all oils and grease must be disposed of
• Dismantle the pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 18 of 19
194/449
7 Spare parts
Figure 7-1: Spare parts drawing
Part no. Quantity Designation

- Set Wear parts, complete
1 1 Wing, complete
2 1 Wing
3 2 Sealing
4 2 Spring plate
5 2 Lateral plate
6 Set Stud bolt or screw, short
7 Set Stud bolt or screw, long
8 Set Nuts for pos. 6 + 7
9 Set O-rings
10 1 Housing (upper and lower part)
11 Set Straight pin
12 4 Shaft sealing
13 2 Shaft bearing
14 Set Housing screws and nuts
15 2 End stop complete, adjustable
16 2 O-ring
21 1 Coupling (not used when installed to flow control gate)
Table 7-1: Spare parts list
698.0026.0021A/10.en
Release 10: 25.03.2011
Page 19 of 19
195/449
Einbau-, Wartungs- und
Reparaturanleitung
Installation and
Maintenance Instruction
KINETROL-actuators
double / single acting
DIETRICH SCHWABE
Gesellschaft für Steuer - Regel - Armaturentechnik mbH
phone: +49(0)6071-92229- 0
fax: +49(0)6071-92229-11
Postfach 1141 mail: info@schwabe-sra.de
64854 Eppertshausen web: www.schwabe-sra.de
specification subject to modification without prior notice page - 1 KINETROL Maintenance Instruction engl Ausgabe 0911.doc 07.09.2011
196/449
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
ROTARY ¼ TURN ACTUATOR / DOUBLE ACTING & SPRING RETURN MODELS
1. Installation
Mounting holes size – Standard actuator
Model Number ISO – Depth ANSI- thread Depth

of thread of of
holes thread thread
014 4 M4 x 0,7 6mm 8-36 UNF 15/64”
02B/024 4 M4 x 0,7 8mm 8-36 UNF 5/16“
03B/034 4 M5 x 0,8 10mm 10-32 UNF ⅜“
05B/054 6 M5 x 0,8 10mm 10-32 UNF ⅜“
07B/074 4 M8 x 1,25 16mm 5/16-24 UNF ⅝“
09B/094 4 M10 x 1,5 20mm ⅜-24 UNF 25/32“
12B/124 4 M12 x 1,75 24mm ½-20 UNF 15/16“ Modell 010 has 4 M4 clearence holes.
14B/144 4 M16 x 2 28mm ⅝-18 UNF 1 ⅛“ Mounting holes size – DIN actuators
164 4 M24 x 3 38mm 7/8-14 UNF 1 ½“ Model suffix 1 is without NAMUR.
Model suffix 2 is with NAMUR solenoid valve
184 4 M30 x 3,5 50mm 1 ⅛-12 UNF 2“ mounting.
204 6 M30 x 3,5 50mm 1 ⅛-12 UNF 2“
304 8 M30 x 3,5 50mm 1 ⅛-12 UNF 2“
Model 014P has 4 M4 (8-32 UNC) clearance holes.
Mounting hole sizes – DIN/ISO actuators
Model suffix 3 is with ancillary mounting.

Model suffix A is with ancillary mounting and Namur solenoid valve mounting.
Model Number ISO thread Depth PCD

of of
holes thread
03A/033 4 M5 x 0,8 8mm 36mm Mounting hole size for ISO adapter models refer to KINETROL
05A/053 4 M5 x 0,8 8mm 42mm technical data scheet TD 124.
07A/073 4 M6 x 1 10mm 50mm
09A/093 4 M8 x 1,25 13mm 70mm Mounting holes size for female spring return assemblies
10A/103 4 M10 x 1,5 16mm 102mm refer to KINETROL technical data sheet TD 121.
12A/123 4 M10 x 1,5 16mm 102mm
14A/143 4 M12 x 1,75 20mm 125mm Note: It is essential that full number of bolts are used and all
tightened
163 4 M20 x 2,5 32mm 165mm evenly.
Mounting hole sizes for ISO adaptor models refer to Kinetrol technical data sheet TD124.
Mounting hole sizes for female spring return assemblies refer to Kinetrol technical data sheet TD121.
Note: It is essential that full number of bolts are used and all tightened evenly. Refer to TD 111.
CAUTION: NEVER HAMMER OR USE OTHER UNDUE FORCE ON ACTUATOR

DIECAST CASES. DAMAGE TO INTERNAL SEALING FACES WILL
RESULT.
specification subject to modification without prior notice Seite - 2 KINETROL Maintenance Instruction engl Ausgabe 0911.doc 07.09.2011
197/449
2. Mounting
2.1. Actuator and driven unit must be correctly aligned, i.e. actuator vane and driven unit must be able to
move in same direction from end stop when coupled together.
Position of output
square in mid-travel
position.
Note:
Position of output shaft when vane at mid-travel position.
2.2. Take particular care in aligning models 05. 6-hole mounting means 30° misalignment possible if flange
has 60° error and coupling 90° error.
2.3. There must be no end load on actuator drive shaft. Check clearance between actuator and driven unit
drive shaft, allowing for coupling to be used.
2.4. Care must be taken to ensure concentricity between actuator shaft driven unit shaft.
2.5. Actuator can be mounted in any plane.
2.6. When side loading of actuator shaft is unavoidable, ensure load does not exceed guide lines given in
KINETROL Technical data sheet TD 28.
3. Drive coupling
3.1. Square hole standard drive coupling supplied in mild steel and may be welded or brazed to coupling
part to suit drive on driven unit.
3.2. When mounting tightened down, check there is minimum 0,5mm (0.020”) end play of coupling on
actuator square drive shaft to avoid end load on actuator shaft.
4. Air / Gas Supply
4.1. Operating air pressure should not exceed 7 bar (100psi).

4.2. Air / Gas supply must be reasonably clean and dry and to a quality class 4.5.5 (according to ISO
standard 8573.1). This implies 25 micron maximum particle size, 7°C dew point maximum (or lower
than ambient temperature below 7°C) and 25 mg/cubic metre maximum oil content.
4.3. Plastic or other non-conductive tubing is not recommended for use unless it is proven to comply with
EN 13463-1-2001 section 7.4.4. Size should be relative to supply/exhaust port size on actuator
concemed. Undersize tubing or fittings will restrict actuator performance.
4.4. The actuator can be driven by a hazardous gas as long as:
4.4.1 The gas is not corrosive (e.g. natural gas “sweet” and not “sour” gas is used).
4.4.2 The gases must not be used within their flammable range.
4.5. Air can be passed to the actuator from three different sets of air port. One is through the side holes for fast
response. Two holes at the rear of the actuator can be unplugged or a Namur adaptor fitted for using a Namur
standard valve or two air holes in the top flange of the actuator by unplugging holes and fitting a Kinetrol
positioning product (Models 05-14).
Note:
On actuators with mounted modules (such as solenoid valves, positioners, etc.) please are considered the
request to the air quality of the assembled modules.
198/449
5. Operation
5.1. External stops are strongly recommended when actuator is operating a mechanism with cantilevered
load. However, KINETROL technical data sheet TD 37, can be used to ensure load inertia and travel
speed remain within allowable limits.
5.2. Second square end of drive shaft may be used for visual position indication, emergency manual
operation or driving of add-on units (spring-return unit, limit switch unit etc.).
5.3. If the square sizes are the same both ends spring units can be fitted either end. However, if they are different,
always fit the spring to the larger square end and drive through this end only.
5.4. Ambient operating temperature range of actuator is –20°C to +80°C. This range may be extended to
+100°C with Viton seals. Special care should be taken to ensure that heat conducted from, for
example, a hot valve, does not increase the actuator temperature above these limits. Refer to
KINETROL technical data sheet TD 69 for guidance. A low temperature version of the actuator, having
an “L” at the end of the type code allows the unit to be used at an ambient temperature range of –40°C
to 70°C, such actuators may be labelled with a special ATEX label (see section 8).
5.5. Visual position indicators are available. Coloured red, made from Nylon 6, they can be fitted over
square shaft a top of actuator or top of add-on unit.
5.6. Ensure environmental conditions, such as corrosive environments, are compatible with the materials of
construction and protective finishes (KINETROL technical data sheet TD 14 refers). If unsure contact
KINETROL. Excessive corrosion of the actuator may cause it to fail in service.
5.7. Ensure operating speeds are less than 1 m/s for Cat 1 atmospheres and 4 m/s for cat 2 atmospheres,
see table below for maximum operating travel times:
5.8. Ensure any build up of dust is removed and regular checks are made.
Model Category 1 Category 2

Operating time Operating time
for 90° travel for 90° travel
(sec) (sec)
01 0,056 0,014
02 0,067 0,017
03 0,085 0,021
05 0,107 0,027
07 0,143 0,036
08 0,161 0,040
09 0,184 0,046
10 0,187 0,047
12 0,242 0,060
14 0,324 0,081
16 N/A 0,415
18 N/A 0,545
20/30 N/A 0,540
6. Maintenance
Maintenance is limited to replacement of seals when wear affects actuator performance. Seal life will
vary according to application, conditions of cycle frequency, temperature, condition of air supply, etc.
Detailed seal replacement instructions in next section.
7. Recommended Spare Parts (Refer to pages 5 & 6)
Standard seal kits, available for each actuator model, consist of the following:
2 off vane seal, 2 off expander, 2 off shaft seal
Plus all necessary O-rings, studs/screws, nuts and grease for all size up to model 14.
Studs are not included for models 09 and above.
In addition, a tube of sealant will be required to seal case halves. Spring return units are not user
serviceable and therefore no spare parts are available other than complete units and keeper plates for
safe spring removal..
199/449
8. Labelling (ATEX)
All KINETROL actuators that are approved for use in areas where explosives, dust & gases are
present, are marked with one of the following labels:
Ex TYPE: XXX-XXX Ex TYPE: XXX-XXX-2100

Serial No. xxxxxxxx Serial No. xxxxxxxx
Baseefa 03 ATEX 0443X Baseefa 03 ATEX 0443X
II 1GD o g 90°C –20°C Ta 80°C II 1GD o g 110°C –20°C Ta 100°C
Category 1 Standard Category 1 Viton
Ex TYPE: XXX-XXX Ex TYPE: XXX-XXX

Serial No. xxxxxxxx Serial No. xxxxxxxx
Tech File KTR 118 ATEX Tech File KTR 118 ATEX
II 2GD c 90°C –20°C Ta 80°C II 2GD c 110°C –20°C Ta 100°C
Category 2 Standard Category 2 Viton
Ex TYPE: XXX-XXX L
Serial No. xxxxxxxx
Tech File KTR 118 ATEX
II 2GD c 80°C –40°C Ta 70°C
Low Temperature Label
Ensure that the details on the label such as the ambient temperature range is suitable for the
application. Also ensure that any other equipment fitted to the actuator (e.g. limit switch box or
positioner) does not restrict the use within the parameters shown on the above labels. Certificate or
Conformance, TD 125, shows the category of actuator approval for different sizes of actuator and
spring unit.
9. Adjustment
9.1. Stroke Adjustment – only applies to models with adjustable stops.
Table of standard stroke adjustments available
Models Adjustment range

available each stop
OM/03/07/08/09/16/18/20/30 10°
02/05/14 8°
01A/10/12 11°
Greater adjustment range possible with non standard stop screws. Contact KINETROL for details.
9.2. Speed adjustment

Slower operating of actuator is possible, without significant torque output reduction, by external fitment
of flow regulator valves. Faster operation can be achieved under certain conditions by fitting quick
exhaust valves. For full details contact KINETROL.
200/449
ACTUATOR SEAL REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS
10. Dismantling Actuator (see exploded drawing/parts list)

CAUTION: Before dismantling check there are no burrs on square drive shafts. If there are, remove to
avoid damage to bearings and shaft seals during removal of case halves. In the case of spring return
actuators, remove spring unit (according to following section) before opening actuator case.
FOR DISMANTLING / RE-ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS FOR 20/30 SIZE ACTUATOR REFER TO

KINETROL TECHNICAL DATA SHEET TD 107.
10.1. Models with visible spring pins in case flanges: using correct size flat end punch tap these halfway out.
10.2. All models: loosen, but do not remove, all case screws.
10.3 Separate case halves by connecting air line to inlet port and blowing them apart. Procedure is safe
althoug producing a “bang”. Pull off one case half.
CAUTION: Do NOT hammer diecast castings or shaft end. It will damage internal sealing surfaces.
10.4. Clean both case halves removing silicone rubber sealant. Clean joint surfaces of case flange with
surgical spirit.
10.5. Replace and lubricate shaft seals.
10.6. Undo nuts and remove old expanders and seals from vane. Take care not to damage side plates.
Clean vane. Some later models use nuts on one side of vane with bolts on other side.
11. Reassembly Vane
Vane sub assembly with studs
11.1 Check studs are tight through vane and equal length each side. If not, apply Loctite to thread and
relocate correctly in vane.
11.2 Model 18: Apply SILASTIC 732 RTV sealant around bottom of studs (to prevent air leakage through
seal on vane stud holes).
11.3 Fit new seal over studs after checking profile matches vane profile.
11.4 Fit seal expander – the hole in it shaped like vane outline shows correct way round – teeth pointing
away from vane.
11.5 Model 08 only: fit O-ring over studs on top of expanders.
11.6 Fit side plate over studs.
11.7 Fit new nuts to studs after applying Loctite medium strength sealant to threads.
11.8 Tighten nuts to following torques:
01/01A 6 Ibf. ins. 0.07 m kg

02 6 Ibf. ins. 0.07 m kg
03 6 Ibf. ins. 0,07 m kg
05 8 Ibf. ins. 0,09 m kg
07 8 Ibf. ins. 0,09 m kg
08 20 Ibf. ins. 0,23 m kg
09 10 Ibf. ins. 0,23 m kg
10 20 Ibf. ins. 0,23 m kg
12 30 Ibf. ins. 0,35 m kg
14 30 Ibf. ins. 0,35 m kg
16 60 Ibf. ins. 0,69 m kg
18 60 Ibf. ins. 0,69 m kg
Vane sub assembly with hex head bolts
11.9 Check vane for any obvious defects and make sure it is free of burrs, then place vane in cradle and
place face down an a bench or hold in a vice.
11.10 Push hex headed bolts with plain washer through side plate, expander (teeth facing toward of bolt)
and seal (base of seal away from bolt head).
11.11 After checking that expander and seal are right way round – expander has vane shaped hole, seal
has shaft centre line marked – thread first few threads of each bolt into vane.
11.12 While holding up side plate, expander and seal, apply a low strength anaerobic adhesive to bolt
thread.
11.13 Screw bolts down and tighten to torques given below.
11.14 Turn vane over then fit seal, expander and side plate over end of bolts. Check orientation as before.
11.15 Screw nuts down thread.
201/449
11.16 Position vane assembly in coupling on bench, hold head of bolt with a spanner, torque up Nyloc nut to
torque specified below.
Hex Head Bolt Nyloc Nut

01 6 Ibf. ins. 0,07 m kg 12 Ibf. ins. 0,14 m kg
12. Re-Assembling Actuator
12.1 Coat bearing bushes and inside both case halves with Molybdenum disulphide grease or grease supplied
by KINETROL
12.2 Lightly and evenly coat joint face on each case half with INSTANT GASKET sealant (up to model 14)
available from KINETROL (SP057) or Loctite, or SILASTIC 732 RTV sealant (Model 16 up) obtainable
from KINETROL (SP062) or Dow Corning. (In emergency, Dow Corning bath sealant obtainable from
ironmongers, etc., may be used as substitute.) CAUTION: EXCESS SEALANT, if extruded inside case,
WILL DAMAGE SEALS. Remove all excess sealant especially from inside edge.
12.3 Insert vane into one case half, turning it to ease square on drive shaft through shaft seal. Watch that lip
seals at ends of vane easily work down into case without damage.
SPECIAL NOTICE: If model concerned has threaded holes around one case half use that half for this
operation.
12.4 Fit remaining case half on top of the other, turning it to ease square through shaft seal.
12.5 For models 01,01A, 05 and 120 only, carefully tap the spring pins back into the other case half before
tightening screws. CAUTION: Check that lip seals are not trapped at case joint face when leather or Viton
seals are fitted.
12.6 Tighten case screws to the following torques:
01 10 Ibf. ins. 0,12 m kg

02 10 Ibf. ins. 0,12 m kg
03 10 Ibf. ins. 0,12 m kg
05 20 Ibf. ins. 0,23 m kg
07 24 Ibf. ins. 0,27 m kg
08 60 Ibf. ins. 0,70 m kg
09 60 Ibf. ins. 0,70 m kg
10 80 Ibf. ins. 0,90 m kg
12 100 Ibf. ins. 1,20 m kg
14 120 Ibf. ins. 1,40 m kg
16 860 Ibf. ins. 10,00 m kg
18 1140 Ibf. ins. 13,00 m kg
12.7 Rotate vane manually to check movement and wipe away sealant extruded internally.
12.8 Allow setting time for sealant before applying test air pressure.
202/449
EXPLODED VIEW OF A TYPICAL ISO / DIN ACTUATOR
Air Port Sealing Screws

Dowel Pin
SP 638
1 Shaft Seal NAMUR Adapter Kit
Bush Vane Fixings
1
6
Case DIN - Case
1 Shaft O-Ring
Bus
h Couplin
g
Coupling
Vane
O-Ring
Fittings
DIN/ISO Vane
Vane Thrust Washer
Seal Case Fixing
Expander
DIN/ISO Flange
Side Plate Flange Srews
Side Plate
for Models 010,
080, 120, 140, 160,
180
ITEM Description QTY. Spare No´s for Actuators

No. 033/A 053/A 073/A 093/A 103/A 123/A 143/A 163
1 Seal Kit 1 SP054 DSP042 DSP043 DSP045 SP056 SP046 SP047 SP053
2 Standard Vane Assembly 1 DSP472 DSP142 DSP169 DSP212 DSP801 DSP262 DSP283 DSP371
3 DIN Case Assembly set DSP480 DSP130 DSP160 DSP222 DSP812 DSP263 DSP294 DSP379
4 Stop Assembly 2 SP485 SP138 SP165 SP227 SP817 SP260 SP292 SP384
6 Indicator Assembly 1 SP489 SP146 SP171 SP171 SP171 SP171 SP171 -
New Namur-Adapter 1 SP638
203/449
EXPLODED VIEW OF A TYPICAL STANDARD ACTUATOR
Air Port Sealing Screws
Dowel Pin
SP 638
Shaft Seal NAMUR Adapter Kit
Bush Vane
2
Fixings
1
6
4 Bus
h
Shaft Seal
Case
3 Case
Coupling
Standard Vane
Vane Fixing
Vane Seal
Expander
Case Fixings
Side Plate
Side Plate
for Models 010,
12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 30
ITEM Description QTY. Spare No´s for Actuators

No. OMO 014/B 010A 024/B 034/B 054/B 074/B 094/B 124/B 144/B 164 184 204 304
1 Seal Kit 1 SP055 SP040 SP040 SP041 SP054 SP042 SP043 SP045 SP046 SP047 SP053 SP048 SP051 SP052
2 Standard Vane Assembly 1 SP081 SP061 SP331 SP091 SP471 SP142 SP169 SP212 SP262 SP278 SP371 SP311 SP400 -
3 Standard Case Assembly set SP083 SP069 SP338 SP099 SP479 SP130 SP160 SP222 SP253 SP283 SP379 SP319 SP399 -
4 Stop Assembly 2 - - SP345 SP104 SP485 SP138 SP165 SP227 SP260 SP292 SP384 SP324 SP396 SP396
5 Coupling 1 - SP074 SP343 SP106 SP487 SP140 SP167 SP229 SP264 SP298 SP386 SP326 SP406 SP406
6 Indicator Assembly 1 - - - SP108 SP489 SP146 SP171 S171 SP171 SP171 - - - -
New NAMUR Adapter 1 - - - - SP 638 - - -
204/449
15) Spring Return Unit
NOTE : ALL REFERENCES IN THIS DOCUMENT TO MODEL 08 ASSEMBLIES ARE SPECIFIC TO THE
2010 REDESIGN. FOR PRE 05/2010 08 MODELS CONTACT KINETROL.
Removal of Spring return Unit
WARNING – the wound- up steel springs are storing a large amount of energy which, if suddenly
released, can be dangerous.
Square
Air Port
Actuator
Gasket
O-Ring
Base Plate
Holding Screws
Spring
Spring Housing Shaft Seal
Keeper Plate
15.1. A keeper plate strong enough to take full spring torque must be fitted in order to remove S/R unit
without releasing spring tension. Note: Keeper plates and screws available from KINETROL.
Refer to table on page 12 for spare part order Numbers.
15.2. Connect air line via pressure regulating valve to actuator air inlet.
15.3. Place Keeper plate over square shaft protruding from S/R unit. Keeper plate with male square can be
provided for female drive spring packs.
15.4. Increase air pressure slowly until actuator vane turns to mid-travel position. (See sketch at 2 of
ACTUATOR section.) Keeper plate holes will then line up with threaded holes in Spring Housing.
15.5. Insert all screws through keeper plate holes and tighten to lock keeper plate in position. Disconnect air
supply.
15.6. Separate Spring Housing from base plate by removing holding screws. Then remove Spring Housing.
15.7. If necessary to gain access to actuator screws also remove Base Plate by removing screws. Take
care with gasket between Base Plate and actuator. (Service Actuator as required per Seal
Replacement Instructions.)
16) Reassembly of Spring Return Unit
16.1 If necessary replace Base Plate after replacing gasket (o ring on 08 models only). Ensure the 4
countersunk baseplate fixing screws are all fitted with o rings (08 models only)..
16.2 Ensure actuator vane is in mid-travel position.
16.3 Locate Spring Housing on shaft, rotate it to line up holding screw holes with base plate and replace
holding screws.
16.4 Connect air supply (as in 4.) to actuator inlet port.
205/449
16.5 Adjust air pressure until it balances the spring tension.
16.6 Loosen keeper plate screws. If air pressure correctly balancing spring tension screws will not bind. If
binding adjust air pressure until balanced.
16.7 Remove keeper plate completely.
16.8 Disconnect air supply.
17) Adjustment Spring Tension
WARNING: The wound-up steel springs are storing a large amount of energy which, if suddenly
released, can be dangerous.
SPECIAL NOTE: User adjustment of types without worm drive should only be attempted if correct
equipment and facilities are available.
17.1 Tension Setting Definitions
17.1.1 Optimum setting is when S/R unit is able to provide as much output torque on the spring return
stroke as that produced by the corresponding air stroke at a particular air supply pressure.
17.1.2 Differential setting is when S/R unit produces more or less output torque on spring return stroke
as that produced by the corresponding air stroke at a particular air supply pressure.
17.1.3 Operating air pressure in these instructions means the actual air supply pressure at which the
actuator will be operated.
17.2 Optimum Spring Setting Test
17.2.1 Detach actuator/spring return from valve or mechanism operated by them.

17.2.2 Attach air supply to actuator through pressure regulating valve and gauge with supply shut off at
regulator.
17.2.3 Gradually open regulator to increase air supply to actuator until actuator output shaft just begins
to move.
17.2.4 Note actual pressure at which actuator output shaft moved.
17.2.5 If actual pressure noted at 17.2.4 is about half the operating air pressure then spring tension is
at optimum. If actual pressure noted at 17.2.4 is significantly less than half operating air
pressure then spring tension is below optimum, i.e. output torque on S/R stroke will be less than
that produced on corresponding air stroke at operating air pressure. Conversely if actual
pressure at 17.2.4 is significantly greater than half operating pressure then spring tension is
above the optimum, i.e. S/R torque will be greater than air stroke torque.
17.3 Tension Adjustment Method (Standard S/R units without worm drive)
17.3.1 Equipment/facilities required:

Air supply with pressure regulator valve and gauge in line. Keeper plate with bolts and spacers
(KINETROL supply). Spanners/tools to suit.
Means of securely fixing assembly to a suitable work bench.
17.3.2 Detach actuator/spring return from valve/mechanism.
17.3.3 Connect air supply to actuator with regulator shut off.
17.3.4 Carry out Optimum Spring Setting Test as at 16.2 above to determine whether spring tension
needs to be increased or decreased.
17.3.5 Gradually open air supply regulator until actuator vane is at centre of travel (45°) position (see
sketch at page 1).
17.3.6 Place keeper plate over S/R square shaft at top of S/R unit. CAUTION: If keeper plate of flat
type spacer washers at least 3mm (⅛”)thick must be used under keeper plate. KINETROL die
cast keeper plate do not need spacer washers.
17.3.7 If bolt holes of keeper plate do not line up with corresponding tapped holes in S/R unit carefully
open or close air supply regulator until S/R square shaft turns so that holes do line up.
17.3.8 Insert and tighten keeper plate bolts.
17.3.9 Shut off air supply to actuator.
17.3.10 Undo and remove all spring housing flange bolts. Leave spring housing resting on base plate.
17.3.11 Turn spring housing in required direction according to:
a) S/R operating direction, i.e. clockwise or anticlockwise operating of spring force, and
b) Tension required to be increased or decreased.
NOTE: Larger sizes of actuator/spring return will require spanner and possibly extension bar to
turn spring housing through square shaft on S/R unit.
17.3.12 Dependent on the age of S/R unit concerned there will be 12 or 24 bolt holes around the base
plate flange (except for 010 model which has only 4 and 140 model which now has 36).
206/449
Therefore older models (12 holes) can only be adjusted by 30° steps whereas newer models
can be adjusted by 15° steps (010 by 90° steps and current 140 by 10° steps.)
17.3.13 As a rough guide 30° adjustment of spring housing relative to base plate will give 8% change of
spring torque output providing spring is already tensioned within its operating air pressure
range, i.e. standard S/R units between 50 and 80 p.s.i. Low air supply S/R units between 25
and 50 p.s.i. See catalogue for full details.
17.3.14 Maximum adjustment in one step will be 45° controlled by available vane movement in actuator.
17.3.15 After turning spring housing by amount required (or possible) line up bolt holes in spring housing
and base plate flanges. Insert flange bolts and tighten nuts.
17.3.16 Carefully open air supply to actuator until side load on keeper plate bolts is relieved.
17.3.17 Remove keeper plate.
17.3.18 Repeat Optimum Spring Setting Test as at 17 above.
17.3.19 If necessary repeat operations 17.1 to 17.3 to further increase or decrease spring tension.
WARNING: spring tension must be not be further increased if air pressure noted is 40 p.s.i. or
more for standard S/R units or 30 p.s.i. for special low air supply types.
NOTE: If alignment of mounting holes to square is important, then the spring tension should
only be moved in 90° increments. This is especially important with female drive spring units
where the mounting angle to the valve will determine correct opening/closing of valve.
18) Labeling (ATEX)
All spring units that are suitable for use in explosive areas are labelled with one of the labels as shown in 8
in actuator section above.
Ensure that the details on the label such as the ambient temperature range is suitable for the application.
Also ensure that any other equipment fitted to the spring return (e.g. limit switch box or positioner) does not
restrict the use within the parameters shown on the above labels.
Certificate of Conformance, TD 125, shows the category of spring return approval for different sizes of
spring units.
19) SPARE PART ORDER CODES – KEEPER PLATES:
SPRING SIZE MALE DRIVE FEMALE ISO DRIVE FEMALE SERRATED DRIVE
01 SP350 N/A N/A
02 SP351 N/A N/A
03 SP352 SP1360/1 N/A
05 SP353 SP1362/3 SP1480
07 SP354 SP1364 SP1481
08 SP904 SP1378 SP1483
09 SP356 SP1365 SP1482
10 SP359 SP1366 SP1482
12 SP357 SP1368 SP1370 N/A
14 SP358 SP1371 N/A
16 SP360 SP1372 N/A
18 SP361 SP1373 N/A
20 SP362 SP11374 N/A
30 SP362 N/A N/A
For non-standard spring codes please contact Kinetrol.
207/449
Model 12B-100 / 124-100
KINETROL-actuator Model 12B-100 / 124-100
Model 124-100 without NAMUR-adapter-plate
KINETROL-actuator
standard device
double acting
Specifications
angle of travel 80° to 102°
working temperature range -20°C to +80°C
(with VITON-option up to +100°C)
max. working pressure 7bar
max. overload pressure 10bar
max. output torque 575Nm (bei 7bar)
quality of air clean and dry (quality class 4.5.5, acc. to ISO 8573.1)
displaced volume 1410cm³
weight 11,9kg
finish epoxy stove enamel
NAMUR-adapter-plate
2 air portsR1/4“ or
35,4 156 31 connection to NAMUR
23 23
25 -0,02
-0,07
-0,02
16 -0,07
4 mounting holes
92
68
M12 x 24mm deep
Ø77,8 PCD
25 -0,02
-0,07
171
2 air ports staggered

G3/8“ 294
56
25 +0,06
-0,00
Ø50
Options
spring return unit

spring units are available for either clockwise (code 120) or counter clockwise (code 130)
solenoid valve acc. to NAMUR
limit switch box (mounted with spare part SP1608)
AP-positioner (mounted with spare part SP1609)
EL-positioner (mounted with spare part SP1609)
P3-positioner (mounted with spare part SP1609)
180° Modul
position indicator / monitor (mounted with spare part SP1608)
standard stroke adjustment =90°

recommended seal kit SP046, consisting of:
2 vane seals, 2 expander, 2 shaft seals and sealants
D. Schwabe GmbH KINETROL-actuator Model 12B-100 / 124-100 030310 specification subject to modification withour prior notice
18 208/449

$ V

$
V

% %

$LU3RUW
*VWDJJHUHG

& &
0RXQWLQJ+ROHV0[PPGHHS
RQ43&' V

' '
0RXQWLQJ+ROHV0[PPGHHS
RQ43&'
( (
,62 2EHUIO¡FKH 0DVWDE
:HUNVWRII
DIETRICH SCHWABE phone: +49(0)6071-92229- 0
fax : +4980)6071-92229-11
mail : info@schwabe-sra..de
web: www.schwabe-sra.de
'DWXP 1DPH %HQHQQXQJ $FWXDWRU0RGHO

%HDUE MHQVZDOW
*HSU
1RUP
) =HLFKQXQJVQXPPHU %ODWW )
BHQJOGIW
%O
=XVW QGHUXQJ 'DWXP 1DPH 8UVSU (UVI (UVG
$ 209/449
CHAPTER 4.2.14.
LIMIT SWITCH UNIT - KINETROL
CHAPTER 4.2.14. LIMIT SWITCH UNIT - KINETROL
210/449
Limit switch unit - KINETROL
697.0009.0023A/06.en
211/449
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Packing.................................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.3 Storage .................................................................................................................................. 9
3.4 Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.1 Limit switch unit ..................................................................................................................... 11
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 13
4.2 Adjustment of switches ......................................................................................................... 13
4.2.1 Changeover Switch ............................................................................................................... 13
4.2.2 Proximity switch..................................................................................................................... 13
4.3 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................... 14
5 Electrical switching elements ................................................................................................ 15
5.1 Limit switch unit ..................................................................................................................... 15
5.2 Limit switch unit (PNP) .......................................................................................................... 16
5.3 Limit switch unit (NAMUR) .................................................................................................... 17
8 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 21
8.1 Technical data limit switch unit.............................................................................................. 21
8.2 Technical data limit switch unit (PNP) ................................................................................... 21
8.3 Technical data limit switch unit (NAMUR) ............................................................................. 22
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 2 of 22
212/449
List of figures
Figure 2-1: Limit switch unit ...................................................................................................................... 8

Figure 3-1: Assembly Limit switch unit ..................................................................................................... 11
Figure 5-1: Limit switch unit ...................................................................................................................... 15
Figure 5-2: Limit switch unit (PNP) ........................................................................................................... 16
Figure 5-3: Limit switch unit (NAMUR) ..................................................................................................... 17
List of tables
Table 8-1: Technical data limit switch unit ................................................................................................ 21

Table 8-2: Technical data limit switch unit (PNP) ..................................................................................... 21
Table 8-3: Technical data limit switch unit (NAMUR) ............................................................................... 22
Annex
With belonging:
Spare parts drawing:

697.0010.0021A/NN.SV (Limit switch unit - KINETROL)
Connection diagram:
Documentation of the outsourced items: (see manufacturer´s separate operating instructions)

Installation and Setting-up Instructions for limit switch unit
Document-No.: ORTDK057
Installation and Setting-up Instructions for limit switch unit PNP

Document-No.: ORTDK054 and ORTDK056
Installation and Setting-up Instructions for limit switch unit NAMUR

Document-No.: ORTDK054 and ORTDK051
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 3 of 22
213/449
These safety instructions must be read and applied by anyone who deals with the limit switch unit during one
of the named phases of the product lifecycle.
observed.
The limit switch unit complies with the state of the art in terms of technology and safety. Nevertheless, the
limit switch unit can present a danger if used incorrectly and not as designated by untrained personnel.
The following safety rules must be observed when working on the limit switch unit:
Disconnect; secure against being switched on again; check absence of voltage; ground and short-circuit
if appropriate; cover or guard neighbouring parts that are electrically live.
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 4 of 22
214/449
Independent modifications or alterations to the limit switch unit are prohibited.
DANGER!

WARNING!

CAUTION!

NOTE!
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 5 of 22
215/449
Contact address:
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 6 of 22
216/449
2 Description
The limit switch unit is a reliable and economic possibility to signalize the position of the aggregate or to
control switchings.
2.1 Designated use
The limit switch unit described in these assembly instructions is commissioned as an assembly.
Deliberate modifications to the limit switch unit will release the manufacturer from all liability for any
subsequent damage incurred by such modifications. The risk shall be borne solely by the user.
The limit switch unit is designed in accordance with the state of the art and generally recognised safety
guidelines. Nevertheless, the limit switch unit can pose a risk of injury and danger for operating personnel or
third parties. Furthermore, damage can be incurred by the limit switch unit or other equipment. The limit
switch unit may therefore only be operated when in perfect technical condition for designated use and under
observation of the assembly instructions.
The limit switch unit must not be operated unless it is installed.
Furthermore, the limit switch unit may only be operated by personnel who are aware of the requisite safety
guidelines and familiar with the dangers associated with the limit switch unit. Functional defects, especially
those which impair the safety of the limit switch unit, must therefore be remedied immediately.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the limit switch unit shall require co-ordination with Claudius
Peters.
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 7 of 22
217/449
The shaft (3) led through the zinc die casting housing (4) enables the individual adjustment of the switch
points through adjustable switch cams (2).
The switches S1 + S3 resp. S2 + S4 (1) are actuated at times by the same switch cam.
A manual emergency operation of the drive is effected via the square of the shaft led through.
The limit switch unit is surface-protected by stoved epoxide resinous varnish.
Figure 2-1: Limit switch unit
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 8 of 22
218/449
3.1 Packing
The limit switch unit is usually part of a machine, and is only shipped separately as a spare part. In this case,
the limit switch unit is supplied in accordance with the transport requirements for road, marine and air
transport.
3.2 Transport
In closed condition the limit switch unit can be transported without any special measures.
3.3 Storage
During storage, ensure that the limit switch unit is dry or covered in position for mounting. Damage to
CAUTION!
Avoid setting loads down on the limit switch unit!
NOTE!

697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 9 of 22
219/449
3.4 Assembly
WARNING!




who have received instruction on the limit switch unit and who can
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 10 of 22
220/449
3.4.1 Limit switch unit
The limit switch unit is ready to install when delivered.
It is fitted by pushing the limit switch unit onto the end of the shaft of the pneumatic drive (see Figure 3-1).
All the power supply lines must be laid properly, observing the applicable safety regulations.
Figure 3-1: Assembly Limit switch unit
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 11 of 22
221/449
• Connect electrical connections.
• Tighten screwed joint firmly.
• The housing cover in the shaft exit has to be rubbed slightly with MoS2-grease.
NOTE!
Make sure that the cover sealing (5) is inserted in its groove and that the cover screws
are sealed with the screw sea lings (7)!
• Place and center cover.
• Fasten cover screws.
The connection diagrams for the limit switch unit must be observed when marking the electrical connections
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 12 of 22
222/449
4 Operation
WARNING!
The limit switch unit must only be operated when it is installed!
4.2 Adjustment of switches
See also figure 2-1.
4.2.1 Changeover Switch
• Put the aggregate into limit position.
• Shift the appropriate switch cam (2) on the guide ring so far until a slight clicking indicates the switching
over of the changeover switch (1) contact.
• For safety reasons shift the switch cam (2) about 1 - 2 mm further.
• Tighten clamping screw.
• Put the aggregate into opposite limit position.
• Shift the appropriate switch cam (2) on the guide ring so far until a slight clicking indicates the switching
over of the changeover switch (1) contact.
• For safety reasons shift the switch cam (2) about 1 - 2 mm further.
• Tighten clamping screw.
4.2.2 Proximity switch
• Assembly and adjustment of the switch cam (2) analogous to chapter 4.2.1.
The luminous diode indicates the switching function.
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 13 of 22
223/449
4.3 Commissioning
It is necessary to check that the limit switch unit correctly indicates the positions of the assembly concerned,
and that it transmits signals to the control room.
WARNING!
Commissioning may only be carried out by qualified persons who have

received instruction on the limit switch unit and who can
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 14 of 22
224/449
5 Electrical switching elements
5.1 Limit switch unit
The two limit positions are indicated by changeover switches S1 + S3 and by S2 + S4.
697.0017.0035A/NN.
Figure 5-1: Limit switch unit
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 15 of 22
225/449
5.2 Limit switch unit (PNP)
The two limit positions are indicated by the changeover switch S1 and the proximity switch S3 and also by
the changeover switch S2 and proximity switch S4 (three wire).
697.0017.0035A/NN.
Figure 5-2: Limit switch unit (PNP)
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 16 of 22
226/449
5.3 Limit switch unit (NAMUR)
The two limit positions are indicated by the changeover switch S1 and the proximity switch S3 and by the
changeover switch S2 and proximity switch S4 (two wire).
697.0017.0035A/NN.
Figure 5-3: Limit switch unit (NAMUR)
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 17 of 22
227/449
The limit switch unit is maintenance-free. If, however, servicing and repair are needed, the following safety
rules and working procedures will apply:
WARNING!





persons who have received instruction on the limit switch unit
NOTE!
The limit switch unit must be cleaned before starting any maintenance and repair work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the limit switch unit!
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 18 of 22
228/449
When decommissioning the limit switch unit, the Basic Safety Information from Claudius Peters
WARNING!




by an electrician!
Dismantling work may only be carried out by qualified persons who have
received instruction on the limit switch unit and who can foresee and avoid
possible hazards!
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 19 of 22
229/449
NOTE!
The limit switch unit must be cleaned before starting any dismantling work!
Only dry cleaning methods may be used on the limit switch unit!
The limit switch unit as well as all oils and grease must be disposed of
• Dismantle the limit switch unit
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 20 of 22
230/449
8 Technical data
8.1 Technical data limit switch unit
Standard Option
Housing protection class IP54 - 65
Changeover switch 4 piece
Standard dimensions DIN 41635
Ambient temperature -20 ... +60°C
Cable terminals are 3-pin with 2.5 4 piece
mm² cross-section
Protective earth terminal 2.5 mm² 1 piece
Cable ducts M20x1,5 1 piece
for cable diameter
9-12 mm²
Table 8-1: Technical data limit switch unit
8.2 Technical data limit switch unit (PNP)
Standard Option
Changeover switch 2 piece
Proximity switch 2 piece
Proximity switch Reverse polarity protection,
normally open output,
(three wire) pnp, positive
switching
DC 10-30 V DC
Continuous current 100 mA
mm² cross-section
for cable diameter
9-12 mm²
Table 8-2: Technical data limit switch unit (PNP)
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 21 of 22
231/449
8.3 Technical data limit switch unit (NAMUR)
Standard Option
Changeover switch two piece
Proximity switches 2 piece
Proximity switches Two-wire in accordance with
NAMUR or DIN 19234,
Intrinsically safe according to
EEx ia IIC T6
or EEx ib IIC T6
Output normally closed (two-
wire),
(three-wire) pnp, positive
switching
Rated voltage 8 V DC
Current consumption not operated 3 mA
Current consumption operated 1 mA
mm² cross-section
for cable diameter
9-12 mm²
Table 8-3: Technical data limit switch unit (NAMUR)
697.0009.0023A/06.en
Release 6: 24.03.2011
Page 22 of 22
232/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
APR: Buente, Andreas // DES: Buente, Andreas // 17.12.2010 09:53
A A
top view (basis)
Switch connections (S1, S2, S3 and S4) acc. to top view
Maintenance Instruction acc. to Maintenance Instruction ULS -007
adjustable strikers
B 10 B
7
S1 S2 S3 S4
11
8 12
9
2 Microswitches 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4
staggered
2 2 2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C C
2 Microswitches
staggered
6
3
5
2
4
1
D Voltage Resistive Load (A) 16

D
10.3
AC DC Resistive induktive Tungsten Lamp load
Operating Conditions
250 10 10 1 3
10 10 1
22.2
125
28
15 15 15 1.5
30 10 10 1.5
125 0.5 0.07 0.5
Enclosing Rating IP 66 250 0.25 0.03 0.25
4Micro-Switch, Dimensions acc. to DIN 41635
E 4 terminal blocks 3-wire with terminal cross-section 2.5mm² E
Scale Weight
1 terminal block (ground) 2.5mm²
Material
1 conduit thread M20x1,5, wire cross-section 9-12mm² phone +49 6071 92229 - 0
fax +49 6071 92229 - 11
Dietrich Schwabe GmbH - Postfach 1141 - 64854 Eppertshausen mail info@schwabe-sra.de
Date Name Title Universal Limit Switch Box 180109-01_engl

Prod. 251005 JW
Chck.
Norm
F specification subject to modifications Drawing-No. \claudius-peters\180109-01_engl Page

1
F
without prior notice
a update /KZ 170209 JW 1 Bl.
Issue Change Date Name Ers.f.: Ers.d.:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
233/449
Claudius Peters
Endschaltereinheit
Limit switch unit
Unite de fin de course
Interruptor de fin de carrera
-
KINETROL
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dibujo de Repuestos
697.0010.0021A/00.SV
01.06 CPTNOT1
234/449
Endschaltereinheit - KINETROL
Limit switch unit
Interruptor de fin de carrera ....................................................................................................................... 4

Abb. 01: Endschaltereinheit - KINETROL
Fig. 01: Limit switch unit
Fig. 01: Unite de fin de course
Fig. 01: Interruptor de fin de carrera ......................................................................................................... 3
tipo.
01.06 CPTNOT1
697.0010.0021A/00.SV
Release 0: 26.05.2009
235/449
Abb. 01: Endschaltereinheit - KINETROL
Fig. 01: Limit switch unit
Fig. 01: Unite de fin de course
Fig. 01: Interruptor de fin de carrera
01.06 CPTNOT1
697.0010.0021A/00.SV
Release 0: 26.05.2009
236/449
Endschaltereinheit - KINETROL
Limit switch unit
01
Interruptor de fin de carrera
1* Schalter Switch Commutateur Interruptor
2 Schaltnocken Switch cam Came de contacteur Levas mando
4 Gehäuse Housing Carter Carcasa
5 Deckeldichtung Cover sealing Garniture de couvercle Junta de la tapa
6 Korkdichtung Cork sealing Garniture de liège Junta de corcho
7 Schraubendichtung Screw sealing Garniture à vis Junta de tornillo
8 Klemmleiste Terminal strip Barrette de raccordement Regleta de bornes
* = Verschleissteil / Wear part / Pièce d’ usure / Pieza de desgaste

01.06 CPTNOT1
697.0010.0021A/00.SV
Release 0: 26.05.2009
237/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VARIANT
STANDARD -S1 -S2 -S3 -S4
4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1
VARIANT
ATEX 2 2 2 2
II2GD B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 SPDT SWITCHES
SIZE ACC. DIN 41635
VOLT LOAD (A)

AC DC RESISTOR INDUCTIVE INDICATORS
250 10 10 1 C
125 10 10 1
15 15 15 1.5
30 10 10 1.5
125 0.5 0.07 0.5
250 0.25 0.03 0.25
7 D
10
11
8 12
9
-S1, -S3 MICRO SWITCH -S2, -S4 MICRO SWITCH

SANDWICH MOUNTED SANDWICH MOUNTED
6
5
3
4
1 2
M20
F
7 REVISION 03.2009 Mol Datum 02.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM KT-697-0017_
6 REVISION 04.2008 Mol Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm LIMIT SWITCH UNIT 4 MICRO SWITCH (004-007) CLAUDIUS PETERS 697.0017.0035A/07.en Blatt 01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 238/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VARIANT
-S1 -S2 -S3 -S4
STANDARD
PNP PNP
VARIANT 4 4
1 1
ATEX
II2GD 2 2
+ - + -
BN
BN
BK
BK
BL
BL
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
-S1 + -S2 : -S3 + -S4

2 SPDT SWITCHES 2 PROXIMITY SWITCHES DC 10-30V
SIZE ACC. DIN 41635 NO-FUNCTION
IMAX = 100 mA
VOLT LOAD (A) C
AC DC RESISTOR INDUCTIVE INDICATORS IMIN = 15 mA
250 10 10 1 TEMP.:= -25...+70°C
125 10 10 1
15 15 15 1.5 TYPE = PEPPERL + FUCHS
30 10 10 1.5 NBB2-V3-E3
125 0.5 0.07 0.5
250 0.25 0.03 0.25 OR EQUAL
10
11
12
8
9
-S1 SPDT SWITCHES -S2 SPDT SWITCHES E

-S3 PROXIMITY SWITCH 6
-S4 PROXIMITY SWITCH
SANDWICH MOUNTED 5
3
4 SANDWICH MOUNTED
1 2
M20
F
7 Datum 02.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM KT-697-0017_
6 en 04.08 Mol Bearbeiter Mol
5 en 02.2007 Mol Geprüft Cord
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm LIMIT SWITCH UNIT, 2 MICRO SWITCH + 2 PNP (004-006) CLAUDIUS PETERS 697.0017.0035A/07.en Blatt 02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 239/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VARIANT
-S1 -S2 -S3 -S4
STANDARD
NAMUR NAMUR
VARIANT 4 4
1 1
ATEX
II2GD 2 2
+ - + -
BN
BN
BL
BL
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-S1 + -S2 : -S3 + -S4

2 SPDT SWITCHES 2 PROXIMITY SWITCHES TWO WIRE BY NAMUR
SIZE ACC. DIN 41635 NC-FUNCTION
FOR OPERATION AN ELECTRONIC
C
VOLT LOAD (A)
EVALUATION UNIT NECCESSARY
AC DC RESISTOR INDUCTIVE INDICATORS
250 10 10 1 TEMP.:= -25...+100°C
125 10 10 1
15 15 15 1.5
TYPE = PEPPERL + FUCHS
30 10 10 1.5 NJ2-V3-1N
125 0.5 0.07 0.5
OR EQUAL
250 0.25 0.03 0.25
9
8 10
E
-S1 MICRO SWITCH AND -S2 MICRO SWITCH AND
-S3 PROXIMITY SWITCH 6 -S4 PROXIMITY SWITCH
5
3
SANDWICH MOUNTED 4 SANDWICH MOUNTED

1 2
M20
F
7 REVISION 03.2009 Mol Datum 02.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM KT-697-0017_
6 REVISION 04.2008 Mol Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm LIMIT SWITCH UNIT, 2 MICRO SWITCH + 2 NAMUR (004-001) CLAUDIUS PETERS 697.0017.0035A/07.en Blatt 03
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 240/449
CHAPTER 4.2.15.
SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
CHAPTER 4.2.15.
241/449
ISO ★ STAR
5/2 and 5/3 Glandless Valves

Solenoid and Pilot Actuated
Sub-base Mounted
ISO 5599-1 #1, #2, #3
● Non corrosive spool and sleeve for long
trouble free life
● Integral flow regulators for cylinder speed control

on ISO #1 and #2 models
● End and CNOMO solenoid pilots,

10 bar and 16 bar models with locking
or non-locking manual override
● Wide range of sub-bases and accessories
Technical Data Ordering Information

Medium: To order select model number, add manual
Compressed air, 40μm filtered, lubricated or non-lubricated override and voltage code from page 5.4.185.04
Operation: e.g. SXE 0573-A60-00/13J
Glandless spool valve, solenoid pilot or air pilot actuated for a 5/2 double end solenoid pilot ISO #1 valve
Mounting: with internal pilot air supply, integral flow
On sub-bases regulators, shrouded push button lockable
Sizes: manual override, 22 mm coil 24 V DC with
ISO #1, #2 and #3 Industrial Standard connector interface.
Operating Pressure (maximum pressure):
10 bar (145 psig) solenoid pilot actuated valves
16 bar (232 psig) solenoid pilot actuated valves
5/2
16 bar (232 psig) air pilot actuated valves
Details of minimum and maximum pilot pressure see overleaf
Flow Characteristics (unregulated):
Size Function ‘C’ ‘b’ ‘A’ l/min Cv Kv 5/3
All ports blocked
ISO #1 5/2 5,50 0,06 19,70 1230 1,20 1,08 mid position
ISO #1 5/3 APB 5,70 0,14 21,14 1320 1,35 1,15
ISO #2 5/2 10,70 0,12 39,20 2450 2,45 2,16
ISO #2 5/3 APB 10,72 0,16 40,40 2520 2,57 2,20 5/3
Centre open exhaust
ISO #3 5/2 19,00 0,14 70,45 4400 4,48 3,84 mid position
ISO #3 5/3 APB 19,84 0,16 74,54 4650 4,74 4,06
Ambient Temperature:
5/3
–15°C* to +50°C (5°F* to +122°F) solenoid pilot actuated valves Centre open pressure
–15°C* to +80°C (5°F* to +176°F) air pilot actuated valves mid position
*Consult our Technical Service for use below +2°C (36°F)
Materials:
Die cast aluminium body. Hard anodised, Teflon coated,
matched aluminium spool and sleeve. Viton and nitrile rubber
static seals. Zinc die cast locking plate. POM plastic parts.
Zinc plated screws. Brass flow regulators.
For technical data on ISO 5599-1 sub-bases and accessories 14 5 4 1 2 3 12
see sections 5.4.187 and 5.4.188
03/01 Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N/** 5.4.185.01
242/449
ISO ★ STAR
General Information
5/2 End Solenoid Pilot Actuated Valves – 10 bar models
Symbol Model ISO Size Flow Regulator Pilot Supply Operator Return Operating Pressure Pilot Pressure Weight
14 12 bar (psig) bar (psig) kg (lb.)
SXE9573-A70-0×/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-A70-0×/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-A70-0×/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Air Spring 1 - 10 - 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
1 SXE9573-A80-0×/*** #1 Integral (14.5 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-A80-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-A75-0×/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 SXE9574-A75-0×/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
12
SXE9575-A75-0×/*** #3 - External Solenoid Air Spring -0.9 - 16 1 - 10 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
12/14 1
SXE9573-A85-0×/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (14.5 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-A85-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-A71-0×/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-A71-0×/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-A71-0×/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Spring 1.8 - 10 - 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
1
SXE9573-A81-0×/*** #1 Integral (26.1 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-A81-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-A76-0×/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-A76-0×/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-A76-0×/*** #3 - External Solenoid Spring -0.9 - 16 1.8 - 10 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
12/14 1 SXE9573-A86-0×/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (26.1 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-A86-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE0573-A50-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE0574-A50-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0575-A50-0×/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1
SXE0573-A60-0×/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE0574-A60-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0573-A55-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE0574-A55-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0575-A55-0×/*** #3 - External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1
SXE0573-A65-0×/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE0574-A65-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
5/3 End Solenoid Pilot Actuated Valves – 10 bar models

Symbol Model ISO Size Flow Regulator Valve Function Pilot Supply Operator Return Operating Pressure Pilot Pressure Weight
SXE9673-A50-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9674-A50-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9675-A50-0×/*** #3 - APB Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9673-A60-0×/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-A60-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9673-A55-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9674-A55-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9675-A55-0×/*** #3 - APB External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9673-A65-0×/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-A65-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9773-A50-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9774-A50-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9775-A50-0×/*** #3 - COE Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9773-A60-0×/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9774-A60-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9773-A55-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9774-A55-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9775-A55-0×/*** #3 - COE External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9673-A65-0×/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-A65-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9873-A50-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE9874-A50-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9875-A50-0×/*** #3 - COP Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9873-A60-0×/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9874-A60-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9873-A55-0×/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE9874-A55-0×/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9875-A55-0×/*** #3 - COP External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9873-A65-0×/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9874-A65-0×/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
× Insert ‘Manual Override Option’ from “Electrical Details for Solenoid Operators” on page 5.4.185.05
*** Insert ‘Voltage Code’ from table on page 5.4.185.05 Valve Function Designations: APB = All Ports Blocked / COE = Centre Open Exhaust / COP = Centre Open Pressure
N/** 5.4.185.02 Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 03/01
243/449
ISO ★ STAR
5/2 CNOMO Solenoid Pilot Actuated Valves – 10 bar models

SXE9573-Z70-6x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-Z70-6x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z70-6x/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Air Spring 1 - 10 - 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
1 SXE9573-Z80-6x/*** #1 Integral (14.5 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z80-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-Z75-6x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2
12
SXE9574-Z75-6x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z75-6x/*** #3 - External Solenoid Air Spring -0.9 - 16 1 - 10 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
12/14 1 SXE9573-Z85-6x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (14.5 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z85-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-Z71-6x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-Z71-6x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z71-6x/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Spring 1.8 - 10 - 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
1 SXE9573-Z81-6x/*** #1 Integral (26.1 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z81-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-Z76-6x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-Z76-6x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z76-6x/*** #3 - External Solenoid Spring -0.9 - 16 1.8 - 10 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
12/14 1 SXE9573-Z86-6x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (26.1 - 145) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z86-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE0573-Z50-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE0574-Z50-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0575-Z50-6x/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE0573-Z60-6x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE0574-Z60-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0573-Z55-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE0574-Z55-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0575-Z55-6x/*** #3 - External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE0573-Z65-6x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE0574-Z65-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
14 4 2 12 SXE1573-Z50-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
Solenoid 2 - 10
SXE1574-Z50-6x/*** #2 - Internal Solenoid - 0.72 (1.63)
84 5 3 82 (Priority) (29 - 145)
1 SXE1575-Z50-6x/*** #3 - 0.96 (2.18)
14 4 2 12 SXE1573-Z55-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10
SXE1574-Z55-6x/*** #2 - External Solenoid 0.72 (1.63)
84 5 3 82 (Priority) (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145)
1 12/14 SXE1575-Z55-6x/*** #3 - 0.96 (2.18)

SXE9673-Z50-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
4 2 SXE9674-Z50-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
14 12
SXE9675-Z50-6x/*** #3 - APB Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)

84 5 3 82
1 SXE9673-Z60-6x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-Z60-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9673-Z55-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
4 2
14 12 SXE9674-Z55-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9675-Z55-6x/*** #3 - APB External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9673-Z65-6x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-Z65-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9773-Z50-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9774-Z50-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9775-Z50-6x/*** #3 - COE Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9773-Z60-6x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9774-Z60-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9773-Z55-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9774-Z55-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9775-Z55-6x/*** #3 - COE External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9773-Z65-6x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9774-Z65-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9873-Z50-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE9874-Z50-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9875-Z50-6x/*** #3 - COP Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 10 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9873-Z60-6x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9874-Z60-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9873-Z55-6x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE9874-Z55-6x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9875-Z55-6x/*** #3 - COP External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 10 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9873-Z65-6x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 145) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9874-Z65-6x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
03/01 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N/** 5.4.185.03
244/449
ISO ★ STAR

SXE9573-Z70-8x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-Z70-8x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z70-8x/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Air Spring 1 - 16 - 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
1 SXE9573-Z80-8x/*** #1 Integral (14.5 - 232) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z80-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-Z75-8x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 SXE9574-Z75-8x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
12
SXE9575-Z75-8x/*** #3 - External Solenoid Air Spring -0.9 - 16 1 - 16 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
12/14 1 SXE9573-Z85-8x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (14.5 - 232) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z85-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-Z71-8x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-Z71-8x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z71-8x/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Spring 1.8 - 16 - 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
1 SXE9573-Z81-8x/*** #1 Integral (26.1 - 232) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z81-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9573-Z76-8x/*** #1 - 0.33 (0.74)
14 4 2 12 SXE9574-Z76-8x/*** #2 - 0.59 (1.34)
SXE9575-Z76-8x/*** #3 - External Solenoid Spring -0.9 - 16 1.8 - 16 0.85 (1.93)
84 5 3
12/14 1 SXE9573-Z86-8x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (26.1 - 232) 0.33 (0.74)
SXE9574-Z86-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.59 (1.34)
SXE0573-Z50-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE0574-Z50-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0575-Z50-8x/*** #3 - Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 16 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE0573-Z60-8x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE0574-Z60-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0573-Z55-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE0574-Z55-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE0575-Z55-8x/*** #3 - External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE0573-Z65-8x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE0574-Z65-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
14 4 2 12 SXE1573-Z50-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
Solenoid 2 - 16
SXE1574-Z50-8x/*** #2 - Internal Solenoid - 0.72 (1.63)
84 5 3 82 (Priority) (29 - 232)
1 SXE1575-Z50-8x/*** #3 - 0.96 (2.18)
14 4 2 12 SXE1573-Z55-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 16
SXE1574-Z55-8x/*** #2 - External Solenoid 0.72 (1.63)
84 5 3
1 12/14
82 (Priority) (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232)
SXE1575-Z55-8x/*** #3 - 0.96 (2.18)

SXE9673-Z50-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2SXE9674-Z50-8x/*** 12 #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9675-Z50-8x/*** #3 - APB Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 16 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9673-Z60-8x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-Z60-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9673-Z55-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
4 2
14 12 SXE9674-Z55-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9675-Z55-8x/*** #3 - APB External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9673-Z65-8x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9674-Z65-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9773-Z50-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9774-Z50-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9775-Z50-8x/*** #3 - COE Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 16 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9773-Z60-8x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9774-Z60-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9773-Z55-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14
4 2
12 SXE9774-Z55-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9775-Z55-8x/*** #3 - COE External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9773-Z65-8x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9774-Z65-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9873-Z50-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE9874-Z50-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9875-Z50-8x/*** #3 - COP Internal Solenoid Solenoid 2 - 16 - 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
1 SXE9873-Z60-8x/*** #1 Integral (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9874-Z60-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9873-Z55-8x/*** #1 - 0.45 (1.02)
14 4 2 12 SXE9874-Z55-8x/*** #2 - 0.72 (1.63)
SXE9875-Z55-8x/*** #3 - COP External Solenoid Solenoid -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.96 (2.18)
84 5 3 82
12/14 1 SXE9873-Z65-8x/*** #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.45 (1.02)
SXE9874-Z65-8x/*** #2 Integral 0.72 (1.63)
245/449
ISO ★ STAR
5/2 Air Pilot Actuated Valves

Symbol Model ISO Size Flow Regulator Operator Return Operating Pressure Pilot Pressure Weight
SXP9573-170-00 #1 - 0.21 (0.47)
14 4 2 12 SXP9574-170-00 #2 - 0.45 (1.02)
SXP9575-170-00 #3 - Air Spring -0.9 - 16 1.8 - 16 0.72 (1.63)
5 3
1
SXP9573-180-00 #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (26.1 - 232) 0.21 (0.47)
SXP9574-180-00 #2 Integral 0.45 (1.02)
SXP0573-170-00 #1 - 0.30 (0.68)
4 2 SXP0574-170-00 #2 - 0.50 (1.13)
14 12
SXP0575-170-00 #3 - Air Air -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.72 (1.63)

5 3
1
SXP0573-180-00 #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.30 (0.68)
SXP0574-180-00 #2 Integral 0.50 (1.13)
14
4 2
12 SXP1573-170-00 #1 - 0.30 (0.68)
Air Air -0.9 - 16 2 - 16
SXP1574-170-00 #2 - 0.50 (1.13)
5 3 (Priority) (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232)
1 SXP1575-170-00 #3 - 0.72 (1.63)
5/3 Air Pilot Actuated Valves

Symbol Model ISO Size Flow Regulator Valve Operator Return Operating Pressure Pilot Pressure Weight
Function 14 12 bar (psig) bar (psig) kg (lb.)
SXP9673-170-00 #1 - 0.25 (0.57)
4 2 SXP9674-170-00 #2 - 0.58 (1.32)
14 12
SXP9675-170-00 #3 - APB Air Air -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.80 (1.82)
5 3
1 SXP9673-180-00 #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.25 (0.57)
SXP9674-180-00 #2 Integral 0.58 (1.32)
SXP9773-170-00 #1 - 0.25 (0.57)
4 2 SXP9774-170-00 #2 - 0.58 (1.32)
14 12
SXP9775-170-00 #3 - COE Air Air -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.80 (1.82)
5 3
1 SXP9773-180-00 #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.25 (0.57)
SXP9774-180-00 #2 Integral 0.58 (1.32)
SXP9873-170-00 #1 - 0.25 (0.57)
4 2 SXP9874-170-00 #2 - 0.58 (1.32)
14 12
SXP9875-170-00 #3 - COP Air Air -0.9 - 16 2 - 16 0.80 (1.82)
5 3
1 SXP9873-180-00 #1 Integral (-13.1 - 232) (29 - 232) 0.25 (0.57)
SXP9874-180-00 #2 Integral 0.58 (1.32)
Valve Function Designations: APB = All Ports Blocked / COE = Centre Open Exhaust / COP = Centre Open Pressure
Electrical Details for Solenoid Operators Voltage Codes and Spare Coils for
16 bar models
Voltage Tolerance + 10%
Rating 100% Continuous Duty Voltage 30 mm Coil with con- Coil Part.-no
Inlet orifice 1,0 mm (End & CNOMO Solenoid Pilots) nector interface acc. to
DIN 43 650 table ”A”
Electrical Connection DIN 43 650 table ‘A’
(corresponding to choosen coil) DIN 43 650 table ‘B’ Code Power Inrush/Hold
Industrial Standard 22 mm width 24 V DC. 33N 4 W V10633-A33N
Solenoid Coil May be rotated at 90° intervals 110/120 V 50/60 Hz 88N 10/8 VA V10633-A88N
Manual Override End Solenoid models: Shrouded push button, spring return, lockable ×=0 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 89N 10/8 VA V10633-A89N
Shrouded push button, spring return ×=1 Other Voltages available on request.
CNOMO Solenoid models: Screwdriver, memory type ×=0 For further technical data on coils see section 5.4.023 or consult our
Push to operate spring return ×=1 Technical Department.
Protection Class IP 65 with sealed plug Connector plugs to be ordered separately. For technical data see
section 7.7.001.
For technical data on CNOMO solenoid pilot see section 5.4.020 or consult our Technical Departement
Voltage Codes and Spare Coils for 10 bar models (End & CNOMO Solenoid Operator)
Voltage 22 mm Coil Coil Part.-no. 22 mm Coil Coil Part.-no. 30 mm Coil Coil Part.-no.
with connector interface with connector interface with connector interface
acc. to Industrial Standard acc. to DIN 43650 table "B" acc. to DIN 43650 table "A"
Code Power Inrush/Hold Code Power Inrush/Hold Code Power Inrush/Hold
12 V d.c. 12J 2W QM/48/12J/21 12L 2W V10626-A12L 22N 1,5 W V10633-A22N
24 V d.c. 13J 2W QM/48/13J/21 13L 2W V10626-A13L 23N 1,5 W V10633-A23N
24 V 50/60 Hz 14J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/14J/21 14L 4/2,5 VA V10626-A14L 24N 3/2 VA V10633-A24N
48 V 50/60 Hz 16J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/16J/21 16L 4/2,5 VA V10626-A16L 26N 3/2 VA V10633-A26N
110/120 V 50/60 Hz 18J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/18J/21 18L 4/2,5 VA V10626-A18L 28N 3/2 VA V10633-A28N
220/240 V 50/60 Hz 19J 9/5,0 VA QM/48/19J/21 19L 9/5,0 VA V10626-A19L 29N 3/2VA V10633-A29N
Other Voltages available on request.
For further technical data on coils see section 5.4.023 or consult our Technical Department.
Connector plugs to be ordered separately. For technical data see section 7.7.001.
246/449
ISO ★ STAR
Exhaust Flow Characteristics For Valves With Integral Flow Regulators

ISO #1 ISO #2
Exhaust Flow (Ports 3 and 5 [l/min]

Exhaust Flow (Ports 3 and 5 [l/min]
800 1200
1000
600
800
400 600
400
200
200
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number of turns from closed Number of turns from closed
Flow: Port 1➔ 2 or 1➔ 4: 1230 l/min Flow: Port 1➔ 2 or 1➔ 4: 2450 l/min
Flow measured at 6 bar inlet, Pressure drop 1 bar
Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures can
exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode cannot be
adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these products
where applicable.
SXE 9573–A Models SXE 0573–A and SXE9*73–A Models

Single End Solenoid Pilot Valves Double End Solenoid Pilot Valves
ISO #1 ISO #1
154 (6,06) 224 (8,82)
Manual Override Manual Override

66 (2,60)
66 (2,60)
37 (1,46)
33 (1,30)
37 (1,46)
7,5 (0,30)
7,5 (0,30)
M5 M5
146 (5,75) 208 (8,19)
36 (1,42) 36 (1,42)
22 (0,87)
42 (1,65)
22 (0,87)
28 (1,10)
42 (1,65)
28 (1,10)
15 (0,59)
15 (0,59)
18 (0,71) 18 (0,71)
38 (1,50) 38 (1,50)
42 (1,65) Flow Regulator Screw
Flow Regulator Screw
All dimensions in mm (inch)!
247/449
ISO ★ STAR
SXE 9573–Z Models SXE 0573–Z and SXE 9*73–Z Models

Single CNOMO Solenoid Pilot Valves Double CNOMO Solenoid Pilot Valves
ISO #1 ISO #1
137,6 (5,42) 191,2 (7,53)

99,3 (3,91)
99,3 (3,91)
71,3 (2,81)
71,3 (2,81)
33 (1,30)
7,5 (0,30)
7,5 (0,30)
M5 M5
127,9 (5,03)
171,4 (6,75)
36 (1,42) 36 (1,42)
30 (1,18)
30 (1,18)
42 (1,65)
42 (1,65)
28 (1,10)
28 (1,10)
15 (0,59)
15 (0,59)
18 (0,71) 18 (0,71)
38 (1,50) 38 (1,50)
SXE 9574–A Models SXE 0574–A, SXE 9*74–A Models

ISO #2 ISO #2
183 (7,20)
259 (10,20)

70 (2,76)
70 (2,76)
40,5 (1,59)
40,5 (1,59)
42 (1,65)
8 (0,31)
8 (0,31)
M6 M6
175 (6,89) 243 (9,57)
48 (1,89) 48 (1,88)
22 (0,87)
22 (0,87)
55 (2,17)
38 (1,50)
55 (2,17)
38 (1,50)
20 (0,79)
20 (0,79)
24 (0,94) 24 (0,94)
48 (1,89) 48 (1,89)
248/449
ISO ★ STAR

ISO #2 ISO #2
157 (6,91) 208,3 (8,20)

107 (4,22)
107 (4,22)
79 (3,12)
79 (3,12)
42 (1,65)
8 (0,31)
8 (0,31)
M6 M6
147 (5,81) 189 (7,43)
48 (1,89) 48 (1,89)
55 (2,17)
30 (1,18)
55 (2,17)
38 (1,50)
30 (1,18)
38 (1,50)
20 (0,79)
20 (0,79)
24 (0,94) 24 (0,94)
48 (1,89) 48 (1,89)
53 (2,09)
Flow Regulator Screw Flow Regulator Screw
SXE 9575–A Models SXE 0575–A and SXE 9*75–A Models

ISO #3 ISO #3
207,5 (8,17) 284 (11,19)

70 (2,76)
70 (2,76)
40 (1,58)
43 (1,69)
11,5 (0,45)
11,5 (0,45)
M8 M8
197 (7,75)
263 (10,35)
64 (2,52) 64 (2,52)
62,5 (2,46)
62,5 (2,46)
48 (1,89)
48 (1,89)
22 (0,87)
22 (0,87)
32 (1,26)
32 (1,26)
65,4 (2,57)
249/449
ISO ★ STAR

ISO #3 ISO #3
181 (7,12) 231 (9,10)
108,5 (4,27)
108,5 (4,27)
80,5 (3,17)
80,5 (3,17)
43 (1,69)
M8 M8
11,5 (0,45)
11,5 (0,45)
171 (6,72) 134 (5,26)
210 (8,24)
64 (2,52)
64 (2,52)
62,5 (2,46)
62,5 (2,46)
48 (1,89)
30 (1,18)
30 (1,18)
48 (1,89)
32 (1,26) 32 (1,26)
SXP 9573–1 Models SXP 0573–1 and SXP 9*73-1 Models

Single Air Pilot Valves Double Air Pilot, Spring Centralised Valves
ISO #1 (5/2) ISO #1 (5/3)
33 (1,30)
33 (1,30)
7,5 (0,30)
7,5 (0,30)
M5 M5
88,5 (3,48) 92,5 (3,64)
36 (1,42) 36 (1,42)
42 (1,65)
42 (1,65)
28 (1,10)
28 (1,10)
15 (0,59)
15 (0,59)
18 (0,71) 18 (0,71)
38 (1,50) 38 (1,50)
250/449
ISO ★ STAR
SXP *574–1 Models SXP 9*74–1 Models

Single and Double Air Pilot Valves Double Air Pilot, Spring Centralised Valves
ISO #2 (5/2) ISO #2 (5/3)
42 (1,65)
42 (1,65)
8 (0,31)
8 (0,31)
M6 M6
109 (4,29) 120 (4,72)
48 (1,89) 48 (1,89)
55 (2,17)
38 (1,50)
55 (2,17)
38 (1,50)
20 (0,79)
20 (0,79)
24 (0,94) 24 (0,94)
48 (1,88) 48 (1,89)
53 (2,09) 60 (2,36)
SXP *575–1 Models SXP 9*75–1 Models

Single and Double Air Pilot Valves Double Air Pilot, Spring Centralised Valves
ISO #3 (5/2) ISO #3 (5/3)
132,2 (5.20) 142 (5.57)

43 (1,69)
43 (1,69)
11,5 (0,45)
11,5 (0,45)
M8 M8
65,4 (2,57) 67 (2,63)
64 (2,52) 64 (2,52)
62,5 (2,46)
62,5 (2,46)
48 (1,89)
48 (1,89)
32 (1,26) 32 (1,26)
251/449
CHAPTER 4.3.
FLOW CONTROL GATE

TYPE MP / MCD
FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE MP / MCD

CHAPTER 4.3.
252/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
DOSIERWALZE 250 MP, MOTORISCH
POSITIONIEREN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 250 MP, MOTORIZED
Name of machine:
POSITIONING
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0520 bis/to 0520
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

253/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
POSITIONIEREN
Name of machine:
POSITIONING
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0521 bis/to 0521
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

254/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
POSITIONIEREN
Name of machine:
POSITIONING
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0522 bis/to 0522
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

255/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
POSITIONIEREN
Name of machine:
POSITIONING
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0523 bis/to 0523
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

256/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
POSITIONIEREN
Name of machine:
POSITIONING
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0524 bis/to 0524
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

257/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
POSITIONIEREN
Name of machine:
POSITIONING
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0525 bis/to 0525
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/2

258/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
Bezeichnung der Maschine: DOSIERWALZE 400 MCD, MOTORISCH REGELN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 400 MCD, MOTORIZED
Name of machine:
CONTROL
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0528 bis/to 0528
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/1

259/449
C


Schanzenstraße 40

Schanzenstraße 40
Bezeichnung der Maschine: DOSIERWALZE 400 MCD, MOTORISCH REGELN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 400 MCD, MOTORIZED
Name of machine:
CONTROL
Maschinen-Nr.:
P01.682.17.0529 bis/to 0529
Machine no.:
Auftrags-Nr.:
02-0/250883
Order no.:


12.06: 595.0012.1381A/00.ED
Reiner Frühling
Managing Director
Seite /Page 1/1

260/449


Telefon: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 219
Kommissionsnummer
02-0/250883
Commission-Number
COS-Position
0030-0010
COS-Position
Maschinennummer
P01.682.17.0520 bis/to 0525
Machine-Number
Kundenkennzeichnung
Tag-Number
KKS-Nummer
KKS-Number
Baujahr
2017
Kunde
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
Customer
Bezeichnung der Maschine DOSIERWALZE 250 MP, MOTORISCH

Description of machine POSITIONIEREN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 250 MP,
MOTORIZED POSITIONING
Typnummer
682.0250.MP
Typenumber
97.8333 KG [kg]
Weight of machine
Seite/Page 1/3
261/449


Funktion Dosierwalze Positionieren WALFUN

function of roller Positionieren


Form Ausschnitt Parabol- AUSCHT

desing cutout Parabol-


Position Antrieb rechts ANTSEI

position drive rechts
Lage Antrieb oben ANTLAG

Drive position oben



Art Profibus --- PROBUS

kind of profibus ---
Spannung Betriebs- 400 V BETSPG

operating voltage 400 V
Toleranz Spannungs- ±10 % TOLBSP

tolerance voltage ±10 %
Frequenz 50 Hz FREQUZ
frequency 50 Hz
Temperatur Umgebung 70 °C UMGTEM

ambient temperature 70 °C
Spannung Heizung --- V SPAHEI

voltage heating --- V
Seite/Page 2/3
262/449

Schutzart IP Antrieb 67 SCHEAN

protection class IP 67
Wärmeklasse F ISOKLS
insulation class F
Zeit, Stell- 30 STZEIT

actuating time 30
Stellungsrückmeldung inkl. RUECKM

position res.synchro inkl.
Wegschalter Microschalter WEGSCH

limit switch Microschalter
Anz.Wegschalter 4 Stk. ANZWEG

no.of two-way valve 4 pcs
Steuerg.Stellantrieb Posigam_+ STEURE

control actu. drive Posigam_+
Seite/Page 3/3
263/449


Telefon: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: +49 (0) 4161 – 706 - 219
Kommissionsnummer
02-0/250883
Commission-Number
COS-Position
0060-0010
COS-Position
Maschinennummer
P01.682.17.0528 bis/to 0529
Machine-Number
Kundenkennzeichnung
Tag-Number
KKS-Nummer
KKS-Number
Baujahr
2017
Kunde
LUCKY CEMENT LTD.
Customer
Bezeichnung der Maschine DOSIERWALZE 400 MCD, MOTORISCH

Description of machine REGELN
FLOW CONTROL GATE 400 MCD,
MOTORIZED CONTROL
Typnummer
682.0400.MCD.370
Typenumber
127 KG [kg]
Weight of machine
Seite/Page 1/3
264/449


Funktion Dosierwalze Regeln WALFUN

function of roller Regeln


Form Ausschnitt Regel- AUSCHT

desing cutout Regel-


Position Antrieb rechts ANTSEI

position drive rechts
Lage Antrieb oben ANTLAG

Drive position oben



Art Profibus --- PROBUS

kind of profibus ---
Spannung Betriebs- 400 V BETSPG

operating voltage 400 V
Toleranz Spannungs- ±10 % TOLBSP

tolerance voltage ±10 %
Frequenz 50 Hz FREQUZ
frequency 50 Hz
Temperatur Umgebung 60 °C UMGTEM

ambient temperature 60 °C
Spannung Heizung --- V SPAHEI

voltage heating --- V
Seite/Page 2/3
265/449

Schutzart IP Antrieb 67 SCHEAN

protection class IP 67
Wärmeklasse F ISOKLS
insulation class F
Zeit, Stell- 60 STZEIT

actuating time 60
Stellungsrückmeldung inkl. RUECKM

position res.synchro inkl.
Wegschalter Microschalter WEGSCH

limit switch Microschalter
Anz.Wegschalter 2 Stk. ANZWEG

no.of two-way valve 2 pcs
Steuerg.Stellantrieb Modugam_+ STEURE

control actu. drive Modugam_+
Seite/Page 3/3
266/449
Claudius Peters
Flow control gate M / MP / MCD,

Drive: MOT
Operating instructions
682.0009.1080A/09.en
267/449
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 8
2.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Packing.................................................................................................................................. 12
3.2 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Storage .................................................................................................................................. 13
3.4 Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.1 Flow control gate ................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.2 Aeration connection .............................................................................................................. 15
3.4.3 Aeration line .......................................................................................................................... 15
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 16
4.2 Protective features ................................................................................................................ 16
4.2.1 Protection from heat .............................................................................................................. 16
4.3 Drive ...................................................................................................................................... 17
4.3.1 Drive for flow control gate M / MP / MCD .............................................................................. 17
4.3.2 Positioning control ................................................................................................................. 18
4.3.3 Analogue control (Option) ..................................................................................................... 19
4.3.4 Manual emergency operation................................................................................................ 20
4.4 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................... 21
5.1 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 23
5.2 Lubrication ............................................................................................................................. 23
5.3 Exchange of roller sealing ..................................................................................................... 23
5.3.1 Cassette removal .................................................................................................................. 24
5.3.2 Exchange of roller sealing ..................................................................................................... 25
5.3.3 Assembly of cassette ............................................................................................................ 26
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 2 of 35
268/449
5.3.4 Adjustment of spacer screws ................................................................................................ 27
5.4 Exchange of roller ................................................................................................................. 27
5.4.1 Roller removal ....................................................................................................................... 27
5.4.2 Assembly of roller .................................................................................................................. 29
5.4.3 Adjustments........................................................................................................................... 30
5.5 Exchange the fabric .............................................................................................................. 30
6 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................................... 31
8 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 34
9 Conformity acc. to Directive 2006/42/EC .............................................................................. 35
List of figures
Figure 2-1: Flow control gate M / MP ....................................................................................................... 10

Figure 2-2: Flow control gate MCD ........................................................................................................... 11
Figure 4-1: Operating the handwheel ....................................................................................................... 20
Figure 5-1: Cassette removal ................................................................................................................... 24
Figure 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing ...................................................................................................... 25
Figure 5-3: Roller removal ........................................................................................................................ 28
List of tables
Table 5-1: Maintenance work .................................................................................................................... 23

Table 5-2: Maximum adjusting torque ....................................................................................................... 26
Table 6-1: Trouble shooting ....................................................................................................................... 31
Table 8-1: Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 34
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 3 of 35
269/449
Annex
With belonging:
Dimension sheets:
682.0000.1080A/NN.ED (Flow control gate M / MP / MCD)
682.0000.0042A/NN.ED (Flow control gate M / MP / MCD-HO)
621.0009.0022A/NN.en (Fabric for aeration elements)
Spare part drawing:

682.0010.1080A/NN.SV (Flow control gate M / MP / MCD)
Connection diagram:
682.0017.1080A/NN.en (Flow control gate M / MP / MCD)
Documentation of the outsourced items: (see manufacturer’s separate operating instructions)
Document no. Manufacturer Designation Remark

NR 1248-F/A/D DEUFRA Actuating drive SQ for flow control gate
M/MP : SQ 25 → Size 200-400
M/MP : SQ 60 → Size 500-800
TMS-300-CP-F/A/D DEUFRA Actuating drive CP-2 / CP-4 for flow control gate
MCD : CP-4 → Size 200+250
MCD : CP-2 → Size 300-800
NR 1088 DEUFRA Control system
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 4 of 35
270/449
These safety instructions must be read and applied by anyone who deals with the flow control gate during
observed.
The flow control gate complies with the state of the art in terms of technology and safety. Nevertheless, the
flow control gate can present a danger if used incorrectly and not as designated by untrained personnel.
The following safety rules must be observed when working on the flow control gate:
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 5 of 35
271/449
Independent modifications or alterations to the flow control gate are prohibited.
DANGER!

WARNING!

CAUTION!

NOTE!
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 6 of 35
272/449
Contact address:
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 7 of 35
273/449
2 Description
The flow control gate is a shut-off and dosing device. It is appropriate for the installation into pneumatic
aeroslide installations where pulverized or fine material is being conveyed.
Additionally, the flow control gate can also assume the function of a shut-off device.
The flow control gate is motor-driven and alternatively designed for OPEN - CLOSE (M) operation,
POSITIONING (MP) operation and regulated operation (MCD).
2.1 Designated use
The flow control gate described in these operating instructions is subject to the 2006/42/EC machine
directive and is commissioned as an machine in line with Article 1, section 1 a). It is only suitable for
conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The flow control gate described in these operating instructions is only suitable for conveying dusts/materials
that are specified in the associated order specification from Claudius Peters.
Any other use, e.g. conveying toxic goods, shall not be regarded as designated and will result in all
performance and operating guarantees becoming null and void. Deliberate modifications to the flow control
gate will release the manufacturer from all liability for any subsequent damage incurred by such
modifications. The risk shall be borne solely by the user.
The flow control gate is designed in accordance with the state of the art and generally recognised safety
guidelines. Nevertheless, the flow control gate can pose a risk of injury and danger for operating personnel
or third parties. Furthermore, damage can be incurred by the flow control gate or other equipment. The flow
control gate may therefore only be operated when in perfect technical condition for designated use and
under observation of the operating instructions.
The flow control gate must not be operated unless it is installed.
Furthermore, the flow control gate may only be operated by personnel who are aware of the requisite safety
guidelines and familiar with the dangers associated with the flow control gate. Functional defects, especially
those which impair the safety of the flow control gate, must therefore be remedied immediately.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the flow control gate shall require co-ordination with Claudius
Peters.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 8 of 35
274/449
The flow control gate consists of a steel housing with a mounted roller. The roller is sealed ready for
operation by means of a cassette with inserted roller sealing. The cassette and hence the roller sealing can
be easily replaced. In CLOSE-position the flow control gate shuts off the material flow.
The roller is equipped with a flow opening. By turning the roller the flow opening is changed between 0 and
100 %. A scale shows the opening angle of the roller in percent.
The position of the roller is adjusted by means of an actuating drive (101-A). The actuating drive is fitted with
manual emergency operation, a path limit switch, torque switch, mechanical position indicator and electric
motor with temperature monitoring.
An integrated controller (101-B), including a regulator, position control point and 0/4...20 mA analogue
feedback can optionally be fitted to the actuating drive.
For assembly and connection: see separate operating instructions and connection diagram.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 9 of 35
275/449
Figure 2-1: Flow control gate M / MP
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 10 of 35
276/449
Figure 2-2: Flow control gate MCD
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 11 of 35
277/449
3.1 Packing
The flow control gate is supplied in accordance with the transport requirements for road, marine and air
transport.
3.2 Transport
When lifting the flow control gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the lifting gear and the load supporting
equipment is in accordance with the weight of the flow control gate. For lifting use the stop points at the
housing. For reasons of safety and in order to avoid damages only the stop points are to be used for
transport.
WARNING!

The operator must attach a warning sign in accordance with chapter 1.3!

The flow control gate may only be transported by suitably qualified persons!
NOTE!
Drive parts resp. may not be used for fastening points during transport!
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 12 of 35
278/449
3.3 Storage
During storage, ensure that the flow control gate is dry or covered in position for mounting. Damage to
CAUTION!
Avoid setting loads down on or standing on the flow control gate!
NOTE!

682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 13 of 35
279/449
3.4 Assembly
WARNING!



Prior to commencing assembly work, please ensure that the flow control gate
is in CLOSED position and can not be operated by unauthorised persons!
attach warning signs in accordance with chapter 1.3!

who have received instruction on the flow control gate and who can
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 14 of 35
280/449
observed when connecting supply devices to the flow control gate:
WARNING!

3.4.1 Flow control gate

The flow control gate is delivered with installed drive ready for assembly.
The conveying direction, which is marked by an arrow on the housing, has to be observed by all means
during assembly.
Depending on the flange size and operating conditions, a gasket must be fitted between each of the
connecting flanges. In the case of supply within the framework of a conveyor plant, the scope of supply must
be examined to ensure that all gaskets are included.
The housing of the flow control gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connected
installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
The energy supply lines are to be placed appropriately observing the valid safety regulations (see chapter 8:
Technical data).

An air connecting socket is located at the lower box of the flow control gate. Here compressed air with less
than 0.5 bar has to be connected. The air connecting socket is equipped with an aperture for quantity
metering.
off valve in the air pipe in front of the flow control gate.
3.4.3 Aeration line

pressure reduction should take place immediately ahead of the flow control gate.
department.
The connection diagrams for the flow control gate must be observed when marking the electrical connections
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 15 of 35
281/449
4 Operation
WARNING!
The flow control gate must only be operated when it is installed!
The flow control gate is, depending on design, for a maximum material temperature of 200 °C. If
correspondingly warm material is conveyed, an increased surface temperature of the flow control gate can
be anticipated. In this case, the flow control gate has to be marked with a warning sign (see the warning note
below).
Insulating the flow control gate as a protective measure is not permissible.
CAUTION!
The surface of the flow control gate must not be touched when it is
operating - risk of burning!
NOTE!
Housing or insulating the flow control gate is not permissible!
The flow control gate must always be kept free of dirt and larger volumes of dust!
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 16 of 35
282/449
WARNING!
The area around the flow control gate must always be kept clear of dirt and
excessive dust!
4.3 Drive
4.3.1 Drive for flow control gate M / MP / MCD
The position of the flow control roller is adjusted by means of an actuating drive with an electric motor.
The flow control roller is moved to the desired position, and switched off by means of position switches.
The standard version of the actuating drive includes a handwheel for emergency operation, two position
switches to indicate reaching the final position (the MP version has two additional position switches for
starting up from intermediate positions), two torque switches, a temperature monitor and heating for the
switching chamber.
The drive can, optionally, be fitted with an analogue 0/4...20 mA position feedback system.
Position control can optionally be integrated into the actuating drive for the M and MP versions. This includes
a lockable local controller (LOCAL/REMOTE, OPEN-CLOSED-STOP), remote control (OPEN-CLOSED-
STOP) and integrated reversing contactor. It is, in addition, possible to integrate an analogue controller into
the drive. This differs from the positional controller, in that electronic load relays are used instead of the
reversing contactors, the analogue 0/4...20 mA input and output, and a three-point position regulator.
NOTE!
The actuating drives in the M version (operating mode S4-30 % max. 300 switching actions
per hour) and the MP version (operating mode S4-50 % max. 1200 switching actions per
hour) are not designed for regulator operation!
A regulating controller can be fitted to the MCD regulated flow control roller. In addition to a high-
performance electronic thyristor relay for motor drive, this includes a lockable local controller
(LOCAL/REMOTE, OPEN-CLOSED-STOP), remote controller (OPEN-CLOSED-STOP), analogue 0/4...20
mA input and output, a three-point position regulator and alarms.
NOTE!
The actuating drives of the MCD versions (operating mode S4-100 % max.1800 switching
actions per hour) are designed for regulator operation!
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 17 of 35
283/449
4.3.2 Positioning control
Switch Meaning position A Meaning position B Ad-

justed
POSITIONING CONTROL (Board: CI 2701)
1 A Switch-off: depends on route B Switch-off: depends on torque A
2) Alarm relay: message „failure of Alarm relay: no message „failure of 4...20 mA
2 A B A
4...20 mA input signal“ input signal“
Alarm relay: message „LOCAL
Alarm relay: message „LOCAL and OFF
3 A and OFF activated“ = fault B A
activated“ = no fault message
message
Local control panel:
Local control panel: EMERGENCY-OFF at
4 A EMERGENCY-OFF at position B A
position LOCAL-STOP & OFF is suppressed
LOCAL-STOP & OFF
5 A Local control panel: locked B Local control panel: no locking B
4)
6 A Start: no torque bridging B Start: with torque bridging A (B )
1) Sense of rotation close : 1)
7 A B Sense of rotation close: anticlockwise B (A )
clockwise
Emergency operation command
Emergency operation command ESD: bridging
8 A ESD: no bridging of temperature B B
of temperature controller
controller
9 A Priority CLOSE: NO B Priority CLOSE: YES B
10 A Priority OPEN: NO B Priority OPEN: YES A
Relay messages: contact-
11 A B Relay messages: flashing signal A
maintained
Alarm relay: no message „torque Alarm relay: message „torque switch OPEN“ =
12 A B B
switch OPEN" fault
Alarm relay: no message torque Alarm relay: message „torque switch CLOSE“
13 A B B
switch CLOSE = fault
Relay 1: Relay 1:
14 LSO TSO LSO
limit switch OPEN torque switch OPEN
Relay 2: Relay 2:
15 LSC TSC LSC
limit switch CLOSE torque switch CLOSE
Relay 3: Relay 3:
16 LSO TSO ---
limit switch OPEN torque switch OPEN
Relay 3: RE- Relay 3: RE-
17 LOCAL
message local operation MOTE message remote operation MOTE
OPEN- Relay 3: RUN- Relay 3:
18 ---
ING message OPEN NING message „drive operating“
Relay 4: Relay 4:
19 LSC TSC ---
limit switch CLOSE torque switch CLOSE
Relay 4: message „command CLO- Relay 4: message
20 ESD ---
emergency operation received“ SING „drive runs in direction CLOSE“
REMOT Relay 4: message „remote Relay 4:
21 LOCAL LOCAL
E control“ message „local operation“
22 Contact relay 1: make contact Contact relay 1: break contact
25 200 Reversing time: 200 ms 50 Reversing time: 50 ms 200
Contact: emergency operation
27 Contact: emergency operation command ESD
command ESD
Direction: emergency command
28 CLOSE OPEN Direction: emergency command CLOSE CLOSE
CLOSE
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 18 of 35
284/449
4.3.3 Analogue control (Option)
Switch Meaning position A Meaning position B Ad-

justed
ANALOGUE CONTROL - OPTION (Board GAM-K)
Operation with 4...12 mA – SPLIT
1 A Operation with 4...20 mA B A
RANGE
Operation with 12...20 mA-SPLIT
RANGE
3) 0/4 mA = CLOSE / 20 mA = OPEN, or 0/4 mA = OPEN / 20 mA = CLOSE, or 0
3 A B A
0 V = CLOSE / 10 V = OPEN V = OPEN / 10 V = CLOSE
4 A Operation with 4...20 mA B Operation with 0...20 mA or 0...10 V A
5 A For switch 7 = B B OPEN at failure of 4...20 mA signal A
6 A For switch 6 = B B CLOSE at failure of 4...20 mA signal B
Position indication via drive Position indication with 4...20 mA
7 A B A
potentiometer -Do not use this position
Operation with 0...20 mA or 0...10 V;
and switch-off of STAY PUT-Function
9 A Operation with 0 or 4...20 mA B Operation with 0...10 V A
10 A Operation with 0 or 4...20 mA B Operation with 0...10 V A
Only for flow control gate 2000.1 MOT with drive unit installed at the left side → switch 7=A
1)
2)
Only together with analogue control, otherwise without function
3)
Position of potentiometer: A = POT STD and B = POT REV
4)
Switch 6=B Only for flow control gate
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 19 of 35
285/449
4.3.4 Manual emergency operation
The size 200 to 400 M and MP flow control gates are fitted with actuating drives of type SQ25. This
actuating drive has a handwheel that turns during operation. Since the handwheel does not have any
protruding parts, it does not present any risk of injury.
NOTE!
The handwheel must not be operated until after the actuating drive has been released!
The handwheel must never be used during operation!
This would damage the actuating drive!
Emergency manual operation must only be carried out by trained technician!
The size 500 to 800 M and MP flow control gates are fitted with actuating drives of type SQ60. This
actuating drive has a handwheel that turns during operation. Since the handwheel does not have any
protruding parts, it does not present any risk of injury.
The type SQ60 actuating drive is also fitted with an intermediate gear. There is a coupling lever at this
intermediate gear which must be pulled down before the actuating drive can be operated manually using the
handwheel.
NOTE!
The handwheel must not be operated until after the actuating drive has been released and
the coupling lever pulled downwards!
It is necessary to note that the coupling lever must be pushed upwards after using the
handwheel and before starting operation of the actuating drive again!

Figure 4-1: Operating the handwheel
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 20 of 35
286/449
The size 200 to 800 MCD flow control gates are fitted with actuating drives of types CP-2 and CP-4. This
actuating drive has a handwheel with a crank which is automatically engaged as soon as the actuating drive
is released. The handwheel is uncoupled, and must not be used during operation!
NOTE!
The handwheel must not be operated until after the actuating drive has been released!
4.4 Commissioning
First of all the mechanic function of the flow control gate has to be checked. The actuating drive is to be
turned with the handwheel for this purpose (see Chapter 4.3.4, Manual Emergency Operation).
WARNING!

specialists who have received instruction on the
flow control gate and who can foresee and avoid possible hazards!
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 21 of 35
287/449
WARNING!



Prior to commencing maintenance and repair work, please ensure that the
flow control gate is in CLOSED position and can not be operated by
unauthorised persons!

after the flow control gate has fully cooled down!
attach warning signs in accordance with chapter 1.3!


682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 22 of 35
288/449
NOTE!
The flow control gate must be cleaned before starting any maintenance and repair work!
5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance work Intervals

Check the fabric 1 Yearly
Check roller for smooth running 1 month
Visual inspection of the roller 1 month
Visual inspection of the roller sealing 1 month
Table 5-1: Maintenance work
5.2 Lubrication
For the flow control gate no lubrication is required.
Lubrication of motor drive: Refer to separate operating instructions.
5.3 Exchange of roller sealing
A worn roller sealing has to be exchanged in time in order to avoid unnecessary wear of the flow control
gate.
Leakages and/or an uneven or extended actuating time indicate wear.
The cassette (5.110) has to be removed for replacing the roller sealing.
The repair work described in the following can be effected easily and fast. No special tools are required.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 23 of 35
289/449
5.3.1 Cassette removal
Roller position Operation Roller position Cassette exchange
Figure 5-1: Cassette removal
• The shut-off gate arranged in front of the flow control gate has to be closed or the silo resp. the storage
bin has to be discharged completely.
• Disconnect drive motor and secure against accidental starting.
• Disassemble drive.
• Turn roller with fork wrench (30.360) in OPEN direction until stop is reached (roller in position "cassette
exchange").
• Disassemble lateral sealing cover.

• Unscrew the 4 cassette screws (10.420).
• Disassemble cassette (5.110) laterally.
NOTE!
The spacer screws (10.270) must not be shifted during cassette removal!
The spacer screws (10.270) must however be adjusted after removing the cassette
(refer to chapter 5.3.4)!
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 24 of 35
290/449
5.3.2 Exchange of roller sealing
• Loosen screws.
• Remove roller sealing from the cassette.
• Insert new roller sealing in the cassette.
Do not assemble the clamping frame twistedly but in a way that it ends on the same level as the
cassette.
• Tighten screws evenly but not too firm (distortion of the cassette is possible).
• Check the flat sealing glued to the cassette frame for firm position.
If the flat sealing has loosened, fasten it again by use of the appropriate glue.
Figure 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 25 of 35
291/449
5.3.3 Assembly of cassette
• Clean feed housing.

• Position cassette in the cassette opening so that the projecting ends of the feed housing will be identical
at both sides.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.420) slightly.
Ensure that during this procedure the cassette will lie on both spacer screws (10.270). This will help to
fasten the cassette in its original height.
• Turn roller back into the direction CLOSED of the operating position.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws with approx. 25 Nm.
• Check for smooth turning of the roller. Use fork wrench (30.360)!
Size 200 250 300 350 400 500 630 800
Md [Nm] 40 45 50 60 70 90 125 160
Table 5-2: Maximum adjusting torque
If smooth turning cannot be reached, evenly unscrew the spacer screws (10.270) a bit and adjust them
anew, if necessary (refer to chapter 5.3.4).
• Assemble lateral sealing cover.

• Turn marking of the roller shaft in such a way that the roller shaft marking faces the marking at the drive.
• Assemble the drive.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 26 of 35
292/449
5.3.4 Adjustment of spacer screws
After replacing the complete cassette or through mechanic changes of the existing cassette, it might be
necessary to adjust the spacer screws (10.270) anew:
• Remove cassette: Refer to chapter 5.3.1.

• Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.420) so far that the cassette is just movable.
• Turn back roller into direction CLOSED against stop (10.300).
Since the cassette has not been adjusted yet, lift the cassette so far that the clamping frame will show an
even distance all around the roller.
• Tighten evenly the 4 cassette screws at the perimeter (approx. 25 Nm).
Make sure that there is an even pressure of the cassette on the spacer screws by unscrewing and
tightening of the spacer screws until contact of the lower side of the cassette is established.
• Secure spacer screws.
• Further working steps: Refer to chapter 5.3.3.
5.4 Exchange of roller
5.4.1 Roller removal
• Close the shut-off device before flow control gate or completely discharge the silo resp. storage silo.
• Electronically release the drive unit and secure against unintended starting.
• Dismount the plant parts installed at the outlet side so that the entrance to the outlet side of the flow
control gate is accessible.
• Turn the 4 cassette cabinets.
• Loose the 4 hexagon nuts M10 at the console (C). Do not lose the shims VS10.
• Dismount the drive unit (A) and draw it from the roller shaft (B). Mark the position of the drive unit (A) to
the roller shaft (B).
• Loose the 2 cylinder screws M8 x 16 (D) at the hubs of the roller. Now, the roller is not fixed into axial
direction any longer.
• Drive the roller shaft (B) out of the housing by use of a bolt (possibly made of brass). Check feather key
A8 x 7 x 36 (E) for damages and replace, if necessary. Do not lose spacer washers (F) between housing
and roller.
• The roller is now free and can be lifted from the housing.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 27 of 35
293/449
Figure 5-3: Roller removal
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 28 of 35
294/449
5.4.2 Assembly of roller
• Before installation of the new roller check bearing and radial sealing rings with regard to damages and if
necessary install a new one.
NOTE!
When installing the roller shaft pay attention to the position of the roller part.
• Mount the roller shaft on the drive side by pushing-in the roller shaft (B).
NOTE!
Install the shims (F) on both sides between roller and housing.
• Install the two parallel keys (E).
• Fasten the 2 cylinder screws M8 x 16 (D).
NOTE!
The roller must be installed 22 mm out of the housing on the switch unit side.
• Mount the drive unit.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 29 of 35
295/449
5.4.3 Adjustments
• Adjust cassette and check soft-running of the roller (see chapter 5.3.4).
•
1)
Check adjustments in the drive control and adjust new if necessary
See also:
Actuating drive SQ / CP-2 / CP-4

DEUFRA document: NR 1248-F/A/D and TMS-300-CP-F/A/D
DEUFRA control system: NR 1088
• Install following plant parts and commission the flow control gate.
1)
The flow control gate may be equiped without a drive control. In this case this working step is not apply.
5.5 Exchange the fabric
The aeration fabric (40) must be examined annually for wear and a secure fit. If the fabric requires changing,
please refer to Document 621.0009.0022A/NN.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 30 of 35
296/449
6 Trouble shooting
Fault Cause Repair

Flow control gate is Roller or sealing is worn Disconnect flow control gate
leaky Remove cassette
Check parts and exchange, if necessary
Roller does not open Roller blocked by foreign matter Disconnect flow control gate
and/or close Remove foreign matter
– by repeated switching in manual
– via cleaning cover at the distributor
connected in front
Roller does not reach Position/torque switch is Readjust switch (refer to separate operating
the preselected misadjusted or defect instruction)
position or has an Roller blocked by foreign matter Disconnect flow control gate
extended actuating
time Remove foreign matter
– by repeated switching in manual
– via cleaning cover at the distributor
connected in front
Sealing is damaged Disconnect flow control gate
Remove cassette
Check parts and replace, if necessary
Motor gets too hot Insufficient cooling Clean cooling ribs
Provide free access for air
Motor delta-connected instead of Disconnect flow control gate
star-connected Change connection
Motor is not disconnected in end Adjust limit switches (refer to separate
positions instructions)
Actuating drive does No voltage Check power supply
not start Motor protection reacts Check electrical installation for shortcut
Fuses/ motor Shortcut in motor or in the Exchange motor if required
protection reacts often electrical installation Remove fault in the electrical installation
Wrong rotating 2 Phases interchanged Disconnect flow control gate
direction Interchange the two phases
Other causes of faults and their rectification may be found in the separate operating instructions for the
actuating drive.
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 31 of 35
297/449
When decommissioning the flow control gate, the Basic Safety Instructions from Claudius Peters
WARNING!



The flow control gate has to be secured with suitable lifting gears
Before disassembly of connected plant components, the flow control gate

must be secured vertically as well as horizontally!
The flow control gate must cool down completely before dismantling!
in accordance with chapter 1.3!

by an electrician!

682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 32 of 35
298/449
NOTE!
The flow control gate must be cleaned before starting any dismantling work!
The flow control gate as well as all oils and grease must be disposed of
• Release the flange connection
• Dismantle the flow control gate
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 33 of 35
299/449
8 Technical data
Each flow control gate is specially manufactured for the technical process requirements of the respective job.
For this, the optimum technical flow control gate variant is selected.
For this reason, the technical data is job-related and a component of the plant documentation.
Standard Option
Function flow control gate -OPEN/CLOSE (M),

-POSITIONING (MP)
-MODULATING (MCD)
1)
Power Size 200...400 = 0,10 kW =M
3) 6)
Size 200...400 = 0,03 kW = MP
2)
Size 500...800 = 0,14 kW =M
6)
Size 500...800 = 0,06 kW = MP
3)
Size 200...250 = 0,05 kW / 400 V = MCD
4)
Size 200...250 = 0,06 kW / 480 V / 60 Hz = MCD
5)
Size 200...250 = 0,06 kW / 400 V / 50 Hz = MCD
8)
Size 300...800 = 0,05 kW / 400 V = MCD
7)
Size 300...800 = 0,06 kW / 440 V = MCD
6)
Size 300...800 = 0,15 kW / 500 V = MCD
6)
Size 300...800 = 0,18 kW / 400 V = MCD
Protection class - drive IP 67
Thermal class - drive F
Operating mode - drive S4-30% = max. 300 starts/hour =M
S4-50% = max. 1200 starts/hour = MP
S4-100% = max. 1800 starts/hour = MCD
Cable leadthrough 2 x M 25
1) 2)
Closing time [sec/90°] 10 , 15 =M
3) 4) 5)
30 , 35 , 60 = MP, MCD
6) 7) 8)
30 , 50 , 60 = MP, MCD
Temperature of max. 140 °C max. 200 °C
transported materials
Ambient temperature -20 ... 70 °C (MCD: -20...60 °C) -40 ... 90 °C (MCD: ...60 °C)
Venting connection max. 0,5 bar overpressure

Positioning precision MP: +/- 2%; MCD: +/- 1%
Micro switch 250V – 16A
Position switch M / MCD: 2 pcs., MP: 4 pcs.
Torque switch 2 pcs.
Position feedback – 0/4...20 mA, 12...32 V DC
– max. load: 750 Ω at 24 V
– 2, 3 or 4-wire connection
– Linearity: < 0.5%
Position controller – Reversing contactors
– Local control point
Analogue control and – 3-point position regulator
regulate and control – Electronic load relay
– Local control point
– 0/4...20 mA, input/output
– Alarm relay
Profibus – DP card
Table 8-1: Technical data
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 34 of 35
300/449
9 Conformity acc. to Directive 2006/42/EC
682.0009.1080A/09.en
Release 9: 20.10.2015
Page 35 of 35
301/449
595.0012.1380A/00

AUSF. M/MP LOCHBILD NACH

DESIGN HOLE PATTERN ACC. TO ANTRIEBSSTEUERUNG 2)
625.0000.0026A/NN
X LOCHBILD NACH
HOLE PATTERN ACC. TO
DRIVE CONTROL
625.0000.0021A/NN
60
340=500+630
312=200-400
Gr. / SIZE
3)
RIGHT-HAND DESIGN
E
E
F
1)
F
1)
60
H
30
60
12 100 12 D C D1 Gr. / SIZE

300 B A 155=200-400
110=500-630
230
X SIZE
A B C D/D1 E F H
ORTSTEUERSTELLE DER ANTRIEBSSTEUERUNG
1) OBERKANTE GEWEBE LOCAL CONTROL PANEL OF THE CONTROL DEVICE
TOP OF FABRIC 200 435 175 290 340 375 484 257
FERNBETRIEB
REMOTE AUS 250 460 200 340 350
2) OPTION OFF
300 485 225 390 400
3) ANTRIEBSPOSITIONEN NACH BAUFORMBLATT STOP 350 510 250 440 450 398 520 272
POSITION OF DRIVE ACC. TO
682.0022.0021A/NN.SV 400 535 275 490 500
VOR ORT
D/D1 (ALTERNATIV) = AUSBAUMASS KASSETTE LOCAL 500 585 325 590 600
DISMANTLING DIMENSION 630 655 390 730 730 575 730
FOR CASSETTE STOP
305
800 740 475 900 900 745 900

DOSIERWALZE 2000.1 M/MP/MCD
ANTRIEB M = AUF/ZU - MP = POSITIONIEREN - MCD = REGELN 682.0000.1080A/04.ED
FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 M/MP/MCD Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 2
DRIVE M = OPEN/CLOSE - MP = POSITIONING - MCD = MODULATING
302/449
595.0012.1380A/00

AUSF. MCD
REGELSTEUERUNG 2)
DESIGN LOCHBILD NACH LOCHBILD NACH MODULATING CONTROL
X HOLE PATTERN ACC. TO
625.0000.0021A/NN
HOLE PATTERN ACC. TO
625.0000.0026A/NN
K
60
294=200+250
412=300-630
Gr. / SIZE
3)
RIGHT-HAND DESIGN
E
E
F
1)
F
1)
60
H
30
60
12 100 12 D C D1
300 B A
291 L1
X SIZE
A B C D/D1 E F H K L1
1) OBERKANTE GEWEBE ORTSTEUERSTELLE DER REGELSTEUERUNG
TOP OF FABRIC LOCAL CONTROL PANEL OF THE MODULATING CONTROL 200 435 175 290 340 375 484 257 108 22
FERNBETRIEB 250 460 200 340 350
2) OPTION REMOTE AUS
OFF 300 485 225 390 400
3) ANTRIEBSPOSITIONEN NACH BAUFORMBLATT 350 510 250 440 450 398 520 272
POSITION OF DRIVE ACC. TO STOP
682.0022.0021A/NN.SV 400 535 275 490 500 16 65
D/D1 (ALTERNATIV) = AUSBAUMASS KASSETTE VOR ORT 500 585 325 590 600
DISMANTLING DIMENSION LOCAL
FOR CASSETTE 630 655 390 730 730 575 730
STOP 305
800 740 475 900 900 745 900
MASSBLATT:/DIMENSION SHEET:
682.0000.1080A/04.ED
Seite/PAGE 2 von/OF 2
303/449
Claudius Peters
Dosierwalze 2000.1 M/MP/MCD

Flow control gate 2000.1 M/MP/MCD
Vanne doseuse 2000.1 M/MP/MCD
Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dibujo de Repuestos
682.0010.1080A/06.SV
01.06 CPTNOT1
304/449

Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD ................................................................................................. 5

Abb. 01: Dosierwalze 2000.1 M/MP/MCD
Fig. 01: Flow control gate 2000.1 M/MP/MCD
Fig. 01: Vanne doseuse 2000.1 M/MP/MCD
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD ................................................................................... 3

Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD ................................................................................... 4
tipo.
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1080A/06.SV
Release 6: 25.09.2015
305/449
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD
30.360 Nicht dargestellt Not represented N` est pas dessine No esta represantado
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1080A/06.SV
Release 6: 25.09.2015
306/449
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1080A/06.SV
Release 6: 25.09.2015
307/449
01
Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 M/MP/ MCD
1)
5
1) Kassette, komplett Complete cassette Cassette, complet Cajita, completo
(10.110)
1)
5.10
1) Kassettenrahmen Cassette frame Cadre de cassettent Marco de cajita
(10.110.10)
1)
5.20
1) Klemmrahmen Clamping frame Cadre de serrage Marco de enclavar
(10.110.20)
1)
5.30
1) Abdeckblech Cover plate Tole de recouvrement Chapa recubridora
(10.110.30)
1)
5.50 *
1) Flachdichtung Flat gasket Joint plate Junta plana
(10.110.50) *
1)
5.60 *
1) Walzendichtung Roller seal Joint de tambour Junta de cilindro
(10.110.60) *
1)
5.90
1) Rundstab Round rоd Baguette ronde Barra redonda
(10.110.90)
10.140 Gelenklager Pivot bearing Articulation a rotule Cojinete de rotula
10.150 Federscheibe Spring washer Rondelle elastique Disco de resorte
10.170 Lochblech Perforated plate Tole perforee Chapa perforada
10.230 Passfeder Parallel key Chavette Chaveta
10.250 Dichtungsdeckel Seal cover Couvercle détancheite Tapa de

empaquetadura
10.340 Nabe Hub Moyeu Maza
Bague d'etancheite Anillo de abturaction para

20.10 * Wellendichtring Rotary shaft seal
d'arbre ejes
30.270 M/MP Adapter Adaptar Adapteur Adaptador
30.270 MCD Passfeder Parallel key Clavette parallele Chaveta
30.350 Richtungspfeil Direction arrow Flèche de direction Flecha de direccion
Single-head engineers
30.360 Schlüssel Cles des fins simples Llava de una boca
jaw wrench
40 Gewebe Special fabric Tissu Tejido
70 * Walze Roller Tambour Liston de carcasa, inferior

01.06 CPTNOT1
101 Stellantrieb Actuating drive Commande de reglage Accionamiento de regulador
682.0010.1080A/06.SV
Release 6: 25.09.2015
308/449
* = Verschleißteil / wear part / pièce d’ usure / pieza de desgaste
1)
= Pos.-Nr. temperaturabhängig 5… ab 180°C; 10.110.… bis 180°C / Pos. no. depending on
temperature 5… starting at 180°C; 10.110.... to 180°C / Numéro de position en fonction de la
température 5…. a partir de 180°C ; 10.110…. à 180°C / N° de pos. depende de la temperature
5.... desde 180°C; 10.110.... hasta 180°C
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1080A/06.SV
Release 6: 25.09.2015
309/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WALFUN = MP D1 D2 S1 S2 H1 TS1 R1
ANWEG =4 M3
~ M M
STEURE = POSIGAM +
PROBUS = --- INTERNAL
RUECKM = INCL.
L1 L2 B
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
POSIGAM/ 1
DESIGN OF MODUGAM 2
POWER UNIT ELEMENT 3
21 22 23
CLASS. OF CONTROL III = LOGIC CONTROL 4
5
MECH. CONTACTOR
6
6 5 4 3 2 1 P1
C
R CL
POWER SUPPLY 0 0
1 2 3 4
19V 23V
L OP
INT.
23V 19V
POSITIONER
U1 0
EXT.
U2 U3 L2 L3 Tr
1 2 3
R1 R2 R3 R4 RD S3 S4 D
+ - +
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 70 71 72
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 32
4...20mA
REMOTE CONTROL SIGNALS FEEDBACK SIGNALS ANALOG CONTROL
CUSTOMER
POWER SUPPLY
+ - - +
30 31 31 32 E
SET POINT ACTUAL
mA
VALUE (300Ω max)
BURDEN: 260Ω
F
10 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm FLOW CONTROL GATE MP DRIVE: MOT CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1080A/09.en Blatt 06
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 310/449
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WALFUN = MCD D1 D2 S1 S2 H1 TS1 R1

ANWEG =2 M3
~ M M
STEURE = MODUGAM +
PROBUS = --- INTERNAL
RUECKM = INCL.
L1 L2 B
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
POSIGAM/ 1
DESIGN OF MODUGAM 2
POWER UNIT ELEMENT 3
21 22 23
CLASS. OF CONTROL II = LOGIC CONTROL 4
5
SOLID STATE RELAY
6
6 5 4 3 2 1 P1
C
R CL
POWER SUPPLY 0 0
1 2 3 4
19V 23V
L OP
INT.
23V 19V
POSITIONER
U1 0
EXT.
U2 U3 L2 L3 Tr
1 2 3
R1 R2 R3 R4 RD
D
+ - +
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 70 71 72
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 31 32
4...20mA
REMOTE CONTROL SIGNALS FEEDBACK SIGNALS ANALOG CONTROL
CUSTOMER
POWER SUPPLY
+ - - +
30 31 31 32 E
SET POINT ACTUAL
mA
VALUE (300Ω max)
BURDEN: 260Ω
F
10 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm FLOW CONTROL GATE MCD DRIVE: MOT CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1080A/09.en Blatt 09
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 311/449
595.0012.1380A/00

L R L R L R
ANTRIEB: HAND O O O O O O
DRIVE: MANUAL
COMMANDE: MAIN
ACCIONADO: MANO
ANTRIEB: PNEUMATISCH
DRIVE: PNEUMATIC
COMMANDE: PNEUMATIQUE
ACCIONADA: NEUMATICO
L R L R L R
U U U U U U
POS. ANTRIEB / POS. DRIVE / POS. COMMANDE/ POS. ACCIONADA

L LINKS/LEFT/A GAUCHE/ SINISTRA
R RECHTS/ RIGHT/A DROITE/DESTRA
O OBEN/ABOVE/EN HAUT/ ARRIBA ANTRIEB: MOT
U UNTEN/BELOW/EN BAS/ABAJO DRIVE: MOT
COMMANDE: MOT
ACCIONADA: MOT
Claudius Peters
DOSIERWALZE
FLOW CONTROL GATE
BAUFORMBLATT:/SHEET OF CONSTRUCTION:
FICHE DE CONTRUCTION:/HOJA DE DISENO:
VANNE DOSEUSE
682.0022.0021A/05.SV
RODILLO DE DOSIFICACION Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
PAGINA DE
312/449
Claudius Peters
Fabric for
aeration elements
621.0009.0022A/13.en
313/449
Contents
1 General reference ................................................................................................................. 3
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 4
3 Polyester fabric...................................................................................................................... 5
4 Meta - and Para - Aramide fabric .......................................................................................... 6
5 Sealing compound ................................................................................................................ 7
5.1 Chemical characterization ..................................................................................................... 7
5.2 Characteristics....................................................................................................................... 7
6 Protecting the fabric during welding ...................................................................................... 7
7 Stretching the fabric liner ...................................................................................................... 8
List of figures
Fig. 7-1: Stretching unit for an aeroslide.................................................................................................... 8
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 2 of 8
314/449
1 General reference
Contact address:
Schanzenstraße 40
DE-21614 Buxtehude
Germany
Phone: +49 4161 706 0; Fax: +49 4161 706 270
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 3 of 8
315/449
2 Description
The fabric serves towards fluidising the conveyor material.
2.1 Designated use
The fabric types described in these assembly instructions may only be used for the assemblies outlined be-
low. They are only suitable for conveying non-hazardous dust/materials.
The fabric types described in these assembly instructions are only suitable for conveying dusts/materials that
are specified in the associated order specification from Claudius Peters.
mance and operating guarantees becoming null and void. Deliberate modifications to the fabric types will
release the manufacturer from all liability for any subsequent damage incurred by such modifications. The
risk shall be borne solely by the user.
As a general rule, intentional alternative use of the fabric shall require co-ordination with Claudius Peters.
These assembly instructions apply in connection with the following Claudius Peters products:
®
FLUIDCON Pipe complete Assembly no 362
Airlift Assembly no 382
Homogenizer Assembly no 612
Aeroslide type 2 / ADS- Pipe system Assembly no 621
Gravity separator Assembly no 638
Aeroslide shut-off gate Assembly no 643
Mobile loader Assembly no 652
Lump breaker Assembly no 653
Splitter / Diverter / Distributer / Two-way gate Assembly no 660
Aeroslide type 1 and 3 Assembly no 661
Flow control gate Assembly no 682
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 4 of 8
316/449
3 Polyester fabric
The aeration elements are regularly equipped with polyester fabric.
• smooth surface
• high temperature resistance up to 150 °C
• high tearing resistance in direction of warp
• it does not rot
595.0037.0007A/NN.
• The mounting holes for aeroslides type 2 (open aeroslides) must be produced using a hot mandrel. It is
sufficient to drill the mounting holes for the other ventilation elements.
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 5 of 8
317/449
4 Meta - and Para - Aramide fabric
Meta-Aramide fabric will be used for temperatures of up to 200 °C, and Para-Aramide fabric for temperatures
of up to 250 °C.
The air permeability corresponds to the one of the polyester fabric.
• smooth surface
• high temperature resistance
• high solidity
• it does not rot
• free of asbestos
595.0037.0007A/NN.
• The mounting holes for type 2 channels (open channels) must be produced using a hot mandrel. It is
sufficient to drill the mounting holes for the ventilation elements.
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 6 of 8
318/449
5 Sealing compound
A sealing compound which is also suitable for sealing of threads, flanges and surfaces of highpressure
plants, turbine housings, etc. is to be used.
5.1 Chemical characterization
The sealing compound consists of mineral oil, abiettic acid and chalk.
5.2 Characteristics
• ointment like
• heat and highpressure resistant
• non-drying
• poisonless
6 Protecting the fabric during welding

In the event of subsequent welding or burning of cut-outs in existing sheet metal bodies at the construction
site, e.g., installation of loose supports provided or subsequent installation of an observation hatch, the fabric
must be protected against spatter by carefully covering it with fireproof material.
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 7 of 8
319/449
7 Stretching the fabric liner
Example:
The fabric liner (B) is attached to an aeroslide (A) with the aid of a stretching device (C). See the following
illustration.
Fig. 7-1: Stretching unit for an aeroslide
621.0009.0022A/13.en
Release 13: 21.03.2011
Page 8 of 8
320/449
595.0012.1380A/00

o
k*m
SIZE
50 - 80
- 2*55 60
i

57
TOP OF FABRIC 150 3* 60 - 180 3*60 70
w
200 1* 80 75 230 97 60 65
250 3*100 - 300
h
s
300 2* 85 90 350
4*70
350 4*100 - 400 107 75 72 63
400 2*110 115 450 -
f d*e f 500 5*110 - 550
f1 630 4*115 680 7*73 84
110
800 6*105 850 130 - 10*68 85
85
1000 10*105 - 1050 10*78

LOCHBILD 625.0000.0021A/06.ED
HOLE PATTERN
321/449
595.0012.1380A/00

f d*e f
t=12
A1 d *e f h i k *m s w
SIZE
n1*
200 190 1 * 80 75 97 60 14 *M8 65 57
n2*
250 240 3 *100 -

300 290 2 * 85 90
4*70
350 340 4 *100 - 107 75 10 *M10 72 63
k* m
400 390 2 *110 115
500 490 5 *110 -
630 620 4 *115 7*73 84
110 130 - 10 *M12 85
800 790 6 *105 10*68 85
170
A1 OBERKANTE GEWEBE
TOP OF FABRIC
w
h
DESIGN WITH HEIGHT DIFFERENCE
ONLY FOR SIZE 200 - M8 TAP HOLES

KASSETTEN DOSIERWALZE
LOCHBILD EINLAUFSEITE 625.0000.0026A/06.ED
CASSETTE TYPE FLOW CONTROL GATE Seite/PAGE 1 von/OF 1
HOLE PATTERN INLET SIDE
322/449
323/449
324/449
325/449
326/449
327/449
328/449
329/449
330/449
331/449
332/449
333/449
334/449
335/449
336/449
337/449
338/449
339/449
340/449
341/449
342/449
343/449
344/449
345/449
346/449
347/449
348/449
349/449
350/449
351/449
instructions de mise en service,
stockage et entretien
instructions for start-up,

storage and maint tenance
anleitung für die inbetriebnahme,

lagerung und wartung
modèles / models / modelle :

CP-2, CP-4, AS18 - AS80,
CP1, CP2AS-P und BS100
TMS - 300 - CP - F / A / D rev. A
Gamme
Range
Reihe CP
352/449
SOMMAIRE / TABLE OF CONTENTS / INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
1. Sécurité ........................................................................................................................... Page 3
2. Montage .......................................................................................................................... Page 3
3. Commande manuelle et débrayage ................................................................. Page 3
4. Raccordement et test électriques ....................................................................... Page 3
5. Réglage des butées mécaniques et des contacts de fin de course .................. Page 4
6. Réglage du limiteur de couple ............................................................................. Page 5
7. Potentiomètre de recopie de position (option) .......................................... Page 5
8. Transmetteur de position type TAM (option) .............................................. Page 6
9. Entretien et stockage des servomoteurs ........................................................ Page 7
Schémas de câblage interne ........................................................................................ Page 24
Exemples de circuits de puissance ............................................................................. Page 24
Exemples de réalisation de coffrets de commande ................................ Page 25
Le réseau international L. BERNARD ................................................................ Page 26
1. Safety information ...................................................................................................... Page 9

2. Assembly .......................................................................................................................... Page 9
3. Handwheel operation and declutching .......................................................... Page 9
4. Electrical connections and preliminary tests ................................................ Page 9
5. Setting of mechanical stops and travel limit switches ........................... Page 10
6. Setting of torque limit switches .......................................................................... Page 11
7. Position feedback potentiometer (option) .................................................... Page 11
8. TAM position transmitter (option) ..................................................................... Page 12
9. Maintenance and storage instructions ........................................................... Page 13
Internal wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................................ Page 24
Examples of power supply circuits ............................................................................. Page 24
Control panel design examples .......................................................................... Page 25
L. BERNARD international network.................................................................... Page 26
1. Sicherheitsinformationen ........................................................................................ Seite 17

2. Montage ........................................................................................................................... Seite 17
3. Handradbetätigung und Auskuppeln .............................................................. Seite 17
4. Elektrische Anschlüsse und Prüfungen im Vorfeld ................................... Seite 17
5. Einstellung der mechanischen Anschläge und Wegbegrenzungsschalter ..... Seite 18
6. Einstellung der Drehmomentbegrenzungsschalter .................................. Seite 19
7. Potentiometer für Positionsmeldung (option) ............................................. Seite 19
8. TAM-Positionsmelder (option) ............................................................................. Seite 20
9. Wartungsanleitung und Hinweise zur Lagerung ...................................... Seite 21
Interne Stromlaufpläne ........................................................................................................................... Seite 24
Beispiele für Stromversorgungskreise ........................................................................ Seite 24
Beispiele für Schalttafelausführungen ............................................................. Seite 25
Internationales Netzwerk von L. BERNARD .................................................. Seite 26
353/449
1. SECURITE
Cet appareil répond aux normes de sécurité en vigueur. Toutefois,
seule une installation, une maintenance et une utilisation effectuées
par un personnel qualifié et formé permettront d'assurer un niveau
de sécurité adéquat.
ATTENTION
Pour les servomoteurs antidéflagrants, veuillez aussi lire
attentivement les instructions spécifiques TMS1132 avant de
procéder au montage et au démarrage.
Avant montage et démarrage, lire attentivement l'ensemble de ce
document.
2. MONTAGE
Le servomoteur doit être boulonné sur l’appareil à motoriser.
Les servomoteurs BERNARD peuvent fonctionner dans n’importe
quelle position. Cependant, les presse-étoupes ne devraient par être
orientés vers le haut (étanchéité) et le moteur de préférence pas placé
en position basse (condensation d'eau interne potentielle).
Note 1 : ne pas transporter les servomoteurs par le volant sous peine
d’endommager le couple roue et vis.
Note 2 : si le servomoteur a été fourni monté sur la vanne, les
réglages de base ont en principe été effectués ; se reporter alors aux
seuls § 3,4 et 9.
Note 3 : voir §.9 pour les précautions de stockage avant mise en route.
3. COMMANDE MANUELLE ET DEBRAYAGE

La commande manuelle ne nécessite aucun débrayage préalable à
son utilisation. Si le volant tourne, il est alors plein et exempt de par-
ties saillantes et ne présente aucun risque pour l'opérateur.
De plus, pour les servomoteurs à couple élevé, le dispositif de limiteur
d'effort assure une protection complémentaire.
4. RACCORDEMENT ET TESTS ÉLECTRIQUES

6LOHVHUYRPRWHXUHVWpTXLSpG
XQHFRPPDQGHW\SH,17(//,
Si le servomoteur est équipé d'une commande type MODUGAM,
,17(*5$/326,*$002'8*$00,1,*$0RX0,1,*5$/YHXLOOH]
veuillez vous reporter à la documentation spécifique.
YRXVUHSRUWHUDX[GRNXPHQWDWLRQVVSpFLILTXHV
Sinon, tous les fils électriques venant des différents éléments du ser-
vomoteur sont ramenés sur un bornier dont les bornes portent des
numéros correspondant aux schémas de câblage inclus dans ce doc-
ument.
Le contact de protection thermique du moteur et les deux contacts
du limiteur de couple doivent être intégrés dans votre logique de
commande (cf. exemples de câblage) afin de limiter les risques de
casse mécanique.
3
354/449
Une fois le câblage terminé, les points suivants sont à contrôler :
a) A partir des informations gravées sur la plaque d'identification du
servomoteur, vérifier que l'alimentation électrique utilisée est cor-
recte,
b) Vérifier que les presse-étoupe ont bien été resserrés après
câblage,
c) A l'aide de la commande manuelle, amener la vanne en position
médiane,
d) Actionner la commande électrique d'ouverture. Vérifier que le
sens de rotation du servomoteur est correct. Actionner manuelle-
ment le contact de fin de course OPEN (ouvert) ; le moteur doit
s'arrêter.
Vérifier de la même manière la commande électrique de ferme-
ture et le contact de fin de course CLOSED (fermé).
e) Actionner la commande électrique d'ouverture. Actionner
manuellement le contact du limiteur d'effort OPEN ; le moteur
doit s'arrêter. Vérifier de la même manière le contact du limiteur
d'effort CLOSED pendant une manoeuvre de fermeture.
En cas de problème sur un de ces tests, vérifier l'ensemble du cablâge.
Pour les servomoteurs d’un couple supérieur à 300 Nm, après avoir
vérifié le sens de rotation, il est préférable d’alimenter seulement le
courant de contrôle, sans alimenter le courant de puissance, afin de
contrôler le branchement en toute sécurité.
5. RÉGLAGE DES BUTÉES MECANIQUES ET DES CONTACTS

DE FIN DE COURSE
Description et fonction des butées mécaniques
Ce dispositif limite mécaniquement la course lors de la commande
manuelle de la vanne et de ce fait évite tout déréglage. Suivant les
cas, les butées sont localisées sur le servomoteur ou sur le réducteur
1/4 Tour.
Les servomoteurs sont réglés dans nos usines pour une rotation de
90°. Un réglage est possible grâce aux vis d’arrêt dans la limite de 2°
à chaque extrémité.
Description et fonction du bloc à cames et des contacts fin de course
Les cames actionnant les micro-contacts forment un ensemble
monobloc dont les éléments peuvent être réglés indépendamment les
uns des autres.
Les cames blanche et noire servent aux contacts fin de course. Les
autres cames sont pour des contacts additionnels optionnels (2 à 4
selon version).
Les cames se manoeuvrent de la façon suivante :
a) Introduire un petit tournevis dans la fente entourée d'une bague
de la même couleur que la came à déplacer,
b) Appuyer légèrement pour libérer la came,
c) Tourner indifféremment dans un sens ou dans l’autre pour amener
la came dans la position recherchée,
4
355/449
d) Relâcher la pression en s’assurant que la tête est remontée en
position d’origine, ce qui verrouille automatiquement la came.
Mode opératoire de réglage des butées mécaniques et du bloc à
cames :
a) Desserrer les deux butées mécaniques de 2 tours
b) Amener la vanne en position fermée. Si l'on arrive en butée
mécanique avant d'avoir atteint la fermeture complète de la
vanne, cela signifie que la tolérance de réglage de 2° maximum a
été dépassée ; ne pas tenter de passer outre à cette limite.
c) Régler la position de la came du contact de fin de course
CLOSED .
d) Revisser la butée jusqu’au contact et la desserrer d’un tour et
demi ; puis bloquer la vis de la butée avec le contre-écrou.
Respecter la même procédure pour l’ouverture.
Effectuer une fermeture et une ouverture complète avec la com-
mande électrique. Il est impératif que l'arrêt du moteur sur fin de
course électrique intervienne avant l'arrivée en butée mécanique.
6. RÉGLAGE DU LIMITEUR DE COUPLE

IMPORTANT : Les microrupteurs limiteurs de couple donnent un con-
tact à impulsion. En option, il est possible de mémoriser électrique-
ment l’indication du limiteur d’effort par un système de relais incor-
poré au servomoteur.
Les servomoteurs BERNARD sont réglés et vérifiés pour la valeur des
couples demandés à la commande. Un réajustement peut s’effectuer
si nécessaire en agissant sur les écrous qui compriment les ressorts du
limiteur de couple. Le couple préréglé peut-être augmenté ou diminué
en serrant ou desserrant les écrous. Nous consulter.
Dans le cas où des valeurs de couple précises n’ont pas été indiquées
à la commande, le jeu de ressorts livré est ajusté à la valeur du cou-
ple maximum que le servomoteur peut fournir (valeur indiquée dans
les tableaux techniques de nos catalogues).
7. POTENTIOMETRE DE RECOPIE DE POSITION (OPTION)

Le système de recopie de position est constitué d'un potentiomètre
entraîné par le bloc cames des fins de course.
Le 0% correspond à une vanne fermée. Le 100% à une vanne
ouverte.
Pour monter l'ensemble potentiomètre sur la platine du servomoteur,
emboîtez-le sans l'indicateur de position et vissez-le sur la colonette
de maintien. Revissez l'indicateur de position.
Le réglage du zéro du potentiomètre s'effectue à l'aide de la vis
repérée 0% position .
Mettre le servomoteur en position fermée.
La mesure de résistance s'effectuera entre les bornes 16 et 17.
5
356/449
Tout en maintenant manuellement en position la pignonnerie située
juste sous la plaque marquée 0% position , tourner la vis du poten-
tiomètre jusqu'à obtenir une valeur de résistance qui dépasse 0 Ohm
et augmente régulièrement puis tourner en sens inverse afin de
revenir à une valeur proche de 0 Ohm.
Mettre le servomoteur en position ouverte et noter la valeur de résis-
tance pour le 100%.
Revenir en position fermée et vérifier que la valeur du 0% est bien
répétable et proche de 0 Ohm.
Remarques : Si l'équipement possède 2 potentiomètres, chaque
potentiomètre est réglé indépendamment l'un de l'autre.
Inversion du signal
Pour changer le sens de variation du signal, croiser les fils du poten-
tiomètre au niveau du bornier du servomoteur (exemple : pour un
raccordement 16/17/18, inverser 16 et 18).
8. TRANSMETTEUR DE POSITION TYPE TAM (OPTION)

Le TAM transmet à distance une position angulaire. Le signal de sor-
tie est un courant variant de 0 à 20mA ou de 4 à 20mA, suivant une
loi linéaire en fonction de l'angle de rotation de l'axe d'entrée d'un
potentiomètre.
Raccordement électrique
Effectuer le raccordement électrique conformément au schéma fourni
avec le servomoteur. Voir aussi des exemples de branchement typ-
iques ci-dessous.
L'alimentation doit être comprise entre 12 et 32V en courant continu
redressé filtré ou stabilisé et avec une charge maxi admissible précisée
dans le tableau.
Alimentation Charge maxi

VOLT admissible Ohm
12 150
24 750
30 1050
Adaptation du signal au sens de rotation

Le transmetteur de position TAM qui équipe un servomoteur standard
délivre un signal qui augmente de la position fermée à la position
ouverte, le sens d'ouverture de l'organe entrainé correspondant au sens
antihoraire.
6
357/449
Pour que le signal diminue de la position fermée à la position ouverte
ou si l'organe entrainé ouvre dans le sens horaire, le signal peut être
inversé en déplaçant les cavaliers : sens direct 1-3 / 2-4 , sens inverse
1-2 / 3-4.
Réglages
Brancher un milliampèremètre avec ou sans charge pour lire le courant
de sortie.
- Le réglage doit toujours commencer par le 0/4mA.
- Amener le servomoteur dans la position qui doit correspondre au
signal 0/4mA (en standard c'est la fin de manoeuvre de l'organe
entrainé dans le sens horaire ou position fermée).
- Tout en maintenant manuellement en position la pignonnerie située
juste sous la plaque marquée 0% position , tourner la vis du poten-
tiomètre jusqu'à atteindre la plage où le courant à sa valeur minimale.
Chercher la zone où le signal augmente régulièrement puis tourner
en sens inverse afin de revenir à la valeur minimale précédemment
trouvée. Le potentiomètre est ainsi calé en début de piste.
- Régler précisément le 0/4 mA grâce à la vis du TAM marquée 0/4mA .
- Amener maintenant le servomoteur dans la position qui doit corre-
spondre au signal 20mA (en standard c'est la fin de manoeuvre de
l'organe entrainé dans le sens antihoraire ou position ouverte).
- Tourner la vis de réglage repérée 20mA pour lire exactement sur
le milliampèremètre 20mA.
- Revenir en position fermée et vérifier que la valeur du 0% est bien
répétable et proche de 0/4 mA.
9. ENTRETIEN ET STOCKAGE DES SERVOMOTEURS

Entretien
Si le servomoteur est utilisé en atmosphère particulièrement humide,
il est préférable de vérifier une fois par an si de la condensation ne
s’est pas produite à l’intérieur du boîtier comportant les parties élec-
triques. Pour empêcher cette condensation, les servomoteurs peuvent
être équipés en option d’une résistance de chauffage, ainsi que d’un
aérateur permettant une circulation de l’air à l’intérieur du boîtier.
Nos servomoteurs sont graissés pour 100.000 manoeuvres environ.
En cas de renouvellement de la graisse d’origine, utiliser une graisse
de qualité au moins équivalente (voir tableau ci-après).
NOTA : lors du renouvellement de la graisse, veiller à l’extraction
totale de la graisse à remplacer.
Caractéristiques générales des graisses (performances de la graisse et non
du servomoteur données pour des conditions de service normales) :
• Température de service : -30°C à +135°C.
• Pénétration ASTM à 25°C : 265 - 295
• Point de goutte : 180°C
7
358/449
TABLEAU D’ÉQUIVALENCE DES GRAISSES
(conditions de service normales)
TOTAL FINA ELF SHELL MOBIL ESSO
MULTIS COMPLEX EP2 ALVANIA EP2 MOBILUX EP2 BEACON EP2
Stockage
Un servomoteur est composé d’éléments électriques et d’une partie
mécanique lubrifiée à la graisse. Malgré l’étanchéité de cet ensemble,
les risques d’oxydation, de gommage et de grippage peuvent appa-
raître lors de la mise en service du servomoteur, si son stockage n’a
pas été correctement réalisé.
Servomoteur stocké en magasin
a) Les servomoteurs doivent être stockés sous abri, dans un endroit
propre et sec, et protégé des changements successifs de tempéra-
ture. Eviter le stockage à même le sol.
b) Pour les servomoteurs équipés de résistance de chauffage, ali-
menter celle-ci dans le cas de présence d’humidité (tension stan-
dard 230 Volts, sauf précision particulière à la commande).
c) Vérifier que les bouchons plastiques provisoires des entrées de
câble soient bien en place. S’assurer de la bonne étanchéité des
couvercles et des boîtiers renfermant les éléments électriques.
d) Dans le cas de vanne dont la levée de tige est importante, vérifier
que le capot de protection est bien monté sur le servomoteur.
Sinon, monter celui-ci avec une pâte à joint.
Servomoteur installé mais en attente de raccordement électrique
Si une longue attente est prévue entre le montage du servomoteur et
les travaux de raccordement électrique:
a) S’assurer de la bonne étanchéité des presses-étoupe et des
boîtiers électriques,
b) Recouvrir la motorisation d’un film plastique,
c) Pour les servomoteurs équipés de résistance de chauffage, alimenter
celle-ci dans le cas de présence d’humidité (tension standard 230
Volts, sauf précision particulière à la commande).
Stockage des servomoteurs équipés de composants électroniques
Le stockage de long durée de composants électroniques hors tension
peut entraîner des risques de mauvais fonctionnement. Il est donc
fortement déconseillé de le pratiquer.
Dans les cas contraire, il y a lieu de faire réviser en usine les cartes
électroniques avant mise en service.
Contrôle après stockage
a) Contrôler visuellement l’équipement électrique,
b) Actionner manuellement contacts, boutons, sélecteurs, ... pour en
vérifier le bon fonctionnement mécanique,
c) Procéder à quelques manoeuvres manuelles,
d) Vérifier la bonne consistance de la graisse,
e) Pour les servomoteurs équipés de graisseurs, faire un apport de
graisse neuve,
f) Procéder à la mise en service du servomoteur suivant les instruc-
tions jointes à chaque appareil.
8
359/449
1. SAFETY INFORMATION
This device complies to current applicable safety standards.
Installation, maintenance and use of this apparatus will have to be
done by skilled and trained staff only.
Please read carefully the whole document prior to mounting and
starting-up.
WARNING
For explosionproof actuators, please also read carefully the special
instructions TMS1132 prior to mounting and starting-up
2. ASSEMBLY
Actuator should be secured directly to the valve using proper bolts or
via a proper interface.
After assembly, the actuator can operate in any position. However,
cable glands should not be oriented upwards (loss of water tightness)
and the motor will preferably not be positioned at the bottom (poten-
tial internal condensation trap)
Note 1: do not handle the actuator by handwheel,when it could
thedamage
electrical
the gearworm.
power is supplied, it could damage the wormgear.
Note 2: if the actuator was delivered mounted on the valve, the basic
settings should have been done. In this case, refer to § 3,4 and 9 only.
Note 3: see §.9 for details on storage precaution prior to starting-up.
3. HANDWHEEL OPERATION AND DECLUTCHING

The handwheel is always available and does not require any declutch-
ing action prior to operation.
If the handwheel turns it does not have any protruding part (solid
design) and therefore does not present any risk of any kind for the
operator. Moreover, for the actuators with torque
the highest torque,
over 200 Nm,the
the
torque limit system brings an additional level of protection.
4. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND PRELIMINARY TESTS

If the actuator is equipped with INTELLI+, INTEGRAL, POSIGAM,
If the actuator
MODUGAM, is equipped
MINIGAM with MODUGAM
or MINIGRAL commands,
commands, please refer toplease
the
report to the specific documentation for
specific dokumentation for wiring details. wiring details.
Otherwise, all components of the actuator are wired to a common
terminal strip. Remove the cover and pass the cables through the
cable glands (M20). Refer to the wiring diagram for details on the ter-
minals numbering system.
Both torque and travel limit switches must be integrated into your
control system (see wiring examples) in order to prevent potential
damage to the actuator or valve.
The following points must be checked:
a) Make sure that power supply voltage is in accordance with the
9
360/449
data engraved on the actuator nameplate,
b) Check that all cable glands are correctly tightened,
c) Move the valve manually to an half-open position,
d) Operate an electrical opening and check that the motor rotates
in the right direction. Press manually on the OPEN travel limit
switch ; the motor should stop.
In the same way, check that the closing electrical command as
well as the CLOSED travel limit switch are working correctly,
e) Operate an electrical opening. Press manually on the OPEN
torque limit switch ; the motor should stop.
In the same way, operate an electrical closing check that the
CLOSED torque limit switch is working correctly,
If any misfunction was detected at this stage, please check the over-
all wiring.
For safer working conditions, we recommend that the power supply
now be switched off especially if the actuator output max. torque
exceeds 300 N.m.
5. SETTING OF MECHANICAL STOPS AND TRAVEL LIMIT

SWITCHES
Mechanical stops description and function:
These items avoid any over-travelling during handwheel operations.
The stops can be positioned either in
on the actuator itself or on the 1/4
inside the
Turn worm
reducing gearbox
worm if any.if any.
gearbox,
Actuators and gears are supplied and tested for a 90° operation. Fine
adjustment of the stop screws position is possible within a limit of ±
2° maximum.
Travel limit switches description and function:

The cams operating the limit switches are on a cylindrical block which
does not require any disassembly. Each cam can be set independent-
ly of the others. The white and black cams are for open and close
travel limits. The other ones are for optional
90° valves. additional
additional limit switches
limit switches (2 or
(2 or 4).
4 pices).
How to operate the cams:
a) Put a screwdriver in the slot of the button encircled by the same
color as the cam to be set,
b) Press lightly to disengage the cam of locked position,
c) By turning the screwdriver rotate the cam to the position in which
it can trip the limit switch,
d) Remove screwdriver and ensure that the button has come back
to its original position, thus locking the cam in chosen place.
Procedure of mechanical stops and travel limit switches setting:

a) Loosen stop screws by 2 turns
b) Manually drive the valve to the closed position. If mechanical
stops are reached before the valve closing is completed, it means
that the 2° maximum adjustment tolerance has been exceeded ;
10
361/449
do not try to go beyond this limit.
c) Set the cam of the CLOSED travel limit switch.
d) Turn stop screws clockwise to the mechanical contact, reloosen
1.5 turn, and secure by lock nut.
Proceed in the same way in open position.
Perform complete electrical valve opening and closing operations. It is
mandatory that the motor stops on the travel limit switch and not on
the mechanical stop (check available extra travel to the stop with
handwheel).
6. SETTING OF TORQUE LIMIT SWITCHES

IMPORTANT : the torque limit switch design of BERNARD actuators
gives a short duration contact only. On request, relays holding this
contact maintained can be fitted into the actuator.
Actuators are set and tested in accordance with the torque stated on
orders. If no torque is specified, the actuator is supplied with torque
springs set to the maximum output (refer to our catalogue technical
datasheets).
If necessary, this torque setting can be readjusted by rotating the nuts
which compress the torque springs. So the torque can be increased or
decreased by tightening or loosening the nuts. Please consult us.
7. POSITION FEEDBACK POTENTIOMETER (OPTION)

The potentiometer used for actuator signal feedback is driven by the
travel cam block system.
The potentiometer has no mechanical stop and has a non-resistive
area (dead zone) at both the beginning and end of track.
0% position corresponds to a closed valve. 100% to an open valve.
To mount the potentiometer device on the switch plate, clip it with-
out the position indicator on the camblock and screw it on the sup-
port column. Screw the position indicator back.
Setting of potentiometer zero is achieved thanks to the 0% pos-
tion screw.
Drive the actuator to the closed position.
Resistance value is measured between terminals 16 and 17.
Hold the pinion located just under the plate with the 0% position
marking while driving the potentiometer screw. Adjust the poten-
tiometer so that the resistance value exceeds 0 Ohm and regularly
increases then turn backwards to reach a value as close to 0 Ohm as
possible.
Drive the actuator to the open position and write down the resistance
value corresponding to the 100% position.
Come back to the closed position and check that, for the 0% posi-
tion, the resistance shows a close to zero repeatable value.
11
362/449
Note : If actuator is equipped with 2 potentiometers, each poten-
tiometer is set independently of the other.
Signal inversion:
To inverse the signal variation direction, invert potentiometer wires
on the actuator terminal board (e.g. for a connection on 16/17/18,
invert 16 and 18).
8. TAM POSITION TRANSMITTER (OPTION)

The TAM transmitter delivers a 0/4 to 20 mA signal linearly propor-
tional to the angular position of the valve.
Electric connections
Refer to the wiring diagram supplied with the actuator. See also some
typical wiring examples below.
FIltered or stabilised power supply should be provided within the 12
to 32 VDC range.
Maximum admissible ohmic load values are given in the table :
Energy Supply Max. admissible

DC (VOLT) load Ohm
12 150
24 750
30 1050
Signal direction inversion

The TAM transmitter, when supplied with a standard actuator, pro-
vides a signal that rise from close position to open position, the stan-
dard opening direction being counter-clockwise.
If an opposite signal variation is required, simply move 2 jumpers on
the board near the potentiometer.
Direct signal : jumpers on 1-3 and 2-4
Reversed signal : jumpers on 1-2 and 3-4
Settings
Connect a milliampermeter at the place of burden.
- Always start by adjusting the 0/4mA.
- Drive actuator to the position corresponding to the 0/4 mA (closed
in standard),
- Hold the pinion located just under the plate with the 0% position
marking while driving the potentiometer screw. Adjust the poten-
12
363/449
tiometer so that the output current reaches a minimum value. Turn
backwards until the current value regularly increases then turn back-
wards again and stop as soon as the minimum value determined here
above has been reached.
The potentiometer is then positioned at the very beginning of its
track.
- Then, use the TAM adjustment screw marked as 0/4mA to adjust
the current to a value as close to the 0/4 mA as possible.
- Drive actuator to the position corresponding to the 20 mA (open in
standard),
- Turn the screw marked 20mA in order to read exactly 20 mA on
the milliampermeter.
- Come back to the closed position and check that, for the 0% posi-
tion, the signal current shows a close to 0/4 mA and repeatable
value.
9. MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Maintenance
If actuators is correctly mounted and sealed, no special maintenance
is required. Check once a year function of motor and make sure that
switch compartment is condensation free. If environment is humid,
we recommend installation of an anti-condensation heater resistance
and/or breathers, thus protecting electric parts from alteration.
Actuators are lubricated with grease for about 100.000 operations. If
the grease requires to be renewed, use one of the products listed
hereafter.
NOTE : When renewing the grease, first remove the integrality of the
old one.
General characteristics of lubricant ; grease specifications only (not
actuator) given for standard duty conditions :
• Grease duty temperature : -30°C to +135°C,
• Penetration ASTM at +25°C : 265/295,
• Drop point : +180°C.
EQUIVALENT GREASE TABLE

(normal conditions)

Storage
The actuators includes electric equipment as well as grease lubricated
gear stages. In spite of the weatherproof enclosure, oxydising, jam-
ming and other alterations are possible if actuator is not correctly
stored.
13
364/449
Actuators stored in a stock room
a) The actuators should be stored under a shelter, in a clean and dry
place and protected from wide temperature variations. Avoid
placing the actuators directly on the floor.
b) For actuators equipped with an heating resistance, it is recom-
mended to connect and power supply it especially if the storage
area is humid (standard 230 VAC, unless other specification).
c) Check that the temporary sealing plugs of the cable entries are
well in place. Make sure that the covers and the boxes are well
closed to ensure weatherproof sealing.
d) In the case of a valve with rising stem having a long stroke, verify
that the protection tube is well mounted on the actuator. If not,
fix it with sealing paste.
Actuators installed but waiting for electrical connection
If a long period of time is expected between the actuator mounting
and the electrical wiring works :
a) Visually check the tightness of electrical box cover and cable
glands.
b) Cover the device with a plastic protective film.
c) For actuators equipped with an heating resistance, it is recom-
mended to connect and power supply it especially if the storage
area is humid (standard 230 VAC, unless other specification).
Storage of actuators equipped with electronic components:
Long term storage of electronic components which are not in service
increases the malfunction risk. This practice is therefore highly unad-
visable.
If a long term storage is absolutely necessary, we strongly recom-
mend a revision of the electronic boards in our factory before actua-
tor usage.
Control after storage:
a) Visually check the electric equipment,
b) Operate manually the microswitches, buttons, selectors, etc., to
insure the correct mechanical function,
c) Operate apparatus manually,
d) Verify the correct grease consistency,
e) For actuators equipped with grease nipple, remember to com-
plete with some fresh grease.
14
365/449
1. SICHERHEITSINFORMATIONEN
Das Gerät erfüllt die geltenden Sicherheitsstandards.
Die Installation, Wartung und Verwendung dieses Geräts darf nur
durch qualifiziertes und geschultes Personal erfolgen.
WARNUNG
Antrieben
Lesen Sie bei Servomotoren für den Einsatz in explosionsge-
fährdeten Bereichen vor der Montage und Inbetriebnahme die
besonderen Hinweise TMS1132 sorgfältig durch.
Lesen Sie sich vor der Montage und Inbetriebnahme das gesamte
Dokument sorgfältig durch.
2. MONTAGE
Der Servomotor
Antrieb muss mithilfe von geeigneten Schrauben oder einem
geeigneten Zwischenstück direkt an amder
Ventil befestigt
Armatur werden.
befestigt werden.
Nach der Montage kann der Servomotor
Antrieb beliebig ausgerichtet werden. Die
Kabelverschraubungen dürfen jedoch nicht nach oben weisen (Verlust der
Wasserdichtigkeit), und der Motor sollte nicht am tiefsten Punkt platziert
werden (mögliche Ansammlung von internem Kondenswasser).
Anmerkung 1: Betätigen Sie den Antrieb
Servomotor
unternicht per Handrad,
Spannung da
nicht mit
dies
demden Antriebdabeschädigen
Handrad, könnte.beschädigen könnte.
dies das Getriebe
Anmerkung 2: Wenn der Servomotor bereits
Antrieb bereits aufauf
derdem Ventil montiert
Armatur
geliefert wurde, sind die Grundeinstellungen bereits erfolgt.
Beachten Sie in diesem Fall ausschließlich die Absätze 3, 4 und 9.
Anmerkung 3: Details zu Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bei der Lagerung vor
der Inbetriebnahme finden Sie in Absatz 9.
3. HANDRADBETÄTIGUNG UND AUSKUPPELN

Es kommt im elektrischen Betrieb zu keiner Drehung des Handrades.
Auch wenn es sich dreht, besitzt das massive Handrad keine vorste-
henden Teile, sodass davon keine Gefahr für den Bediener ausgeht.
Für die Servomotoren
Antriebe mitmit dem höchsten
Drehmomenten abDrehmoment
200Nm bietet das
Drehmoment-Begrenzungssystem zusätzliche Sicherheit.
4. ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE UND PRÜFUNGEN IM VORFELD

Wenn der Antrieb mit INTELLI+, INTEGRAL, POSIGAM, MODUGAM,
Wenn der Servomotor
MINIGAM- mit MODUGAM- ausgestattet
oder MINIGRAL-Steuerungen Steuerung ausgestattet
ist, beachtenist,
beachten Sie die spezifische Dokumentation zum Stromlaufplan.
Sie bitte die spezifische Dokumentation zum Stromlaufplan.
Andernfalls sind alle Komponenten des Servomotors an eine gemein-
same Klemmleiste angeschlossen. Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab,
und führen Sie die Kabel durch die Kabelverschraubungen (M20).
%HDFKWHQ6LHLP6WURPODXISODQGLH1XPPHULHUXQJGHU.OHPPHQ
Beachten Sie den Stromlaufplan für Details zur Nummerierung der
Klemmen.
Sowohl die Drehmomentbegrenzungsschalter als auch die
Wegbegrenzungsschalter müssen in das Steuersystem integriert wer-
den (siehe Beispiel-Stromlaufpläne), um möglichen Schäden am
Servomotor
Antrieb oderoder Ventil vorzubeugen.
der Armatur vorzubeugen.
17
366/449
Prüfen Sie Folgendes:
a) Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Versorgungsspannung den Angaben
auf dem Typenschild des Servomotors
Antriebs entspricht.
b) Prüfen Sie, dass alle Kabelverschraubungen ordnungsgemäß fest-
gezogen sind.
c) Bringen Sie das Ventil von Hand in eine halbgeöffnete Position.
d) Führen Sie eine elektrische Öffnung aus, und prüfen Sie, dass der
Motor sich in die richtige Richtung dreht. Drücken Sie den
Wegbegrenzungsschalter “OPEN”; der Motor muss stoppen.
Prüfen Sie mit demselben Verfahren, dass die elektrische
Schließung und der Wegbegrenzungsschalter “CLOSED” ord-
nungsgemäß arbeiten.
e) Führen Sie eine elektrische Öffnung aus. Drücken Sie den
Drehmomentbegrenzungsschalter “OPEN”; der Motor muss stop-
pen.
Prüfen Sie mit demselben Verfahren, dass die elektrische
Schließung und der Drehmomentbegrenzungsschalter “CLOSED”
ordnungsgemäß arbeiten.
Wenn dabei Fehlfunktionen auftreten, prüfen Sie die Verkabelung.
Um einen sicheren Betrieb zu gewährleisten wird empfohlen, die
Stromversorgung zu diesem Zeitpunkt zu unterbrechen, insbesondere
wenn das maximale Drehmoment des Servomotors
Antriebs 300 Nm über-
schreitet.
5. EINSTELLUNG DER MECHANISCHEN ANSCHLÄGE UND

WEGBEGRENZUNGSSCHALTER
Beschreibung und Funktion der mechanischen Anschläge:
Diese Elemente verhindern eine Überschreitung des Wegs bei
Handradbetrieb. Die Anschläge können entweder im auf dem
Antriebs-
gehäuse
Servomotor selbst oder, falls vorhanden, aufim dem 1/4-Umdrehungs-
Untersetzungs-
Schneckengetriebe platziert werden.
Die Servomotoren
Antriebe und Getriebe sind für den 90°-Betrieb vorgesehen
und geprüft. Die Feineinstellung der Position der Anschlagschrauben
ist für maximal ± 2° möglich.
Beschreibung und Funktion der Wegbegrenzungsschalter:
Die Nocken, die die Wegbegrenzungsschalter aktivieren, befinden sich
auf einem zylindrischen Block, der nicht zerlegt werden muss. Jede
Nocke kann unabhängig von den anderen eingestellt werden. Die
weißen und schwarzen Nocken sind zum Öffnen und Schließen von
Wegbegrenzungen
90°- Armaturen vorgesehen. Die anderen Nocken sind für optionale
zusätzliche
zusätzliche Wegbegrenzungsschalter
potenzialfreie vorgesehen
Wegschalter vorgesehen (24oder
(2 oder 4).
Stück).
Betätigung der Nocken:
a) Führen Sie einen Schraubenzieher in den Schlitz des Knopfes mit
derselben Farbe wie die einzustellende Nocke ein.
b) Üben Sie leichten Druck aus, um die Nocke aus der gesperrten
Position zu lösen.
18
367/449
c) Drehen Sie mit dem Schraubenzieher die Nocke in die Position,
die eine Betätigung des Wegbegrenzungsschalters ermöglicht.
d) Ziehen Sie den Schraubenzieher heraus, und stellen Sie sicher,
dass der Knopf in die Ausgangsposition zurückkehrt, wodurch die
Nocke an der gewählten Position fixiert wird.
Verfahren zur Einstellung der mechanischen Anschläge und
Wegbegrenzungsschalter:
a) Lösen Sie die Anschlagschrauben um 2 Umdrehungen.
b) Bringen Sie diedasArmatur
Ventil von Hand in die geschlossene Position.
Wenn bei Antrieben
Geräten die mechanischen Anschläge erreicht werden,
bevor die
dasArmatur
Ventil vollständig geschlossen ist, wurde die maximale
Einstelltoleranz von 2° überschritten; versuchen Sie nicht, dieses
Limit zu überschreiten.
c) Stellen Sie die Nocke des Wegbegrenzungsschalters “CLOSED” ein.
d) Drehen Sie die Anschlagschrauben im Uhrzeigersinn in Richtung
des mechanischen Kontakts, lösen Sie sie um 1,5 Umdrehungen,
und fixieren Sie sie mit einer Gegenmutter.
Führen Sie dasselbe Verfahren in der offenen Position aus.
Führen Sie eine vollständig elektrische Öffnung und Schließung der
des Ar-
Ventils aus. Der Motor muss am Wegbegrenzungsschalter und nicht
matur durch.
an den mechanischen Anschlägen stoppen (prüfen Sie den verfüg-
baren zusätzlichen Weg bis zum Anschlag mit dem Handrad).
6. EINSTELLUNG DER DREHMOMENTBEGRENZUNGS-

SCHALTER
WICHTIG: Die Drehmomentbegrenzungsschalter der BERNARD
Servomotoren
Antriebe sind nur auf eine kurze Kontaktdauer ausgelegt. Auf
Anfrage können Servomotoren
Antriebe mit einem Relais ausgestattet werden,
das den Kontakt aufrecht erhält.
Die Servomotoren
Antriebe werden gemäß den bei der Bestellung angegebe-
nen Drehmomenten eingestellt und geprüft. Wenn kein Drehmoment
angegeben wird, werden die Servomotoren
Antriebe mit auf die maximale
Leistung eingestellten Drehmomentfedern geliefert (beachten Sie die
technischen Datenblätter in unserem Katalog).
Bei Bedarf kann diese Drehmomenteinstellung durch Drehung der
Schrauben, die die Drehmomentfedern zusammendrücken,
angepasst werden. Das Drehmoment kann erhöht oder verringert
werden, indem die Schrauben angezogen oder gelöst werden.
Weitere Informationen auf Anfrage.
7. POTENTIOMETER FÜR POSITIONSMELDUNG (OPTION)

Das Potentiometer für die Signalrückmeldungen des Servomotors
Antriebs
wird vom Wegbegrenzungsnockensystem gesteuert.
Das Potentiometer verfügt über keinen mechanischen Anschlag und
besitzt einen widerstandsfreien Bereich (Totzone) am Anfang und
Ende des Weges.
19
368/449
Die 0 %-Position entspricht einer
einemgeschlossenen
geschlossenen Ventil. Die 100
Armatur.Die %-
100%-
Position entspricht einem geöffneten Armatur.
einer geöffneten Ventil.
Um das Potentiometer auf der Schaltplatte zu montieren, klemmen
Sie es ohne den Positionsanzeiger auf dem Nockenblock, und
schrauben Sie es auf die Halterungssäule. Schrauben Sie danach den
Positionsanzeiger wieder auf.
Die Nulleinstellung des Potentiometers erfolgt mit der Schraube für
die 0 %-Position.
Bringen Sie den Servomotor
Antrieb in die geschlossene Position.
Der Widerstandswert wird zwischen den Klemmen 16 und 17
gemessen.
Halten Sie den Zapfen so, dass sich die Markierung “0% position”
direkt unter der Platte befindet, während Sie die
Potentiometerschraube drehen. Stellen Sie das Potentiometer so ein,
dass der Widerstandswert 0 Ohm übersteigt und ordnungsgemäß
zunimmt, und drehen Sie danach die Schraube zurück, um einen
Wert möglichst nahe an 0 Ohm zu erzielen.
Antrieb in die offene Position, und notieren Sie
sich den Widerstandswert für die 100 %-Position.
Antrieb wieder in die geschlossene Position und
prüfen Sie, dass der Widerstand für die 0 %-Position wiederholbar
einen Wert nahe an null ergibt.
Anmerkung: Wenn der Servomotor
Antrieb mit 2 Potentiometern ausgestattet ist,
muss jedes Potentiometer unabhängig vom anderen eingestellt werden.
Signalumkehr:
Um die Änderungsrichtung des Signals umzukehren, vertauschen Sie die
Potentiometerkabel auf der Klemmleiste des Servomotors
Antriebs (vertauschen
Sie z.B. bei einem Anschluss an 16/17/18 die Klemmen 16 und 18).
8. “TAM”-POSITIONSMELDER (OPTION)
Der TAM-Positionsmelder gibt ein Signal von 0/4 bis 20 mA linear
proportional zur Winkelposition der
des Armatur
Ventils aus.
aus.
Elektrische Anschlüsse
Beachten Sie den mit dem Servomotor
Antrieb gelieferten Stromlaufplan.
Beachten Sie ebenfalls die nachstehenden Verkabelungsbeispiele.
Es muss eine gefilterte oder stabilisierte Stromversorgung im Bereich
von 12 bis 32 V Gleichstrom bereitgestellt werden.
Die maximal zulässigen Widerstandswerte in Ohm entnehmen Sie
bitte der Tabelle:
Gleichstrom- Maximal zulässiger

versorgung (VOLT) Lastwiderstand (OHM)
12 150
24 750
30 1050
20
369/449
Signalrichtungsumkehr
Der TAM-Positionsmelder für Standard-Servomotoren
Standard-Antriebe gibt ein Signal
aus, das von der geschlossenen Position ausgehend zur offenen
Position hin zunimmt. Die Standard-Öffnungsrichtung ist gegen den
Uhrzeigersinn.
Wenn eine umgekehrte Signalveränderung erforderlich ist, ver-
schieben Sie einfach auf der Platte die 2 Jumper neben dem
Potentiometer.
Direktes Signal : Jumpers auf 1-3 und 2-4
Umkehrsignal : Jumpers auf 1-2 und 3-4
Einstellungen
Schließen Sie ein Milliamperemeter an die Lastposition an.
- Beginnen Sie stets mit der Einstellung des 0/4 mA-Werts.
- Bringen Sie den Servomotor
Antrieb in die Position, die dem 0/4 mA-Wert
entspricht (standardmäßig geschlossen).
- Halten Sie den Zapfen so, dass sich die Markierung “0% position”
direkt unter der Platte befindet, während Sie die
Potentiometerschraube drehen. Stellen Sie das Potentiometer auf
einen Minimalwert für den Ausgangsstrom ein. Drehen Sie die
Schraube so, dass der Stromwert zunimmt, und drehen Sie sie in
Rückwärtsrichtung, bis der oben festgelegte Mindestwert erreicht
wurde.
Das Potentiometer wird am Anfang des Weges platziert.
- Verwenden Sie anschließend die TAM-Einstellschraube mit der
Markierung “0/4mA”, um den Strom auf einen Wert einzustellen, der
so nahe bei 0/4 mA wie möglich liegt.
Antrieb in die Position, die dem 20 mA-Wert
entspricht (standardmäßig geöffnet).
- Drehen Sie die Schraube mit der Markierung “20mA”, bis exakt 20
mA auf dem Milliamperemeter angezeigt werden.
Antrieb wieder in die geschlossene Position und
prüfen Sie, dass der Signalstrom wiederholbar einen Wert nahe an
0/4 mA ergibt.
9. WARTUNGSANLEITUNG UND HINWEISE ZUR LAGERUNG

Wartung
Wenn die Servomotoren
Antriebe ordnungsgemäß montiert und gedichtet
sind, ist keine besondere Wartung erforderlich. Prüfen Sie einmal
jährlich die Funktion des Motors, und stellen Sie sicher, dass sich im
21
370/449
Schaltgehäuse keine Kondensationsfeuchtigkeit gebildet hat. Für
feuchte Umgebungen wird die Installation eines Anti-
Kondensationsheizwiderstands und/oder Entlüftern empfohlen, um
die elektrischen Teile vor Beschädigungen zu schützen.
Die Servomotoren
Antriebe sind für ca. 100.000 Aktivierungen geschmiert.
Wenn das Schmierfett erneuert werden muss, verwenden Sie eines
der nachfolgend aufgeführten Produkte.
ANMERKUNG: Wenn Sie das Schmierfett erneuern, entfernen Sie

zunächst das vorhandene Fett vollständig.
Allgemeine Schmierstoffmerkmale; die Schmierfettspezifikationen
(nicht für Servomotoren)
Antriebe) gelten für den Betrieb unter Normallast:
• Schmierfett-Betriebstemperatur: -30 °C bis +135 °C
• ASTM-Penetration bei +25 °C: 265/295,
• Tropfpunkt: +180 °C.
SCHMIERSTOFF-ÄQUIVALENZTABELLE
(normale Bedingungen)
Lagerung
Die Servomotoren
Antriebe umfassen elektrische Komponenten sowie
fettgeschmierte Getriebestufen. Trotz des wetterfesten Gehäuses
kann es zu Oxidierung, Festgehen oder anderen Schäden kommen,
wenn der Servomotor
Antrieb nicht ordnungsgemäß gelagert wird.
Antrieben
Lagerung von Servomotoren in Lagerräumen
a) Die Servomotoren
Antriebe sollten an einem überdachten, sauberen und
trockenen Ort gelagert werden und sind vor starken
Temperaturschwankungen zu schützen. Vermeiden Sie es, die
Servomotoren
Antriebe direkt auf dem Boden zu platzieren.
b) Für Servomotoren
Antriebe mit Heizwiderstand wird empfohlen, die
Stromversorgung anzuschließen und herzustellen. Dies gilt ins-
besondere, wenn der Lagerbereich feucht ist (Standardmäßig 230
V Wechselstrom,
230V 50Hz sofern nicht anders angegeben).
c) Prüfen Sie, dass die Dichtkappen an den Kabeleingängen ord-
nungsgemäß montiert sind. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die
Abdeckungen und die Kästen ordnungsgemäß geschlossen sind,
um die wetterfeste Dichtung zu gewährleisten.
d) Prüfen Sie bei Ventilen mit aufsteigendem Schaft und langem
steigender Spindel
Hub dass die Schutzröhre ordnungsgemäß auf dem Servomotor Antrieb
montiert ist. Falls nicht, fixieren Sie sie mit Dichtpaste.
Antriebe
Installierte Servomotoren ohne elektrische Anschlüsse
Wenn zwischen der Montage der Servomotoren
Antriebe und der elektrischen
Verkabelung längere Zeit vergeht:
a) Prüfen Sie optisch den festen Sitz der Abdeckung des Kastens für
die elektrischen Anschlüsse und der Kabelverschraubungen.
b) Decken Sie das Gerät mit einer Schutzfolie aus Kunststoff ab.
22
371/449
c) Für Servomotoren
Antriebe mit Heizwiderstand wird empfohlen, die
Stromversorgung anzuschließen und herzustellen. Dies gilt ins-
besondere, wenn der Lagerbereich feucht ist (Standardmäßig 230
V Wechselstrom,
230V 50Hz sofern nicht anders angegeben).
Antrieben
Lagerung von Servomotoren, die mit elektronischen Komponenten
ausgestattet sind:
Die langfristige Lagerung von außer Betrieb befindlichen elektronis--
chen Komponenten erhöht das Risiko von Fehlfunktionen. Von einem
schen
derartigen Vorgehen wird daher abgeraten.
Wenn eine langfristige Lagerung sich nicht vermeiden lässt, wird drin-
gend empfohlen, die elektronischen Komponenten vor der
Inbetriebnahme der Servomotoren
Antriebe in unserem Werk überprüfen zu
lassen.
Überprüfung nach der Lagerung:
a) Unterziehen Sie die elektrischen Komponenten einer elektrischen
Prüfung.
b) Betätigen Sie die Mikroschalter, Knöpfe, Wählschalter usw. von
Hand, um die ordnungsgemäße mechanische Funktion
sicherzustellen.
c) Aktivieren Sie das Gerät von Hand.
d) Überprüfen Sie die Konsistenz des Schmierfetts.
e) Denken Sie bei Servomotoren
Antrieben mit Schmiernippeln daran, frisches
Schmierfett nachzufüllen.
23
372/449
SCHÉMAS CABLAGE INTERNE - INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAMS - INTERNE STROMLAUFPLÄNE
EXEMPLES DE CIRCUITS DE PUISSANCE - EXAMPLES OF POWER SUPPLY WIRING - BEISPIELE FÜR STROMVERSORGUNGSKREISE
3 PHASES / DREI PHASEN 1 PHASE / EINE PHASE EEx e d

Connection / Anschluß
version non pré-câblée (*) / not pre-wired version / nicht gültig für vorverdrahte Versionen (*)
Légende : C1 = contacteur ouverture ; C2 = contacteur fermeture
Legend : C1 = opening contact; C2 = closing contact
Legende : C1 = Öffnungsschaltschütz; C2 = Schließungsschaltschütz
(*) pour les modèles OA pré-câblés, voir exemples de réalisation de coffret de commande page suivante
(*) for pre-wired OA models, see examples of control panel design on next page
(*) für vorverdrahte einphasige OA-Modelle siehe Beispiel für Steuerungsausführung auf der nächsten Seite
24
373/449
25
374/449
At your service around the world
AUSTRALIA FINLAND MIDDLE-EAST SPAIN
TRANSMARK - FCX OY SOFFCO AB BERNARD MIDDLE-EAST BERNARD SERVOMOTORES
ROWVILLE, VICTORIA ESPOO DUBAI - U.A.E. MADRID
Tel.:+ 61 3 97 65 61 11 Tel.:+358 0 207 420 740 Tel.:+971 4 39 80 726 Tel.:+34 91 30 41 139
Fax:+ 61 3 97 65 61 65 Fax:+358 0 207 420 759 Fax:+971 4 39 80 726 Fax:+34 91 32 73 442
fcx@fcxaustralia.com.au info@soffco.fi bernact@emirates.net.ae bernardservo@wanadoo.es
AUSTRIA GERMANY MOROCCO SOUTH AFRICA

IPU ING PAUL UNGER Bernard
DEUFRA Controls
GmbH Deufra GmbH AQUATEL sarl A-Q-RATE AUTOMATION CC
WIEN TROISDORF CASABLANCA BERTSHAM
Tel.:+43 1 602 41 49 Tel.:+49 22 41 98 340 Tel.:+212 22 66 55 71 Tel.:+27 11 432 58 31
Fax:+43 1 603 29 43 Fax:+49 22 41 98 34 44 Fax:+212 22 66 55 74 Fax:+27 11 432 41 04
hammermueller@IPU.co.at bernard@deufra.de aquatel@wanadoo.net.ma aqr@wol.co.za
BELGIUM HUNGARY NETHERLANDS SWEDEN

BERNARD BENELUX SA APAGYI TRADEIMPEX KFT BERNARD BENELUX NV G. FAGERBERG AB
BRUXELLES BUDAPEST AN ZWAAG GOETEBORG
Tel.:+32 (0)2 343 41 22 Tel.:+36 1 223 1958 Tel.:+31 (0)229-298083 Tel.:+46 31 69 37 00
Fax:+32 (0)2 347 28 43 Fax:+36 1 273 0680 Fax:+31 (0)229-298089 Fax:+46 31 69 38 00
christian.baert@bernard-benelux.com bela.apagyi@mail.tvnet.hu bernard.benelux@12move.nl peter.fredriksson@fagerberg.se
BRAZIL INDIA NORWAY SWITZERLAND

JCN CHEMTROLS LTD FAGERBERG NORGE a.s MATOKEM AG
SAO PAULO MUMBAI GRESSVIK ALLSCHWIL
Tel.:+55 11 39 02 26 00 Tel.:+91 22 2857 9992 Tel.:+47 69 35 55 30 Tel.:+41 61 483 15 40
Fax:+55 11 39 02 40 18 Fax:+91 22 2857 9995 Fax:+47 69 35 55 31 Fax:+41 61 483 15 42
jcn@jcn.com.br chemtrolssam@vol.net.in jer@fagerberg.no info@matokem.ag
CHINA IRAN POLAND THAILAND

BERNARD BEIJING ASIA INSTRUMENTS Co. Ltd. MARCO BERNARD SOUTH-EAST ASIA
PEKIN TEHRAN WARSAW BANGKOK
Tel.:+86 10 8739 77 27 Tel.:+98 21 88 76 60 24 Tel.:+48 22 864 55 43 Tel.:+66 2 640 82 64
Fax:+86 10 8739 77 04 Fax:+98 21 88 74 29 40 Fax:+48 22 864 94 22 Fax:+66 2 640 82 60
bbce@bernard-china.com info@asiainstrumentsltd.com matzanke@pol.pl pinvidic@ksc7.th.com
CZECH REPUBLIC ITALY PORTUGAL UNITED ARABS EMIRATES

FLUIDTECHNIK BOHEMIA s.r.o. BERNARD SERVOMOTORI SRL PINHOL, GOMES & GOMES LDA. EMIRATES HOLDINGS
BRNO RHO /MILANO CARNAXIDE ABU DHABI
Tel.:+420 548 213 233-5 Tel.:+39 02 931 85 233 Tel.:+351 21 425 68 50 Tel.:+97 12 644 73 73
Fax:+420 548 213 238 Fax:+39 02 931 85 260 Fax:+351 21 425 68 59 Fax:+97 12 644 40 66
brno@fluidbohemia.cz info.servomotori@bernard-italia.com import.export@pinhol.com.pt emhold@emirates.net.ae
DENMARK JAPAN RUSSIA UNITED-KINGDOM

ARMATEC A/S BERNARD JAPAN c/o ALCAN A.E.T. ZOEDALE Plc
GLOSTRUP TOKYO ST PETERSBURG BEDFORD
Tel.:+45 46 96 00 00 Tel.:+81 3 33 49 66 39 Tel./Fax: +7 812 320 55 97 Tel.:+44 12 34 83 28 28
Fax:+45 46 96 00 01 Fax:+81 3 33 49 67 50 Mob.: +7 812 956 3 14 Fax:+44 12 34 83 28 29
jo@armatec.dk info@bernard.jp aet@ctinet.ru enquiries@zoedale.co.uk
EGYPT MALAYSIA SINGAPORE USA/CANADA/MEXICO

ATEB ACTUATION & CONTROLS ENGINEER ACTUATION & CONTROLS ENG. BERNARD CONTROLS Inc
ALEXANDRIA JOHOR BAHRU SINGAPORE HOUSTON - TEXAS
Tel.:+203 483 13 53 Tel.:+60 7 23 50 277 / 23 50 281 Tel.:+65 65 654 227 Tel.:+1 281 578 66 66
Fax:+203 484 99 35 Fax:+60 7 23 50 280 / 23 50 285 Fax:+65 65 650 224 Fax:+1 281 578 27 97
rfserv@atebreefer.com tcmeng@pc.jaring.my acesin@singnet.com.sg bsales@bernardcontrols.com
4 rue d’Arsonval - BP 70091 - 95505 Gonesse Cedex - France

Tel: +33.1. 34.07.71.00 - Fax: +33.1.34.07.71.01
E-mail: mail@bernard-actuators.com
Internet: http://www.bernard-actuators.com
375/449
commissioning instructions
manuel de mise en service
bedienungshandbuch
integral+ control and

posigam+ / modugam+ positioner
commande integral+ et
positionneur posigam+ / modugam+
integral-plus steuerung und

posigam-plus / modugam-plus positoner
afd_nr1088 rev E
376/449
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
3. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
3.1. Actuator power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
3.2. Output power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4. ACTUATOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.1 Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.2 Closing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.3 By-pass of open torque switch when starting to open from closed position . . . . . . . .5
4.4 Rotation reverse relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
5. REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
5.1 Dry contacts control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
5.2 Voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
5.3 Single dry contact control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
5.4 Priority to open or to close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
5.5 Emergency control (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
5.6 Local control inhibition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
6. LOCAL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
6.1 Self-holding local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
6.2 Local stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
6.3 General stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
6.4 Local/remote selector padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
7. INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
7.1 Blinking indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
7.2 Indication relay N°1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
7.6 Fault monitoring relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8. FUSES PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
9. POSITIONER OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
9.1 Input signal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
9.1.1 Operation with signal 0-20mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
9.1.2 Operation with signal 0-10V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
9.2 Operation direction configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
9.3 'Stay put' function configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
9.4 Dead band adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
9.5 Local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
9.6 Adjustment of 0% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
9.7 Adjustment of 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
9.8 Split range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
9.9 Operation with 4-20mA transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
9.10 Remote control AUTO/ON-OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
10. LOCAL INDICATION OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
11. TIMING CONTROL BOARD OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
12. TROUBLESHOOTING INTEGRAL+ VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
13. TROUBLESHOOTING OF POSITIONER VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
14. USER’S SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
377/449
FPI HOUSING Local control buttons
BOITIER FPI Boutons de commande locale
Lokale Steuerschalter
FPI GEHÄUSE
Furnished with screws, Electronic board configuration
nuts & diagram Carte de configuration
Fourni avec vis, Konfiguration der elektronischen
rondelles et schéma Steuerung
Ausgestattet mit
Schrauben, Muttern & Terminal strip
Diagramm Bornier de connexion
Klemmenleiste
Switch off the power supply before removing the terminal strip cover.
Couper l’alimentation avant d’enlever le couvercle du bornier de connexion.
Bevor Sie den Klemmenleistendeckel entfernen, schalten Sie die Spannungsversorgung aus.
CI2701 Configuration switches

Commutateurs
INTEGRAL+ board SETTING
de configuration
DIL-Schalter-
CONFIGURATION Funktionen
CARTE CI2701 Thermal sensor tripped LED
INTEGRAL+ Voyant alarme
protection thermique
INTEGRAL-PLUS Anzeige-LED für
“Thermokontakt
PLATINEN ausgelöst”
EINSTELLUNGEN
Torque switch tripped LED
Voyant limiteur
Configuration jumpers
d'effort activé
Cavaliers de
Anzeige-LED für
configuration
“Drehmoment
Jumper Einstellungen
ausgelöst”
Actuator closing
LED indicator Secondary fuses
Voyant fermeture Fusibles
servomoteur secondaires
Anzeige-LED für Zweitsicherungen
“Antrieb schließt”
Primary fuse
Actuator opening Fusible principal
LED indicator Hauptsicherungen
Voyant ouverture
servomoteur
Anzeige-LED für
“Antrieb öffnet”
GAM-K POSITIONER SETTING Local control switch

CONFIGURATION POSITIONNEUR GAM-K Commutateur commande manuelle
GAM-K POSITIONER EINSTELLUNG Lokal- Kontroll-Schalter
100% setting potentiometer Actuator running in open direction LED

Potentiomètre réglage 100% Voyant manoeuvre d'ouverture
Potentiometer für die 100% LED für die Laufanzeige in
Einstellung Richtung offen
Dead-band setting potentiometer LED for actuator running
Potentiomètre de réglage de la in closing direction
bande-morte Voyant manoeuvre de fermeture
Potentiometer für die LED für die Laufanzeige in
Totband-Einstellung Richtung schließen
Configuration switches Potentiometer for local control
Commutateurs de configuration Potentiomètre de commande locale
Konfigurationsschalter Potentiometer für lokale Steuerung
378/449
1. INTRODUCTION
The configuration panel of the INTEGRAL+ board allows to adapt the actuator at each particu-
lar application. Information to be transmitted and actuator behaviour configuration are set with
switches and jumpers. The actuator is deliverable with standard configuration, or optional con-
figuration if requested at order. The configuration can be easily changed on site.
The jumper and switches settings can be reported in a table on page 39.
2. CONFIGURATION
Configuration is easily done by changing switches and jumpers position.
Figure 2 Figure 3
Switches configuration Jumpers configuration
Basic/standard” configuration (default setting): all switches and jumpers are in position A.
3. POWER SUPPLY
3.1. Actuator power supply
Actuator power supply can be 3 phase, single phase or DC.
☞ Jumper 100 (located at the bottom of the board)
The electronic board includes an automatic phase correction device and a detection of missing
phase device. In 3 phase supply, whatever the power connection, the actuator always rotates
in the right direction. If, in 3 phase supply, one phase is lost, the actuator stops automatically
and the monitoring relay drops.
In single phase or DC supply, one must inhibit the automatic phase correction and the detec-
tion of missing phase by moving the jumper 100 to position M.
B
A BASIC
M
1
T
CAV100
➯ Single phase or DC power supply

14
1
TSO
19V
LSO
2
RELAY1
3
23V 4
22
379/449
3.2 Output power supply
One power supply unit 23V - 1,2VA DC is available (through the card CI2701) to power a
remote position current transmitter and remote controls dry contacts. This power supply unit is
isolated from the other electrical circuits.
4. ACTUATOR OPERATION
4.1 Direction of rotation
In standard, the actuator closes clockwise.
☞ Switch 7
Move the switch 7 to position B for the valves closing counter-clockwise. This switch reverses:
➩ The motor direction of rotation
➩ The limit switches
➩ The torque switches
➯ Closing counter-clockwise
4.2 Closing type

In standard, the actuator closes on limit switch.
☞ Switch 1
Move switch 1 to position B for closing on torque switch (only for actuator equipped with
torque limit switches). The associated limit switch must also be operated when the valve is
closed.
➯ Closing on torque switch
The limit switch is used for valve closed indication and also allows to detect stopping on torque
switch at mid-stroke as a fault and stopping on torque switch in closed position as normal.
4.3 By-pass of open torque switch when starting to open from closed position
In standard, the open torque switch is active on the whole actuator stroke.
☞ Switch 6
Move switch 6 to position B to by-pass the open torque switch by the closed limit switch when
starting to open from the closed position.
5
380/449
➯ By-pass the open torque
switch by the closed limit
switch in closed position
This must be used when actuator including mechanically maintained torque switches [SR type] is
set for closing on torque switch. This avoid the open torque switch to trip when starting to open.
4.4 Rotation reverse delay

In standard the reverse delay is 50ms. Jumper on support 25 in position 50ms.
☞ Jumper 25
Move the jumper on support 25 to position 200ms to have a reverse delay of 200ms.
RELAY 3
25
➯ Reverse delay of 200 ms
50ms inp
200ms Eme
Note: the setting of the reverse delay is a factory setting. It allows the use of bigger single phase motors.
5. REMOTE CONTROL
Remote control of an actuator equipped with the electronic board CI2701 can be done from
an external voltage supply or an internal voltage supply.
Inputs on the board are completely isolated by opto-isolators.
Pulse commands (with self-holding) requires 4 wires connected to the customer terminal board:
Common, stop, open and close. If the stop button is not used, do not connect the wire STOP,
open contact (or close) must be maintained to operate the actuator.
5.1 Dry contacts control

In case of dry contact control, a jumper must be put on customer terminals 5-6.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
5.2 Voltage control

Remote control can be done either in AC or DC voltage.
For lower voltages from 10 to 55V, use common terminal 5.
For higher voltages from 55 to 250V, use common terminal 4.
Caution : never connect voltage higher than 55V on common terminal 5.
6
381/449
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 8 10
5.3 Single dry contact control
It is possible to control the actuator with a single external dry contact.

➩ Contact closed: opening of the valve
➩ Contact open: closing of the valve
One must configure the actuator for priority to open (see 5.4).
The opposite control is possible :
➩ Contact closed: closing of the valve
➩ Contact open: opening of the valve
One must configure the actuator for priority to close (see 5.4).
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
5.4 Priority to Open or to Close

In standard there is no priority to open or to close. These priorities are used to:
➩ Change the direction during operation without going through a stop command. In that case
priority to Open and to Close are needed.
➩ Give priority to one position: if the actuator receives both open and close command and a
priority to Open or to Close are needed.
➩ Control by a single dry contact
☞ Switches 9 and 10
Move switch 9 to position B for priority to Close.
Move switch 10 to position B for priority to Open.
➯ Priority to Close
382/449
➯ Priority to Open
➯ Change of operation
direction without going
through a stop command
Priority command stops the pending operation and is immediately active.
5.5 Emergency control (ESD)

ESD (Emergency Shut Down) is a remote emergency control, with priority on all other controls.
According to the valve operation, ESD can be open command or close command. To increase
the availability of the actuator in extreme conditions, ESD can also override the motor thermal
sensor.
Note: ESD is not available when local / remote selector is in position "OFF".
In standard, ESD control is performed by closing a contact. Jumper 27 position:
☞ Jumper 27
Move jumper 27 position to have ESD by opening a contact.
Caution : In this configuration, if ESD input is not connected, the actuator receives an ESD oper-
ation command as soon as powered on. If no ESD wire is available at the start-up stage, it is rec-
ommended to add a jumper at the wiring terminal strip (in place of ESD wire) prior to power on.
In standard, ESD control is a close command. Jumper 28 position CLOSE.
☞ Jumper 28
Move jumper 28 to position OPEN for open command.
In standard, ESD control does not override the motor thermal sensor
☞ Switch 8
Move switch 8 to position B to by-pass the motor thermal sensor when ESD control.
➯ Configuration of ESD control: jumpers 27 and 28
383/449
➯ By-pass of motor
thermal sensor
when ESD control.
5.6 Local control inhibition

The inhibition of the local control is a remote command. This command freezes open and close
commands sent in local and authorise remote commands even if the local / remote selector is
in local position.
In standard configuration, local stop and general stop remain possible locally on the actuator.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
For inhibition of local stop and general stop, see 6.3 (switch 4 on position B).
Note: the command inhibition of local control is not available with the option positioner. It is
replaced [automatically] by the function AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL .
6. LOCAL CONTROL
As for remote control, local control can be used. A local selector allows to choose between
remote and local control. The button for local control open, close allows to operate the actua-
tor in the appropriate direction. Local stop is done by a momentary rotation of the local / remote
selector.
6.1 Self-holding local control

In standard, local controls are self-holding. (One pulse is enough to send a close or open
command)
☞ Switch 5
Move switch 5 to position B to cancel the self-holding. (Open or close command must be main-
tained during the operation)
➯ Local control without

self-holding
384/449
6.2 Local stop
In standard, it is possible to stop the actuator locally, even if the selector local / remote is on
remote position.
☞ Locking pin
To inhibit a local stop when the selector is on remote position, fit the locking pin on the local /
remote selector.
Note: this inhibition is effective only when the selector is padlocked in the remote position.
6.3 General stop

In standard, it is possible to do a general stop of the actuator. Move the selector local / remote
to position OFF. No electrical controls in local or remote is therefore possible.
If the remote command local control inhibition is used, priority remains to the function general stop.
☞ Switch 4
Move switch 4 to position B to prohibit local stop and OFF position when local control inhibition.
➯ Local stop impossible if

local control inhibition.
6.4 Local / remote selector padlock

The local / remote selector can be padlocked in position OFF, local or remote.
7. INDICATIONS
Remote indication is done through 5 relays:
➩ Four relays 'single contact' for operation indications. Contacts can be normally open or normally closed.
Note : Voltage free, relays are always with normally open contact.
➩ One reversing relay for fault monitoring.
Note : The monitoring relay is normally energised and drops in case of fault.
Relays information (Grey : standard configuration):
N° Relay Information to be transmitted Location of jumper Customer terminal
Relay 1 Limit switch open 14 - LSO 13 - 14
Torque switch open 14 - TSO
Relay 2 Limit switch close 15 - LSC 15 - 16
Torque switch close 15 - TSC
Limit switch open 16 - LSO 17 - 18
Torque switch open 16 - TSO
Relay 3 Local/remote selector on local 17 - LOCAL
Local/remote selector on remote 17 - REMOTE
Actuator moving electrically 18 - RUNNING
Actuator opening electrically 18 - OPENING
Limit switch close 19 - LSC 19 - 20
Torque switch close 19 - TSC
Relay 4 Actuator receives an emergency command (ESD) 20 - ESD
Actuator closing electrically 20 - CLOSING
Local/remote selector on local 21 - LOCAL
Local/remote selector on remote 21 - REMOTE
10
385/449
7.1 Blinking indications
In standard, information:
➩ Actuator running electrically
➩ Actuator opening electrically
➩ Actuator closing electrically
are not blinking.
☞ Switch 11
Move switch 11 to position B to have the 3 informations blinking.
Indications
➩ Actuator running
➩ Actuator opening
➩ Actuator closing are blinking
7.2 Indication relay N°1

In standard, relay N°1 indicates limit switch open. Jumper 14 in position LSO (Limit Switch
Open).
☞ Jumper 14
Move jumper 14 to position TSO (Torque Switch Open) for relay N°1 to indicate torque switch
open.
In standard, relay N°1 is with contact normally open. Jumper 22 in position
☞ Jumper 22
Move jumper 22 to position for relay N°1 to be with contact normally close.
➯ Configuration relay 1: jumpers 14 and 22

In standard, relay N°2 indicates limit switch close. Jumper 15 in position LSC (Limit Switch
Close).
☞ Jumper 15
Move jumper 15 to position TSC (Torque Switch Close) for relay N°2 to indicate torque switch
close.
☞ Jumper 23
Move jumper 23 to position for relay N°2 to be with contact normally closed.
11
386/449
➯ Configuration relay 2: Jumpers 15 and 23

In standard, relay N°3 indicates limit switch open. Jumper 16 in position LSO (Limit Switch
Open).
☞ Jumpers 16, 17 and 18
NOTE: There is only one jumper for the three jumper holders number 16, 17 and 18
➩ Move jumper to holder 16 / TSO (Torque Switch Open) for relay N°3 to indicate torque
switch open.
➩ Move jumper to holder 17 / REMOTE for relay N°3 to indicate local/remote selector in posi-
tion remote.
➩ Move jumper to holder 17 / LOCAL for relay N°3 to indicate local/remote selector in posi-
tion local.
➩ Move jumper to holder 18 / OPENING for relay N°3 to indicate an actuator opening move-
ment.
➩ Move jumper to holder 18 / RUNNING for relay N°3 to indicate that actuator is running.
☞ Jumper 24
➯ Configuration relay 3: jumper 16, 17, 18 and 24.

➯ Only one jumper on holders 16,17 and 18.

In standard, relay N°4 indicates limit switch closed. Jumper 19 in position LSC (Limit Switch
Close).
☞ Jumpers 19, 20 and 21
NOTE : There is only one jumper for the three jumper holders number 19, 20 and 21
➩ Move jumper to holder 19 / TSC (Torque Switch Close) for relay N°4 to indicate torque
switch close.
➩ Move jumper to holder 20 / CLOSING for relay N°4 to indicate that actuator is closing the
valve.
12
387/449
➩ Move jumper to holder 20 / ESD (Emergency Shut Down) for relay N°4 to indicate that actuator is
receiving an ESD command.
➩ Move jumper to holder 21 / REMOTE for relay N°4 to indicate local/remote selector in position
remote.
➩ Move jumper to holder 21 / LOCAL for relay N°4 to indicate local/remote selector in position local.
In standard, relay N°4 is with contact normally open. Jumper 26 is in position

☞ Jumper 26
➯ Configuration relay 4: jumpers 19, 20, 21 and 26

➯ Only one jumper on 19, 20 and 21
7.6 Fault monitoring relay

The fault monitoring relay indicates a non-availability of the actuator or an abnormal operation.
The fault monitoring relay is normally energised, and is disenergised in case of fault.
The relay is disenergised upon the following events:
➩ Loss of main power supply, control voltage, fuse
➩ Loss of 1 phase (in case of 3 phase supply)
➩ Tripping of motor thermal protection
➩ Loss of input signal 4-20mA (with option positioner)*
➩ Local/remote selector in position local or off**
* On version without positioner, switch N°2 has no effect.
** In case of local controls inhibition, selector in position local is not indicated as a fault,
because actuator is still available for the remote commands.
The user can modify the conditions upon which the relay is disenergised.
☞ Switch 2
Move switch 2 to position B for loss of input signal 4-20mA not indicated as a fault. (Positioner
only).
➯ Loss of input signal

4-20mA is not a fault.
(Only option positioner)
13
388/449
☞ Switch 3
Move switch 3 to position B for local/remote selector in local or off not indicated as a fault.
➯ Local/remote selector
in local or off is not a fault.
☞ Switch 12
Move switch 12 to position B for tripping of torque switch open to be a fault.
➯ Tripping of torque
switch close is a fault.
☞ Switch 13
Move switch 13 to position B for tripping of torque switch close to be a fault.
➯ Tripping of torque
switch open is a fault.
Note : Supervisor system is able to detect if the valve close on torque, and in this case there is
no fault indication.
8. FUSES PROTECTION
Accessibility :
➩ Switch off power supply on actuator.
➩ Remove cover with local control buttons.
➩ Take care of the buttons cable inside the cover.
➩ Unfasten the fuse support covers and change the fuses if necessary.
Fuses data :
FU1 : transformer primary fuse 6,3 x 32mm - 0,5A - 500V
FU2 : transformer secondary fuse 5 x 20mm - 0,5A
FU3 : transformer secondary fuse 5 x 20mm - 0,05A
14
389/449
9. POSITIONER OPTION
The optional positioner board can be connected onto the CI2701 board. The positioner allows
the actuator to reach a position proportionally to a command input signal. The configuration
panel allows:
➩ To give local positioning commands
➩ To adapt the actuator to the type of input signal
➩ To configure the reaction of the actuator in case of loss of input signal
9.1 Input signal configuration

The standard input signal is 4-20 mA.
9.1.1 Operation with signal 0-20 mA
Move switches 4 and 8 to position B for operation with signal 0-20mA. The output signal [posi-
tion indication] is also 0-20 mA.
9.1.2 Operation with signal 0-10 V
☞ Switches 4, 8, 9 and 10
Move switches 4, 8, 9 and 10 to position B for 0-10V input signal. The output signal is 0-20 mA.
9.2 Operation direction configuration

The standard is 4 mA valve closed and 20 mA valve open.
☞ Switch 3
☞ Potentiometer connection
Move switch 3 to position B, and move actuator potentiometer connection from position POT
STD to position POT REV to obtain 4 mA valve open, and 20 mA valve closed.
Operation direction configuration

Close
Open
Type of input 4mA 20mA 4mA 20mA
signal 0mA 20mA 0mA 20mA
0v 10V
0v 10V
Closing counter- Closing counter-
Valve action Closing clockwise Closing clockwise
clockwise clockwise
CI2701 board: GAMK board: CI2701 board:

switch 7 on B switch 3 on B switch 7 on B
Configuration Standard
Reverse poten- Reverse poten- GAMK board:
tiometer tiometer switch 3 on B
9.3 'Stay put' function configuration

With input signal 4-20 mA, it is possible to configure a failsafe position in case of loss of input
signal.
In standard, the function is active, and the actuator stays in position in case of loss of input signal.
☞ Switches 5, 6 and 8
Move switch 5 to position B for actuator to open in case of loss of input signal.
15
390/449
Move switch 6 to position B for actuator to close in case of loss of input signal.
Move switch 8 to position B to disactivate the 'stay put' function.
Caution: in case of input signal 0-20 mA or 0-10 V, the 'stay put' function cannot be used and
must be disactivated. Move switch 8 to position B.
9.4 Dead band adjustment

This adjustment is factory done, but one can adjust it with the potentiometer DEAD BAND .
To reduce the dead band turn it counter-clockwise.
Caution: reducing the dead band too much will provoke hunting on the actuator.
9.5 Local operation

One can simulate an input signal 4-20 mA locally to check the operation of the actuator. The
local/off/remote selector must be on the remote position.
➩ AUT: Operation by external signal

➩ 0%: Internal signal 0% (4mA in standard)
➩ MAN: Internal signal adjustable from 0 to 100%
➩ 100 %: Internal signal 100% (20mA in standard)
Move local control switch to position 0%, MAN or 100%. Turn potentiometer MAN to
simulate an input signal 4-20 mA.
9.6 Adjustment of 0%
The local/off/remote selector must be on remote position. Move local control switch to position
0% for the actuator to receive a closing command (4mA).
Case N°1: actuator starts closing and stops before the close limit switch.
Turn actuator potentiometer progressively to bring the actuator on the close limit
switch, LED on. Turn potentiometer slowly in opposite direction until the red LED
goes off.
Case N°2: actuator starts closing, stops on the close limit switch, and the LED indi-
cating closing is still on.
Turn actuator potentiometer progressively to off the LED.
9.7 Adjustment of 100%
The local/off/remote selector must be on remote position. Move local control switch to position
100% for the actuator to receive an opening command (20mA).
16
391/449
Case N°1: actuator starts opening and stops before the open limit switch.
Turn potentiometer ADJ 100% (adjustment of 100%) progressively clockwise
to bring the actuator on the open limit switch. Turn slowly this potentiometer in
opposite direction until the green LED is switched off.
Case N°2: actuator starts opening, stops on the open limit switch, and the green
LED is still on.
Turn potentiometer ADJ 100% (adjustment of 100%) progressively counter-
clockwise until the green LED is switched off.
9.8 Split Range

The positioner board can be configured for split range.
Split range means input signals 4-12mA and 12-20mA. The end user signal is normal: 4-20mA.
A first actuator is set to receive a signal from 4 to 12mA and a second actuator is set to
receive a signal from 12 to 20mA. Each actuator receives the signal 4-20mA. The first one
opens completely from 0 to 50% of the signal and the second from 50 to 100% of the sig-
nal.
Move switch 1 to position B for the actuator to receive an input signal 12-20mA.
Move switch 2 to position B for the actuator to receive an input signal 4-12mA.
9.9 Operation with a 4-20mA transmitter

In standard the actuator potentiometer is used to know the valve position.
☞ Switch 7
Move switch 7 to position B for operation with a transmitter 4-20mA instead of the actuator
potentiometer. The CI2701 board can provide the power supply to the transmitter TAM or FSG.
9.10 Remote control AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL

With a positioner, one can do remote control by a signal 4-20mA or by open/close/stop com-
mands. The input AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL on the customer terminal board allows to switch
from one type of control to the other one.
See chapter 5: remote control for the configuration of the open and close commands.
Note: the remote controls "AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL" and "LOCAL CONTROL INHIBITION" use
the same input on the customer terminal board. The implementation of the positioner automat-
ically allocates this input to the function AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL. The function "LOCAL CON-
TROL INHIBITION" cannot be used with a positioner.
10. LOCAL INDICATION OPTION

In option a local indication through a window at the local controls level shows the actuator status.
➩ Valve open lamp
➩ Valve closed lamp
➩ Actuator power-on lamp
17
392/449
11. TIMING CONTROL BOARD OPTION
An additional timer control module permits to slow down the speed of the actuator, for exam-
ple to protect the pipe against hammer blows if stroke time is too fast.
This module is connected to entry P202TEMPO of the actuators Integral+ control board. When
electric commands are given, the timing action is assured by a STOP and ON function of
the motor starter.
The time of operation ON and the time of STOP are adjustable:
T. ON : 0,5 sec. to 10 secs.
T. STOP : 3 secs. to 2 min.
Thus the total time of operation for the valve stroke can be very slow with the advantage of
adjustment availability at site.
The adjustments for open and closed direction are independent.
By using an auxiliary limit switch it is possible to bypass the timing control as long as the limit
switch is activated. This device permits the actu-
ator to operate at rated speed a part of the valve Open
stroke. The length of the limit switch operating
cam represents approximately 10% of the total 1 4
5
valve stroke.
3
FONCTION CYCLE
1/ Auxiliary limit switch open.
2/ Auxiliary limit switch close. 2 6
3/ Slow opening. Close Time
4/ Fast opening.
5/ Fast closing.
6/ Slow closing.
7/ Setting of stop time.
8/ Setting of operation ON.
9/ Setting of operating ON.
10/ Setting of stop time.
11/ Connection to extra limit switches if any.
12/ Connection to INTEGRAL+ CARD.
18
393/449
12. TROUBLESHOOTING ON INTEGRAL+ VERSION
In case of doubt as to the unit's functionality, firstly set the local/remote selector switch to
local and actuate the local open/close controls.
PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Actuator power supply Check the power supply voltage (terminals 1, 2, 3
No operation in 3 PH voltage or 0, 1 in single phase). The voltage
is specified on the identification plate.
A local control inhibit Check that the actuator receives no local con-
command is present. trol inhibit command.
With the unit off , the local control inhibit
wire, connected to terminal 11 may be
removed to carry out a functional check of the
actuator.
An emergency control Check that the actuator receives no emer-
command is present and gency command.
inhibits all other com- With the unit off , jumper #27 may be
mands. removed from the INTEGRAL+ board, taking
care to record its position to make sure it is
replaced at the correct location. With the
jumper removed, the ESD function is inhibited,
and a functional check of the actuator can be
carried out. Return the jumper to original
location.
Fuse blown Check fuses and replace as required.
Power supply type con- Check position of jumper 100 on the CI2701
figuration board.
Three-phase: position T
Single-phase or DC: position M
Tripping of motor ther- The TH light on the CI2701 board configura-
mal protective device tion panel indicates thermal tripping of ther-
mal protective device. The actuator will again
be available after the motor has cooled off.
The declutchable manual Check that the handwheel is in disengaged
control handwheel position.
remained engaged (only
on versions with electrical
safety contact)
Configuration jumpers There must be 11 jumpers on the CI2701
are incorrectly set or board.
missing There shall be only one jumper on jumper 16-
17-18 support and only one jumper on
jumper 19-20-21 support.
19
394/449
The actuator Local/remote selector Set the local/remote selector switch to
operates in local switch set to local or to remote.
mode, not in off
remote mode Contact control: no volt- Check that a shunt is present at the client ter-
age across terminals 6 minal strip between terminals 5 and 6.
and 7. Check fuse FU3 on the INTEGRAL+ board.
Voltage control: inap- Check connection in voltage control mode:
propriate input voltage. Voltage 10 to 55 V: Terminal strip 5
Voltage 55 to 250 V: Terminal strip 4
The actuator Local/remote selector Set the local/remote selector switch to local.
operates in switch set to remote or
remote mode, to off
not in local A local control inhibit Check that the actuator receives no local control
mode command is present. inhibit command.
With the unit off , the local control inhibit
wire, connected to terminal 11 may be
removed to carry out a functional check of the
actuator.
The actuator Incorrect configuration Check the rotational direction configuration.
does not rotate Switch 7 of the CI2701 board:
in the correct Position A: clockwise closing
rotational direc- Position B: counterclockwise closing
tion Motor has been rewired When replacing a motor, wire markings must
(motor replacement i.e) be observed. In case of doubt, check rotation-
al direction. To reverse the motor rotational
direction, change over wires 1 and 2 of the
motor terminal strip in the travel switches
compartment.
The actuator The actuator is config- Check closing configuration (switch 1 of the
does not stop ured for torque closing. INTEGRAL+ board.
on the closing The closing limit switch Adjust the closing limit switch. The closing
limit switch is misadjusted. limit switch must be actuated with the valve
closed (even if the actuator is set for torque
closing).
Motor has been rewired When replacing a motor, wire markings must
and rotates in the al direction. To reverse the motor rotational
reverse direction direction, change over wires 1 and 2 of the
compartment.
20
395/449
The actuator The opening limit switch Adjust the opening limit switch. The opening
does not stop on is misadjusted. limit switch must be actuated with the valve
the opening limit open.
switch Motor has been rewired When replacing a motor, wire markings must
compartment.
No actuator sig- The actuator is off Indications are only available with the actuator
nalling on .
Torque switch Incorrect configuration Check that the concerned indication relay has
not operating been configured for torque limiter indication.
correctly The jumper of the INTEGRAL+ board is set to:
TS0 for opening torque limiter
TSC for closing torque limiter
The torque limiter has The electronics only store the limiter data if a
been actuated manually. manoeuvre is in progress. The electronics fur-
ther only stores the data for the torque limiter
corresponding to the rotational direction.
Torque switch Torque limiter data storage The torque limiter data are stored electronically.
indication does To clear a torque limiter memory, a reverse
not return to ini- order must be sent.
tial condition
once the torque
limiter is no
longer actuated.
21
396/449
13 TROUBLESHOOTING ON POSITIONER VERSION
In case of doubt as to the unit's functionality, firstly set the local/remote selector switch to
local and actuate the local open/close controls.

No operation Actuator power supply Check the power supply voltage (terminals 1,
2, 3 in three-phase voltage or 0,1 in single
phase). The voltage is specified on the identi-
fication plate.
An emergency control Check that the actuator receives no emer-
command is present and gency control command.
inhibits all other com- With the unit off , jumper 27 may be
mands. removed from the CI2701 board, taking care
to record its position to make sure it is
replaced at the correct location. With the
jumper removed, the ESD function is inhibit-
ed, and a functional check of the actuator can
be carried out. Return the jumper to original
location.
Fuse blown Check fuses of CI2701 board
Check position of jumper 100 on the C2701
board.
Power supply type con- Three-phase: position T
figuration Single-phase or DC: position M
Tripping of motor ther- The TH light on the CI2701 board configura-
mal protective device tion panel indicates thermal tripping of ther-
mal protective device. The actuator will again
be available after the motor has cooled off.
The declutchable manu- Check that the handwheel is in disengaged
al control handwheel position.
remained engaged (only
on versions with electri-
cal safety contact)
Configuration jumpers There must be 11 jumpers on the CI2701
are incorrectly set or board.
missing There shall be only one jumper on supports
16-17-18 and only one jumper on supports
19-20-21
The actuator oper- Local/remote selector Set the local/remote selector switch to remote
ates in local switch set to local or to to use the positioner (even when the position-
open/close control off er is set to manual).
22
397/449
mode, not in An auto/on-off control Check that the actuator receives no Auto/on-
positioner mode order is present and off control command.
inhibits the positioner Disconnect this remote control (terminal 11)
as required for confirmation.
Bad connection between Check the positioner board-Integral board
GAM-K (positioner) and connection.
CI2701 boards
The actuator repeater Turn the actuator potentiometer by a 1/4 turn

potentiometer is and adjust as described in commissioning
incorrectly set instructions.
Input signal incorrect Check input signal configuration on the positioner
board:
4-20 mA signal:
Switches 4, 9 and 10 set to A
0-20 mA signal:
Switches 4 and 8 set to B
Switches 9 and 10 set to A
0-10 V signal:
Switches 4, 8, 9 and 10 set to B
The actuator The auto - 0% - 100% Check setting of Auto - 0% - 100% switch
operates in posi- switch is not set to Auto on the positioner board.
tioner mode in Defective signal Check the reference signal using a mil-
local mode, not liamperemeter connected in series (terminal 30).
in remote mode Signal polarity Check that the plus (+) of the signal is present
at terminal 30
The actuator Potentiometer reverse- Check the potentiometer connection.
does not follow mounted The potentiometer should be connected to
the input signal POT STD for:
• 4 mA (or (0 mA or 0 V according to signal) =
closed position and clockwise direction closing.
• 4 mA (or (0 mA or 0 V according to signal)
= open position and counterclockwise direc-
tion closing
The potentiometer should be connected to
POT REV for:
= closed position and counterclockwise direc-
tion closing.
= open position and clockwise direction closing
Check signal configuration.
23
398/449
Signal reversed or con- Switch 3 on positioner board:
figuration incorrect Position A: 4 mA = valve closed
Position B: 4 mA = valve open
Check rotation direction configuration.
Rotational direction Switch 3 on CI2701 board:
reversed Position A: clockwise direction closing
Position B: counterclockwise direction opening
The actuator repeater Turn the actuator potentiometer by a quarter-
potentiometer is incor- turn and repeat adjustments in accordance
rectly set with commissioning instructions.
(motor replacement i.e) be observed. In case of doubt, check rotational
and rotates in the direction. To reverse the motor rotational
compartment.
The actuator The actuator is config- Check closing configuration (switch 1 of the
does not stop ured for torque closing. CI2701 board).
on the closing The closing limit switch Adjust the closing limit switch. The closing
limit switch is misadjusted. limit switch must be actuated with the valve
closed (even if the actuator is set for torque
closing).
Position 0% is misadjusted Adjust actuator potentiometer
compartment.
The actuator Adjust the opening limit switch. The opening

does not stop The opening limit switch limit switch must be actuated with the valve
on the opening is misadjusted. open.
limit switch Position 100% is misadjusted Adjust 100% potentiometer on positioner board.
motor terminal strip.
No actuator signalling The actuator is off Indications are only available with the actuator on .
24
399/449
The torque lim- Incorrect configuration Check that the concerned indication relay has
iter indications been configured for torque limiter indication.
are inoperative The jumper of the CI2701 board is set to:
TS0 for opening torque limiter
TSC for closing torque limiter
The load limiter has The electronics only store the limiter data if a
been actuated manually. manoeuvre is in progress. The electronics fur-
ther only stores the data for the load limiter
corresponding to the rotational direction.
Torque limiter indi- Torque limiter data storage The torque limiter data are stored electronically.
cation does not To clear a torque limiter memory, a reverse order
return to initial must be sent.
reading once the
torque limiter is no
longer actuated.
A fault is indicated The input control signal is Send a control signal on the input
but the actuator is not present. In standard
fully functional. configuration, the actua-
tor indicates a fault and
remains in position.
The selector switch is set to Set the selector switch to remote .
local or off position. In
standard configuration the
actuator indicates a fault.
25
400/449
SOMMAIRE
SCHEMAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3. ALIMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3.1 Alimentation servomoteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3.2 Alimentation externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4. FONCTIONNEMENT DU SERVOMOTEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.1 Sens de rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.2 Type de fermeture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.3 Shunt du limiteur d’effort en début d’ouverture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.4 Temps d’inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
5. COMMANDE A DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
5.1 Commande par contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
5.2 Commande par tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
5.3 Commande par un contact unique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
5.4 Priorité ouverture ou fermeture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
5.5 Commande d’urgence (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
5.6 Interdiction de commande locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
6. COMMANDE LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
6.1 Commande locale maintenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
6.2 Stop local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
6.3 Arrêt général . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
6.4 Cadenassage sélecteur local/distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
7. SIGNALISATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
7.1 Signalisations clignotantes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
7.2 Relais de signalisation N°1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
7.6 Relais défaut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
8. PROTECTION FUSIBLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
9. OPTION POSITIONNEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
9.1 Configuration du signal d’entrée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
9.1.1 Utilisation d'un signal 0-20mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
9.1.2 Utilisation d'un signal 0-10V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
9.2 Configuration du sens de manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
9.3 Configuration de la fonction seuil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
9.4 Réglage de la bande morte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
9.5 Manoeuvre locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
9.6 Réglage du 0% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
9.7 Réglage du 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
9.8 Les commandes fractionnées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
9.9 Utilisation d’un transmetteur 4-20MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
9.10 Commandes à distance AUTO / ON-OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
10. OPTION SIGNALISATION LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
11. OPTION CARTE DE TEMPORISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
12. RESOLUTION PROBLEMES VERSION INTEGRAL+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
13. RESOLUTION PROBLEMES POSITIONNEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
14. CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
26
401/449
1. INTRODUCTION
Le panneau de configuration de la commande INTEGRAL+ permet d’adapter le servomoteur aux
besoins particuliers de chaques application. La configuration du comportement du servomoteur
et des informations transmises se fait à l’aide de commutateurs et de cavaliers. Le servomoteur
est livré soit en configuration standard, soit avec une configuration particulière si celle ci est
indiquée à la commande. (La configuration peut être modifiée sur site).
Les positions des commutateurs et cavaliers peuvent être reportées dans la table en page 37.
2. CONFIGURATION
La configuration se fait simplement en déplaçant des commutateurs et des cavaliers.
Figure 2 Figure 3
Configuration des commutateurs Configuration des cavaliers
En configuration “standard”, la plus courante, tous les commutateurs et cavaliers sont sur la
position A.
3. ALIMENTATION
3.1 Alimentation servomoteur
L’alimentation du servomoteur peut être triphasée, monophasée ou courant continu.
☞ Cavalier 100 (située sur la carte inférieure)
En triphasé, un contrôleur de phase corrige automatiquement le sens des phases. De plus si une
phase de l’alimentation manque, le servomoteur ne pourra pas démarrer. Le cavalier 100 doit
être sur la position T.
En monophasé ou en courant continu, il est nécessaire d’inhiber la correction de phase en posi-
tionnant le cavalier 100 sur la position M.
B
A BASIC
M
1
T
CAV100
14
1
➯ Alimentation monophasée ou Courant Continu
TSO
19V
LSO
2
RELAY1
3
23V 4
22
27
402/449
3.2 Alimentation externe
Une alimentation courant continu 23V-1,2VA est disponible pour alimenter un transmetteur de
courant ou une commande à distance par contacts. Cette alimentation est isolée galvanique-
ment des autres circuits électriques.
4. FONCTIONNEMENT DU SERVOMOTEUR
4.1 Sens de rotation
En standard, le servomoteur ferme en sens horaire.
☞ Commutateur 7
Basculer le commutateur 7 sur la position B pour les vannes à fermeture sens
anti-horaire. Ce commutateur inverse :
➩ Le sens de rotation du moteur
➩ Les fins de course
➩ Les limiteurs d’efforts
➯ Fermeture sens anti-horaire
4.2 Type de fermeture

En standard, le servomoteur se ferme sur fin de course.
☞ Commutateur 1
Basculer le commutateur 1 sur la position B pour fermer sur limiteur d’effort (uniquement pour
un servomoteur équipé de limiteur d'effort). Le fin de course doit être actionné vanne fermée.
➯ Fermeture sur limiteur d’effort
Le fin de course est utilisé pour la signalisation vanne fermée, et, d’autre part, permet de dis-
tinguer un arrêt sur limiteur d’effort en cours de manoeuvre comme un défaut et un arrêt sur
limiteur d’effort en position fermée comme normal.
4.3 Shunt du limiteur d’effort en début d’ouverture

En standard, le limiteur d’effort ouverture est actif sur toute la course du servomoteur.
☞ Commutateur 6
Basculer le commutateur 6 sur la position B pour shunter le limiteur d’effort en début d’ouver-
ture par le fin de course fermeture
28
403/449
➯ Shunter le limiteur d’effort en
début d’ouverture par le fin de
course fermeture
A utiliser lorsque le servomoteur à limiteur d’effort maintenu mécaniquement (type SR) est réglé
en fermeture sur limiteur d’effort. Permet d’éviter un déclenchement du limiteur d’effort au
moment de la réouverture.
4.4 Temps d’inversion

En standard le temps d’inversion est de 50ms. Cavalier 25 en position 50ms.
☞ Cavalier 25
Déplacer le cavalier 25 en position 200ms pour avoir un temps d’inversion de 200ms.
RELAY 3
25 ➯ Temps d’inversion de 200 ms
50ms inp
200ms Eme
Note : le réglage du temps d’inversion est une configuration usine. Il permet de pouvoir utilis-
er de gros moteurs monophasés.
5. COMMANDE A DISTANCE
La commande à distance d’un servomoteur équipé de la version INTEGRAL+ peut être faite à
partir d’une alimentation externe, ou d’une alimentation intégrée.
L’entrée de la carte est totalement isolée par des optocoupleurs.
La commande impulsionnelle (avec automaintien) nécessite 4 fils de liaison sur le bornier client:
Commun, stop, ouverture et fermeture. Si le bouton poussoir arrêt n’est pas utilisé, ne pas rac-
corder la liaison STOP, le contact ouverture (ou fermeture) doit être maintenu pour actionner le
servomoteur.
5.1 Commande par contacts

En commande par contact, il est nécessaire de faire un shunt aux bornes client 5-6.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
29
404/449
5.2 Commande par tension
La commande à distance peut s’effectuer indifféremment en courant continu ou en courant
alternatif.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
8
Pour les tensions basses de 10 à 55V, utiliser le commun borne 5.

Pour les tensions hautes de 55 à 250V, utiliser le commun borne 4
Attention : ne jamais raccorder une source de tension supérieure à 55V sur le commun borne 5.
5.3 Commande par un contact unique

Il est possible de commander le servomoteur à l’aide d’un contact extérieur unique.
➩ Contact fermé : ouverture de la vanne
➩ Contact ouvert : fermeture de la vanne
Il est nécessaire de configurer le servomoteur avec priorité à l’ouverture (voir 5.4)
La commande inverse est possible :

➩ Contact fermé : fermeture de la vanne
➩ Contact ouvert : ouverture de la vanne
Il est nécessaire de configurer le servomoteur avec priorité à la fermeture (voir 5.4)
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
5.4 Priorité à l’ouverture ou à la fermeture

En standard, il n’y a pas de priorité à l’ouverture ou à la fermeture. Les priorités servent :
➩ A inverser le sens de marche en cours de manoeuvre sans passer par une commande stop.
Il faut dans ce cas une prioirté à l’ouverture et à la fermeture.
➩ Donner la priorité à un sens de rotation : si le servomoteur reçoit 2 ordres ouverture et fer-
meture simultanés et qu'une priorité ouverture a été choisie, alors le servomoteur va en
ouverture.
➩ A faire des commandes par contact unique
☞ Commutateurs 9 et 10
Basculer le commutateur 9 sur la position B pour avoir une priorité à la fermeture.
Basculer le commutateur 10 sur la position B pour avoir une priorité à l’ouverture
30
405/449
➯ Priorité à la fermeture
➯ Priorité à l’ouverture
➯ Inversion du sens de
manoeuvre sans passer
par une commande stop
La commande prioritaire arrête l'opération en cours et est aussitôt active.
5.5 Commande d’urgence (ESD)

L’ESD (Emergency Shut Down) est une commande d’urgence à distance, prioritaire sur toute
autre commande. Suivant l’utilisation de la vanne, l’ordre d’urgence sera une ouverture ou une
fermeture. Pour augmenter la disponibilité du servomoteur dans les situations extrêmes, la com-
mande d’urgence peut aussi shunter la protection thermique du moteur.
Note : La commande d’urgence n’est pas disponible quand le sélecteur local/distance est sur “OFF”.
En standard, la commande ESD est établie par fermeture d’un contact.
Cavalier 27 en position
☞ Cavalier 27
Déplacer le cavalier 27 en position pour avoir une commande d’ESD par ouverture d’un
contact.
Attention : Dans cette configuration, si l’entrée ESD n’est pas raccordée, le servomoteur reçoit
un ordre de manoeuvre dès la mise sous tension. Il est recommandé en attendant la mise en
service d’établir un shunt au bornier à la place de cette commande à distance ESD.
En standard, l’ordre ESD est un ordre de fermeture. Cavalier 28 en position CLOSE.
☞ Cavalier 28
Déplacer le cavalier 28 en position OPEN pour avoir un ordre d’ouverture.
En standard, la commande ESD ne shunte pas la protection thermique du moteur
☞ Commutateur 8
Basculer le commutateur 8 sur la position B pour shunter la protection thermique du moteur
lors de la commande ESD.
31
406/449
➯ Configuration de la commande d’urgence:
Cavaliers 27 et 28
➯ Shunt de la protection
thermique du moteur
lors de la commande
d’urgence
5.6 Interdiction de commande locale

L’interdiction de commande locale est une commande à distance. Cette commande condamne
les ordres ouverture, fermeture effectués en local, et autorise les ordres distances, même si le
sélecteur local/distance est sur local.
En configuration standard, le stop local et l’arrêt général restent possibles au niveau du servo-
moteur.
Pour interdire aussi le stop local et l’arrêt général, voir 6.3 (commutateur 4 sur position B)
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
Note : la commande interdiction de commande locale n’est pas disponible avec l’option posi-
tionneur. Elle est remplacée (automatiquement) par la fonction “AUTO/ON-OFF CONTROL”.
6. COMMANDE LOCALE
Comme la commande à distance, une commande locale peut être utilisée. Un sélecteur local
permet de choisir la commande à distance ou locale. Le bouton de commande locale ouverture,
fermeture permet de manoeuvrer le servomoteur dans le sens désiré. Le stop local s’effectue
par une rotation momentanée du sélecteur local/distance.
6.1 Commande locale maintenue

En standard, la commande locale est automaintenue. (Une impulsion suffit pour effectuer une
commande ouverture ou fermeture)
☞ Commutateur 5
Basculer le commutateur 5 sur la position B pour supprimer l’automaintien. (La commande
ouverture ou fermeture doit être maintenue pendant la manoeuvre)
32
407/449
➯ Commande locale
sans automaintien
6.2 Stop local

En standard, il est possible de faire un stop local du servomoteur, même si celui-ci est en com-
mande à distance.
☞ Pion de blocage
Pour interdire un stop local avec le sélecteur sur distance, introduire le pion de blocage sur le
bouton de commande local/distance.
Nota : Cette interdiction n’est effective que si le sélecteur est cadenassé sur la position distance.
6.3 Arrêt général

En standard, il est possible de faire un arrêt général du servomoteur. Mettre le sélecteur
local/distance sur la position OFF. Aucune commande électrique en local ou à distance n’est
alors possible.
Si la commande à distance “interdiction de commande locale” est utilisée, la fonction arrêt
général reste prioritaire.
☞ Commutateur 4
Basculer le commutateur 4 sur la position B pour que l’arrêt local soit impossible en interdiction
de commande locale.
➯ Arrêt local impossible

si interdiction de commande
locale.
6.4 Cadenassage du sélecteur local/distance

Le sélecteur local/distance peut être cadenassé en position arrêt général, local ou distance.
7. SIGNALISATIONS
La signalisation à distance se fait à l’aide de 5 relais :
➩ Quatre relais simple contact pour les signalisations de fonctionnement. Les contacts
peuvent être normalement ouverts ou normalement fermés.
Nota : Hors tension les relais sont toujours à contact ouvert.
➩ Un relais inverseur pour la signalisations d’un défaut.
Nota : Le relais défaut est normalement sous tension, et retombe en cas de défaut.
33
408/449
Informations par relais (La configuration standard est représentée en gris)
N° Relais Information à transmettre Repère position Bornier client

du cavalier
Relais 1 Fin de course ouverture 14 - LSO 13 - 14
Limiteur d’effort ouverture 14 - TSO
Relais 2 Fin de course fermeture 15 - LSC 15 - 16
Limiteur d’effort fermeture 15 - TSC
Fin de course ouverture 16 - LSO 17 - 18
Limiteur d’effort ouverture 16 - TSO
Relais 3 Sélecteur local/distance sur local 17 - LOCAL
Sélecteur local/distance sur distance 17 - REMOTE
Servomoteur en cours de manoeuvre 18 - RUNNING
Servomoteur en cours d’ouverture 18 - OPENING
Fin de course fermeture 19 - LSC 19 - 20
Limiteur d’effort fermeture 19 - TSC
Relais 4 Servomoteur reçoit commande d’urgence (ESD) 20 - ESD
Servomoteur en cours de fermeture 20 - CLOSING
Sélecteur local/distance sur local 21 - LOCAL
Sélecteur local/distance sur distance 21 - REMOTE
7.1 Signalisations clignotantes

En standard, les informations :
➩ Servomoteur en cours de manoeuvre
➩ Servomoteur en cours d’ouverture
➩ Servomoteur en cours de fermeture
ne sont pas clignotantes
☞ Commutateur 11
Basculer le commutateur 11 sur la position B pour faire clignoter les trois informations
Les signalisations :
➩ Servomoteur en cours de manoeuvre
➩ Servomoteur en cours d’ouverture
➩ Servomoteur en cours de fermeture
sont clignotantes
7.2 Relais de signalisation N°1

En standard, le relais N°1 signale le fin de course ouverture. Cavalier 14 en position LSO (Limit Switch
Open).
☞ Cavalier 14
Déplacer le cavalier 14 en position TSO (Torque Switch Open) pour que le relais N°1 signale le
limiteur d’effort ouverture.
En standard, le relais N°1 est à contact normalement ouvert. Cavalier 22 en position
☞ Cavalier 22
Déplacer le cavalier 22 en position pour que le relais N°1 soit à contact normalement
fermé.
34
409/449
➯ Configuration du relais 1 : cavaliers 14 et 22

En standard, le relais N°2 signale la fin de course fermeture. Cavalier 15 en position LSC (Limit
Switch Close).
☞ Cavalier 15
Déplacer le cavalier 15 en position TSC (Torque Switch Close) pour que le relais N°2 signale le
limiteur d’effort fermeture.
☞ Cavalier 23
fermé.
➯ Configuration du relais 2 : cavaliers 15 et 23

En standard, le relais N°3 signale la fin de course ouverture. Cavalier 16 enposition LSO (Limit
Switch Open).
☞ Supports de cavalier 16, 17 et 18
NOTE : un seul cavalier est affecté aux 3 supports numéro 16, 17 et 18.
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 16 / TSO (Torque Switch Open) pour que le relais N°3 sig-
nale que le limiteur d’effort ouverture est activé.
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 17 / REMOTE pour que le relais N°3 signale que le
sélecteur local/distance est sur la position distance
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 17 / LOCAL pour que le relais N°3 signale que le sélecteur
local/distance est sur la position locale
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 18 / OPENING pour que le relais N°3 signale que le ser-
vomoteur est en cours d’ouverture
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 18 / RUNNING pour que le relais N°3 signale toute
manoeuvre.
35
410/449
☞ Cavalier 24
fermé.
➯ Configuration du relais 3 : cavaliers 16, 17, 18 et 24

➯ 1 seul cavalier pour les 3 supports 16,17 et 18

En standard, le relais N°4 signale le fin de course fermeture. Cavalier 19 en position LSC (Limit
Switch Close).
☞ Cavaliers 19, 20 et 21
NOTE : un seul cavalier est affecté aux 3 supports numéro 19, 20 et 21.
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 19 / TSC (Torque Switch Close) pour que le relais N°4 sig-
nale que le limiteur d’effort fermeture est activé.
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 20 / CLOSING pour que le relais N°4 signale le servomo-
teur en cours de fermeture.
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 20 / ESD (Emergency Shut Down) pour que le relais N°4
signale que le servomoteur reçoit une commande d’urgence (ESD).
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 21 / REMOTE pour que le relais N°4 signale le sélecteur
local/distance sur la position distance.
➩ Déplacer le cavalier sur le support 21 / LOCAL pour que le relais N°4 signale le sélecteur
local/distance sur la position locale.
En standard, le relais N°4 est à contact normalement ouvert. Cavalier sur le support 26
position
☞ Cavalier 26
fermé.
➯ Configuration du relais 4 : support cavalier N°19, 20, 21

et N°26
➯ 1 seul cavalier pour les supports 19, 20 et 21
36
411/449
7.6 Relais défaut
Le relais défaut signale une indisponibilité du servomoteur ou un fonctionnement anormal. Le
relais défaut est normalement sous tension, et retombe en cas de défaut comme par exemple :
➩ Perte d’alimentation puissance, contrôle, fusible
➩ Perte d’une phase (en alimentation triphasé)
➩ Déclenchement de la protection thermique moteur
➩ Perte de signal 4-20mA (avec option positionneur)*
➩ Sélecteur local/distance en position local ou arrêt**
* Sur une version sans positionneur, le commutateur N°2 n’a pas d’effet.
** Dans le cas d’une interdiction de commande locale, le commutateur sur position locale n’est
pas signalé comme un défaut, car le servomoteur est toujours disponible pour les commandes
à distance.
☞ Commutateur 2
Basculer le commutateur 2 sur la position B pour que la perte du signal 4-20mA ne soit pas un
défaut. (Option positionneur seulement).
☞ Commutateur 3
Basculer le commutateur 3 sur la position B pour que le commutateur local/distance sur local
ou arrêt ne soit pas un défaut.
☞ Commutateur 12
Basculer le commutateur 12 sur la position B pour qu'un déclenchement du limiteur d’effort fer-
meture soit un défaut.
☞ Commutateur 13
Basculer le commutateur 13 sur la position B pour que un déclenchement du limiteur d’effort
ouverture soit un défaut.
➯ La perte du signal 4-20mA

n’est pas un défaut. (Option
positionneur seulement).
➯ le commutateur local/distance
sur local ou arrêt n’est pas un
défaut.
➯ Un déclenchement du limiteur
d’effort fermeture est un défaut
37
412/449
➯ Un déclenchement du limiteur
d’effort ouverture est un défaut.
Remarque : Le système de surveillance est capable de détecter si la vanne se ferme sur limiteur
d’effort et dans ce cas n’indique pas de défaut.
8. PROTECTION FUSIBLES
Accessibilité :
➩ Mettre le servomoteur hors tension.
➩ Déposer le couvercle avec les bouttons de contrôle. Faire attention aux câbles à l’intérieur
du couvercle.
➩ Dévisser les bouchons des supports de fusible et changer les fusibles si nécessaire.
Caractéristiques des fusibles :
FU1 : fusible primaire transformateur 6,3 x 32mm - 0,5A - 500V
FU2 : fusible secondaire transformateur 5 x 20mm - 0,5A
FU3 : fusible secondaire transformateur 5 x 20mm - 0,05A
9. OPTION POSITIONNEUR
Un positionneur permet d’atteindre une position proportionnelle à un signal de commande. Le
panneau de configuration permet:
➩ De faire des commandes de positionnement local
➩ D’adapter le servomoteur au signal d’entrée
➩ De configurer la réaction du servomoteur en cas de perte de signal d’entrée
9.1 Configuration du signal d’entrée
Le standard est un signal d’entrée de 4-20mA
9.1.1 Utilisation d’un signal 0-20mA
☞ Commutateurs 4 et 8
Basculer les commutateurs 4 et 8 sur la position B pour un signal d'entrée 0-20mA. La recopie
de position est aussi en 0-20mA.
9.1.2 Utilisation d’un signal 0-10V
☞ Commutateur 4, 8, 9 et 10
Basculer les commutateurs 4, 8, 9 et 10 sur la position B pour utiliser un signal 0-10V. La recopie
de position est en 0-20mA.
9.2 Configuration du sens de manoeuvre
Le standard est 4 mA vanne fermée et 20mA vanne ouverte.
☞ Commutateur 3
☞ Connexion du potentiomètre
Basculer le commutateur 3 sur la position B, et déplacer la connexion du potentiomètre du ser-
vomoteur de la position “POT STD” à “POT REV” pour avoir 4mA vanne ouverte et 20mA
vanne fermée.
38
413/449
Configuration du sens de manoeuvre
Fermeture
Ouverture
Définition du 4mA 20mA 4mA 20mA
signal d’entrée 0mA 20mA 0mA 20mA
0v 10V
0v 10V
Action de la Fermeture sens Fermeture sens Fermeture sens Fermeture sens
vanne horaire anti-horaire horaire anti-horaire
Carte CI2701 : GAMK board: Carte CI2701 :
commutateur 7 switch 3 on B commutateur 7
Configuration Standard sur B Reverse poten- sur B
Potentiomètre tiometer Carte GAMK :
inversé commutateur 3 sur B
9.3 Configuration de la fonction seuil
Avec un signal d’entrée 4-20mA, il est possible de configurer une position de repli en cas de
coupure de signal de commande.
En standard, la fonction est active, et le servomoteur reste en position en cas de perte du signal.
☞ Commutateurs 5, 6 et 8
Basculer le commutateur 5 sur la position B pour que le servomoteur s’ouvre en cas de perte du signal
Basculer le commutateur 6 sur la position B pour que le servomoteur se ferme en cas de perte de signal
Basculer le commutateur 8 sur la position B pour désactiver la fonction seuil.
Attention : dans le cas d’un signal d’entré 0-20mA ou 0-10V, La fonction seuil ne peut pas être
utilisée et doit être désactivée. Basculer le commutateur 8 sur la position B.
9.4 Réglage de la bande morte

Ce réglage est fait en usine, mais il est possible d’ajuster par action sur le potentiomètre
“BANDE MORTE”. Pour réduire la bande morte tourner en sens antihoraire.
Attention : Une réduction trop importante de la bande morte amènera un “pompage” du ser-
vomoteur.
9.5 Manoeuvre locale

Il est possible de simuler un signal de consigne 4-20mA en local pour vérifier le fonctionnement
du servomoteur.
➩ AUT : Commande par signal externe
➩ 0% : Signal interne 0% (4mA en standard)
➩ MAN : Signal interne réglable de 0 à 100%
➩ 100 % : Signal interne 100% (20mA en standard)
Basculer le commutateur de commande locale sur la
0%,MAN ou 100%. Tourner le potentiomètre “MAN”
pour simuler un signal 4-20mA.
9.6 Réglage du 0%
Basculer le commutateur de commande manuelle sur la position 0% pour que le servomoteur
reçoive un ordre de fermeture (4mA).
39
414/449
Cas N°1: le servomoteur part en fermeture et s’arrête avant le fin de course fermeture.
Tourner le potentiomètre du servomoteur progressivement pour amener le ser-
vomoteur sur le fin de course fermeture, voyant allumé. Tourner lentement le
potentiomètre en sens inverse jusqu’à étendre le voyant rouge.
Cas N°2 : le servomoteur part en fermeture, s’arrête sur le fin de course fermeture,
et le voyant de fermeture est toujours allumé.
Tourner le potentiomètre du servomoteur progressivement pour éteindre le voy-
ant de fermeture.
9.7 Réglage du 100%
Basculer le commutateur de commande manuelle sur la position 100% pour que le servomo-
teur reçoive un ordre d’ouverture (20mA).
Cas N°1 : le servomoteur part en ouverture et s’arrête avant le fin de course ouverture.
Actionner le potentiomètre “ADJ 100%” (réglage du 100%) progressivement sens
horaire jusqu’à amener le servomoteur sur le fin de course ouverture. Tourner
lentement ce potentiomètre en sens inverse jusqu’à éteindre le voyant vert.
Cas N°2 : le servomoteur part en ouverture, s’arrête sur le fin de course ouverture,
et le voyant vert est toujours allumé.
Tourner le potentiomètre “ADJ 100%” (réglage du 100%) progressivement sens
antihoraire pour éteindre le voyant vert.
9.8 Les commandes fractionnées
La carte positionneur peut se configurer pour des commandes fractionnées.
On appelle commandes fractionnées les signaux d’entrée 4-12mA et 12-20mA. Le signal de
l’utilisateur est normal: 4-20mA. Un premier servomoteur est prévu pour recevoir un signal de
4 à 12mA et un deuxième est prévu pour recevoir un signal de 12 à 20mA. Chaque servomo-
teur reçoit le signal 4-20mA. Le premier s’ouvre complètement de 0 à 50% du signal et le sec-
ond de 50 à 100% du signal.
☞ Commutateur 1
☞ Commutateur 2
Basculer le commutateur 1 sur la position B pour que le servomoteur reçoive une commande
fractionnée 12-20mA.
Basculer le commutateur 2 sur la position B pour que le servomoteur reçoive une commande
fractionnée 4-12mA.
9.9 Utilisation d’un transmetteur 4-20mA
En standard on utilise le potentiomètre du servomoteur pour connaître la position de la vanne.
☞ Commutateur 7
Basculer le commutateur 7 sur la position B pour utiliser un transmetteur 4-20mA à la place du
potentiomètre du servomoteur.
9.10 Commandes à distance AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL
Avec un positionneur, il est possible de faire des commandes à distance par un signal 4-20mA
ou par des commandes ouverture/fermeture/stop. L’entrée sur le bornier client AUTO/ON-OFF
CONTROL permet de basculer d’un type de commande à l’autre.
Voir le chapitre 5 “commande à distance” pour la configuration des commandes ouverture fermeture.
40
415/449
Nota : les commandes à distances “AUTO/ON-OFF CONTROL” et “Interdiction de commande
locale” utilisent la même entrée sur le bornier client. L’installation du positionneur affecte
automatiquement cette entrée à la fonction AUTO/ON-OFF CONTROL. La fonction interdiction
de commande locale n’est pas utilisable avec le positionneur.
10. OPTION SIGNALISATION LOCALE

En option une signalisation lumineuse visible à travers un hublot au niveau de la commande
locale indique l’état du servomoteur.
➩ Voyant vanne ouverte
➩ Voyant vanne fermée
➩ Voyant servomoteur sous tension
11. OPTION CARTE DE TEMPORISATION
Un module additionnelle temporisateur permet de réduire la vitesse de fonctionnement du ser-
vomoteur, par exemple pour protéger une canalisation contre les coups de bélier.
Ce module est raccordé sur l'entrée P202TEMPO de la commande INTEGRALE+ du servomo-
teur. Quand l'ordre est envoyé, une temporisation effectue une commande cadencée
marche/arrêt du contacteur. Le temps de marche ON et le temps d'arrêt OFF sont réglables
: T.ON : 0,5 à 10 sec
T.OFF : 3 sec à 2 mn
Le temps de manœuvre de la pleine course peut ainsi atteindre des temps très longs et de plus
être ajustable sur site.
Les réglages dans le sens Ouverture et dans le sens Fermeture sont indépendants.
En utilisant un fin de course auxiliaire, il est possible de court-circuiter la temporisation tant que
le microcontact est actionné. Ce dispositif permet de faire fonctionner le servomoteur à pleine
vitesse sur une partie de la course. La longueur de la came de fin de course représente environ
10% de la course totale.
CYCLE DE FONCTIONNEMENT Open
1/ Contact auxiliaire ouverture.
2/ Contact auxiliaire fermeture. 1 4
5
3/ Ouverture lente.
4/ Ouverture rapide. 3
5/ Fermeture rapide.
6/ Fermeture lente.
2 6
7/ Réglage du temps d'arrêt sens ouverture.
Close
8/ Réglage du temps de marche sens ouverture. Time
9/ Réglage du temps de marche sens fermeture.

10/ Réglage du temps d'arrêt sens fermeture.
11/ Connexion des contacts auxiliaires éventuels
12/ Connexion de la carte INTEGRAL+.
41
416/449
12. RESOLUTION DE PROBLEMES SUR LA VERSION INTEGRAL+
Si le fonctionnement de l’appareil semble douteux, placer en premier lieu le sélecteur local/dis-
tance sur la position locale, et agir sur les commandes ouverture et fermeture.
PROBLEME CAUSE REMEDE

Rien ne fonctionne Alimentation du servo- Vérifier la tension d'alimentation (bornes 1, 2,
moteur 3 en triphasé ou 0,1 en monophasé). La ten-
sion est indiquée sur la plaque signalétique.
Un ordre d'interdiction Vérifier que le servomoteur ne reçoit pas une
de commande locale est interdiction de commande locale.
présent. Hors exploitation, on peut éventuellement
retirer le fil d'interdiction de commande
locale, raccordé borne 11 pour vérifier le fonc-
tionnement du servomoteur.
Un ordre commande Vérifier que le servomoteur ne reçoit pas une
d'urgence est présent et commande d'urgence.
interdit toute autre com- Hors exploitation, on peut éventuellement
mande. retirer le cavalier N°27 de la carte CI2701 en
prenant la précaution de bien noter sa posi-
tion pour le replacer dans la bonne position.
Cavalier retiré, la fonction ESD est supprimée,
ce qui permet de vérifier le fonctionnement du
servomoteur. Remettre le cavalier en place.
Fusible coupé. Vérifier l'état des fusibles et les remplacer si
nécessaire.
Configuration du type Vérifier la position du cavalier 100 de la carte
d'alimentation. CI2701
En triphasé position T
En monophasé ou CC position M
Déclenchement protec- Le voyant TH sur le panneau de configuration
tion thermique moteur de la carte CI2701 indique la présence d'un
déclenchement thermique. Le servomoteur
sera de nouveau disponible après refroidisse-
ment du moteur.
Le volant débrayable de Vérifier que le volant est bien en position
commande manuelle est débrayée.
resté enclenché (unique-
ment version avec contact
de sécurité électrique).
Des cavaliers de configu- Il doit y avoir 11 cavaliers sur la carte CI2701
rations sont mal posi- Il ne doit y avoir qu'un seul cavalier sur le
tionnés ou manquants groupe de support cavalier 16-17-18 et un
seul cavalier sur le groupe de support cavalier
19-20-21.
42
417/449
Le servomoteur Sélecteur local/distance Basculer le sélecteur local / distance sur la
fonctionne en sur local ou off (arrêt) position distance
local mais pas à Commande par contact : Vérifier qu'il existe un shunt au bornier client
distance pas de tension entre les entre les bornes 5 et 6.
bornes 6 et 7. Vérifier le fusible FU3 de la carte CI2701
Commande par tension : Vérifier le raccordement en commande par
tension non adaptée à tension :
l'entrée. Tension de 10 à 55 Volt : Bornier 5
Tension de 55 à 250 Volt : Bornier 4
Le servomoteur Sélecteur local/distance Basculer le sélecteur local / distance sur la
fonctionne en sur distance ou off (arrêt) position locale
distance mais Un ordre d'interdiction Vérifier que le servomoteur ne reçoit pas une
de commande locale est interdiction de commande locale.
pas en local
Hors exploitation, on peut éventuellement
présent retirer le fil d'interdiction de commande
locale, raccordé borne 11 pour vérifier le fonc-
tionnement du servomoteur.
Le servomoteur Configuration non adaptée. Vérifier la configuration du sens de rotation
ne tourne pas Commutateur N°7 de la carte CI2701 :
dans le bon sens Position A : fermeture sens horaire
de rotation. Position B : fermeture sens anti-horaire
Le moteur à été décablé Lors d'un changement de moteur, il faut
et tourne en sens respecter les repères des fils. En cas de doute,
vérifier la conformité du sens de rotation.
inverse (changement de
L'inversion de sens de rotation du moteur se fait
moteur par exemple) en permutant les fils 2 et 3 du bornier moteur
dans le compartiment des connexions.
Le servomoteur Le servomoteur est configuré Vérifier la configuration de fermeture (com-
ne s'arrête pas pour se fermer sur couple mutateur 1 de la carte CI2701)
Le fin de course ferme- Régler le fin de course fermeture. Le fin de course
sur le fin de
ture est mal réglé. fermeture doit être actionné vanne fermée
course ferme-
(même si le servomoteur ferme sur couple)
ture.
Le moteur a été décablé Lors d'un changement de moteur, il faut
inverse (changement de
L'inversion de sens de rotation du moteur se
moteur)
fait en permutant les fils 2 et 3 du bornier
moteur dans le compartiment des connexions.
Le servomoteur Le fin de course ouver- Régler le fin de course ouverture. Il doit être
ne s'arrête pas ture est mal réglé actionné vanne ouverte
sur le fin de Le moteur a été décablé Lors d'un changement de moteur, il faut
course ouver- et tourne en sens respecter les repères des fils. En cas de doute,
ture inverse (changement de L'inversion de sens de rotation du moteur se
moteur) fait en permutant les fils 2 et 3 du bornier
moteur dans le compartiment des connexions.
43
418/449
Aucune signali- Servomoteur hors ten- Les signalisations ne sont disponibles que
sation sion servomoteur sous tension
Aucune Mauvaise configura- Vérifier que le relais de signalisation con-
signalisation des tion cerné a été configuré en signalisation lim-
limiteurs d'efforts iteur d'effort. Le cavalier de la carte
CI2701 est sur :
TSO pour limiteur d'effort ouverture
TSC pour limiteur d'effort fermeture
Le limiteur d'effort a été L'électronique ne mémorise les limiteurs
sollicité manuellement d'effort que si une manoeuvre est en cours
et que celui correspondant au sens de rota-
tion en cours.
Signalisation limi- Mémorisation du lim- Les limiteurs d'effort sont mémorisés élec-
teur d'effort reste iteur d'effort troniquement. Pour démémoriser un limi-
activée quand le teur d'effort, il est nécessaire d'envoyer un
limiteur d'effort ordre inverse.
n'est plus actionné
13 RESOLUTION DE PROBLEMES SUR LA VERSION POSITIONNEUR
Si le fonctionnement de l’appareil semble douteux, placer en premier lieu le sélecteur local/dis-
tance sur la position locale, et agir sur les commandes ouverture et fermeture locales.
Rien ne fonctionne Alimentation du servo- Vérifier la tension d'alimentation (bornes
moteur 1, 2, 3 en triphasé ou 0,1 en mono-
phasé). La tension est indiquée sur la
Un ordre commande Vérifier que le servomoteur ne reçoit pas
d'urgence est présent et une commande d'urgence.
interdit toute autre com- Hors exploitation, on peut éventuelle-
ment retirer le cavalier N°27 de la carte
mande.
CI2701 en prenant la précaution de bien
noter sa position pour le replacer dans la
bonne position. Cavalier retiré, la fonc-
tion ESD est supprimée, ce qui permet de
vérifier le fonctionnement du servomo-
teur. Remettre le cavalier en place.
Fusible coupé Vérifier l'état des fusibles de la carte CI2701.
Configuration du type Vérifier la position du cavalier 100 de la carte
d'alimentation. CI2701 : en triphasé position T, en
monophasé ou CC position M
Déclenchement protection Le voyant TH sur le panneau de configuration
thermique moteur de la carte CI2701 indique la présence d'un
déclenchement thermique. Le servomoteur
sera de nouveau disponible après refroidisse-
ment du moteur.
44
419/449
Rien ne fonc- Le volant débrayable de Vérifier que le volant est bien en position
tionne commande manuelle est débrayée.
resté enclenché (unique-
ment version avec contact
de sécurité électrique). Il doit y avoir 11 cavaliers sur la carte CI2701
Des cavaliers de configu- Il ne doit y avoir qu'un seul cavalier sur le groupe
rations sont mal posi- de support cavalier 16-17-18 et un seul cavalier
tionnés ou manquants sur le groupe de supports cavalier 19-20-21.
Le servomoteur Sélecteur local / distance Basculer le sélecteur local / distance sur la
fonctionne en sur local ou arrêt position distance pour utiliser le positionneur.
commande (Même lorsque le positionneur est sur position
manuelle)
ouverture / fer-
Un ordre Auto / on-off con- Vérifier que le servomoteur ne reçoit pas de
meture locale,
trol est présent et interdit l'u- commande Auto / on-off. Eventuellement,
mais pas en tester en débranchant le fil de la borne 11.
tilisation du positionneur
positionneur Vérifier la liaison GAM-K - carte CI2701.
Problème de connexion
entre cartes CI2701 et
positionneur (GAM-K)
Potentiomètre de recopie Tourner le potentiomètre du servomoteur d'un
du servomoteur mal quart de tour et reprendre les essais suivant la
positionné notice de mise en service.
Mauvaise adaptation au Vérifier la configuration sur la carte positionneur:
signal d'entrée. Signal entrée 4-20mA :
Commutateurs 4, 8, 9, 10 sur A
Signal entrée 0-20mA :
Commutateurs 4, 8 sur B
Commutateurs 9, 10 sur A
Signal entrée 0-10V :
Commutateurs 4, 8, 9, 10 sur B
Le servomoteur Potentiomètre inversé La connexion du potentiomètre est sur la posi-
ne suit pas le tion POT STD pour:
- 4mA (ou 0mA ou 0V suivant le signal)
signal d'entrée = position fermée et fermeture sens horaire
= position ouverte et fermeture sens anti-horaire
La connexion du potentiomètre doit être sur la
position POT REV pour:
= position fermée et fermeture sens anti-
horaire
= position ouverte et fermeture sens horaire
Signal inversé ou mau- Vérifier la configuration du signal.
vaise configuration Commutateur N°3 sur carte positionneur
Position A : 4mA = vanne fermée
Position B : 4mA = vanne ouverte
45
420/449
Le servomoteur Sens de rotation inversé Vérifier la configuration du sens de rotation
ne suit pas le Commutateur N°7 sur la carte INTEGRAL+ :
signal d'entrée Position A : fermeture sens horaire
Position B : ouverture sens anti-horaire
Potentiomètre de recopie Tourner le potentiomètre de 1/4 de tour et
du servomoteur mal reprendre les réglages suivant la notice de
positionné mise en service.
Le moteur a été décablé En cas de doute, vérifier la conformité du sens de
et tourne en sens rotation. L'inversion de sens de rotation du moteur
inverse (changement de se fait en permutant les fils 1 et 2 du bornier
moteur) moteur dans le compartiment des connexions.
Le servomoteur Le commutateur Auto - Vérifier la position du commutateur Auto - 0% -
fonctionne en 0% - 100% n'est pas 100% sur la carte positionneur
positionneur en en position Auto
Signal défectueux Vérifier le signal de consigne avec un mil-
local mais pas à
liampèremetre branché en série (borne 30)
distance Polarité du signal Vérifier que le positif (+) du signal arrive sur la
borne 30. Vérifier la connexion du potentiomètre.
Le servomoteur Le servomoteur est con- Vérifier la configuration de fermeture (commuta-
ne s'arrête pas sur figuré pour se fermer teur 1 sur carte CI2701)
le fin de course sur couple
fermeture. Le fin de course ferme- Régler le fin de course fermeture. Le fin de
ture est mal réglé. course fermeture doit être actionné vanne fer-
mée (même si le servomoteur ferme sur couple)
La position 0% est mal réglée Réglage du potentiomètre du servomoteur
Le moteur a été décablé En cas de doute, vérifier la conformité du sens de
et tourne en sens rotation. L'inversion de sens de rotation du moteur
inverse (changement de se fait en permutant les fils 1 et 2 du bornier
moteur) moteur dans le compartiment des connexions.
Le servomoteur Le fin de course ouver- Régler le fin de course ouverture. Le fin de course
ne s'arrête pas ouverture doit être actionné vanne ouverte.
ture est mal réglé
sur le fin de La position 100% est Réglage du potentiomètre 100% de la carte
course ouverture mal réglée positionneur
Le moteur a été décablé Lors d'un changement de moteur, il faut
inverse (changement de vérifier la conformité du sens de rotation.
L'inversion de sens de rotation du moteur se fait
moteur) en permutant les fils 1 et 2 du bornier moteur.
Aucune signali- Mauvaise configuration Vérifier que le relais de signalisation concerné a
sation des limi- été configuré en signalisation limiteur d'effort.
teurs d'effort Le cavalier de la carte INTEGRAL+ est sur :
TSO pour limiteur d'effort ouverture
TSC pour limiteur d'effort fermeture
Le limiteur d'effort a été L'électronique ne mémorise les limiteurs d'ef-
sollicité manuellement fort que si une manoeuvre est en cours. Elle
ne mémorise de plus que le limiteur d'effort
correspondant au sens de rotation.
46
421/449
Aucune signali- Servomoteur hors ten- Les signalisations ne sont disponibles que servo-
sation sion moteur sous tension
Signalisation limi- Mémorisation du limi- Les limiteurs d'effort sont mémorisés électron-
teur d'effort reste teur d'effort iquement. Pour démémoriser un limiteur d'ef-
activée quand le fort, il est nécessaire d'envoyer un ordre
limiteur d'effort inverse.
n'est plus actionné
S i g n a l i s a t i o n Le signal de consigne Envoyer un signal de commande sur l'entrée
défaut alors que n'est pas présent. En
le servomoteur standard, le servomo-
fonctionne nor- teur signale un défaut
malement et reste en position
Le sélecteur est sur la Mettre le sélecteur sur la position distance
position local ou
off . En standard, le
servomoteur signale un
défaut.
14. USER'S SETTINGS / CONFIGURATION UTILISATEUR (*)

INTEGRAL+ (CI2701)
1 A B POSITIONER GAM-K
2 A B 1 A B
3 A B
Jumpers & Switches / Cavaliers & Commutateurs
4 A B 2 A B
5 A B 3 A B
6 A B 4 A B
7 A B 5 A B
8 A B
A B
6 A B
9
10 A B 7 A B
11 A B 8 A B
12 A B 9 A B
13 A B 10 A B
14 LSO TSO
15 LSC TSC
16/17/18 LSO TSO Local Remote Running Opening
(*) Circle or highlight the
19/20/21 LSC TSC ESD Closing Local Remote
options corresponding to
22 your system settings
23
24 Cerclez ou surlignez les
25 50 200 valeurs correspondant à la
26 configuration de votre
27 système.
28 close open
47
422/449
INHALT
SCHALTPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1. EINLEITUNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
2. KONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3. SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.1 Spannungsversorgung des Antriebs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.2 Spannungsversorgungsausgang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
4. ARBEITSWEISE DES ANTRIEBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
4.1 Drehrichtung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
4.2 Weg- oder Drehmomentabhängiges Abschalten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
4.3 Drehmomentüberbrückung beim Anfahren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
4.4 Reversierzeit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5. FERNSTEUERUNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5.1 Ansteuern mit potentialfreien Kontakten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5.2 Ansteuerung mit externer Steuerspannung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5.3 Ansteuern mit nur einem Kontakt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
5.4 Vorrang für AUF oder ZU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
5.5 Notfahrbefehl (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
5.6 Ortssteuerstelle verriegeln / blockieren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
6. ORTSSTEUERSTELLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
6.1 Selbsthaltung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
6.2 Stopp-Funktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
6.3 Not-Ausschaltung (OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
6.4 Abschliessbarer Ort-/Fern-Umschalter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
7. MELDUNGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
7.1 Blinkgeber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
7.2 Meldung Relais 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
7.3 Meldung Relais 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
7.4 Meldung Relais 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
7.5 Meldung Relais 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
7.6 Alarmrelais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
8. SICHERUNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
9. ZUBEHÖR-POSITIONER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
9.1 Eingangssignal-Einstellung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
9.1.1 Betrieb mit Eingangssignal 0-20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
9.1.2 Betrieb mit Eingangssignal 0-10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
9.2 Einstellung der Arbeitsweise (Drehrichtung) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
9.3 Einstellung der ‘’STAY-PUT”-Funktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
9.4 Totband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
9.5 Probebetrieb vor Ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
9.6 0%-Einstellung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
9.7 100%-Einstellung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
9.8 Split range (Geteiltes Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
9.9 Stellungsabfrage mit elektronischem Stellungsrückmelder TAM 4-20mA . . . . . . . . .62
9.10 Fernansteuerung AUTO-/EIN-AUS Steuerung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
10. ZUBEHÖR : TAKTGEBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
11. ZUBEHÖR : MELDELEUCHTEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
12. WAS TUN WENN ... MÖGLICHE FUNKTIONSFEHLER BEI DER INTEGRAL-PLUS . . . . . . . .64
13. WAS TUN WENN ... MÖGLICHE FUNKTIONSFEHLER BEI POSIGAM-/MODUGAM-PLUS . . . . . . . .67
14. BENUTZEREINSTELLUNGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
48
423/449
1. EINLEITUNG
Die Einstellmöglichkeiten auf der INTEGRAL+-Karte ermöglichen den problemlosen Anschluß an
jede Steuerungs-Applikation. Antriebs-Grundeinstellungen und Informationsübermittlung werden
durch Dil-Schalter und Jumper ermöglicht. Der Antrieb ist, falls in der Bestellung nicht gegenteilig
vermerkt, in der Grundeinstellung konfiguriert.
Die Konfigurationen lassen sich vor Ort auf die spezifischen Bedürfnisse anpassen.
2. KONFIGURATION
Die Konfiguration wird sehr einfach durch DIL-Schalter und Jumper ausgeführt.
Abb. 2 Abb. 3
DIL-Schalter Konfiguration Jumper Konfiguration
In der « Standard »-Einstellung (meistens

gebräuchlich), befinden sich alle Schalter und Jumper in Position A.
3. SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG
3.1. SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG DES ANTRIEBS
Die Spannungsversorgung des Antriebs kann mit Dreh-, Wechsel- oder Gleichspannung erfolgen.
☞ Jumper 100 Einstellung (auf unterer Platine)
Die Elektronik beinhaltet eine automatische Phasenfolge-Korrektur und erkennt den Ausfall
einer Phase. Bei Drehstrombetrieb arbeitet der Antrieb dadurch immer mit der korrekten
Drehrichtung. Falls bei Drehstrombetrieb eine Phase ausfällt, stoppt der Antrieb automatisch
und das Alarmrelais meldet eine Fehler.
Bei Wechsel- oder Gleichspannungsanschluß wird durch Positionierung des Jumpers in Stellung
M die Phasenkorrektur und die Fehleranzeige unterdrückt.
B
A BASIC
M
T
CAV100
14
➯ Wechsel- oder Gleichspannungsversorgung
1
TSO
19V
LSO
2
RELAY1
3
23V 4
22
3.2 SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNGSAUSGANG
Die Integral+ Elektronik (Platine CI2701) stellt eine externe Gleichspannung 23V – 1.2VA für die
Versorgung externer potentialfreier Steuerkontakte oder für die Versorgung eines elektroni-
schen Stellungsmelders z. B. TAM zur Verfügung. Die Steuerelektronik ist vom
Spannungsversorgungsausgang galvanisch getrennt
49
424/449
4. ARBEITSWEISE DES ANTRIEBES
4.1 Drehrichtung
In der Standardeinstellung schließt der Antrieb im Uhrzeigersinn.
☞ Schalter 7
Bringen Sie Schalter 7 in Position B, um die Schließrichtung in « Gegen-Uhrzeigersinn » einzus-
tellen. Dieser Schalter ändert :
➩ Die Drehrichtung des Motors
➩ Die Wegschalterzuordnung
➩ Die Drehmomentschalter-Zuordnung
➯ Schließrichtung gegen den

Uhrzeigersinn
4.2 Weg- oder Drehmomentabhängiges Abschalten

In der Standard-Einstellung schließt der Antrieb über den Wegschalter-Kontakt.
☞ Schalter 1
Stellen Sie Schalter 1 in Position B, um eine Schließen über Drehmoment zu erreichen. Der zuge-
hörige Wegschalter muß ebenfalls betätigt werden.
➯ Schließen mit Drehmomentschalter
Der Wegschalter wird zusätlich benutzt, um die « ZU »-Position zu signalisieren. So erfolgt eine Kontrolle,
daß der Drehmomentschalter nicht in Mittelstellung schaltet, sondern in normaler « ZU »-Position.
4.3 Drehmomentüberbrückung beim Anfahren
In der Standardeinstellung arbeitet die Drehmomentüberwachung über den gesamten Stellweg.
☞ Schalter 6
Bringen Sie den Schalter 6 in Position B, wenn eine Drehmomentüberbrückung beim
Herausfahren aus der Geschlossen-Position gefordert ist.
➯ Drehmoment - Schalter - Über

brückung durch den Wegschalter-
Kontakt in « ZU »-Position.
50
425/449
Der Schalter 1 auf B muß bei Antrieben mit einer Drehmomentabschaltung, die Dauerkontakt
(Baureihe SR) liefern, benutzt werden. Das verhindert das Auslösen des Drehmomentschalters
beim Anfahren.
4.4 Reversierzeit
Die Standardversion sieht eine Reversiertzeit von 50 ms vor. Jumper auf Reiter 25 in Position 50 ms.
☞ Jumper / Sockel 25
Um eine Reversierzeit von 200 ms einzustellen, bringen Sie den Jumper auf Reiter 25 in Position
200 ms.
RELAY 3
25
➯ Reversierzeit : 200 ms
50ms inp
200ms Eme
Hinweis : die Einstellung der Reversierzeit ist eine werkseitige Einstellung. Eine längere
Reversierzeit erlaubt den Einsatz von größeren Einphasenmotoren.
5. FERNSTEUERUNG
Die Fernsteuerung kann durch eine externe Steuerspannung oder durch die von der INTEGRAL+
zur Verfügung gestellte Spannung versorgt werden. Die Eingänge sind durch Optokoppler von
der Elektronik getrennt. Der Impuls-Betrieb (mit Selbsthaltung) erfordert 4 Leitungen zur kun-
denspezifischen Steuereinheit (z.B. Prozeßleitsystem) : Gemeinsame Leitung, Stopp, Auf, Zu. Im
Tipp-Betrieb entfällt die Stopp-Funtion und der Antrieb läßt sich mit AUF und ZU ansteuern.
5.1 Ansteuerung mit potentialfreien Kontakten
Zur Ansteuerung mit potentialfreien Kontakten legt man auf der Klemmleiste zwischen
Klemmen 5 und 6 eine Brücke.
5.2 Ansteuern mit externer Steuerspannung
Die Steuerspannung kann eine Wechsel- oder eine Gleichspannung sein.
51
426/449
Für niedere Spannungen zwischen 10 und 55V verwendet man die Klemme 5.
Für höhere Spannungen zwischen 55 und 250V die Klemme 4.
Achtung : Legen Sie niemals eine höhere Spannung als 55V an Klemme 5 ! Zerstörung der
Elektronik !
5.3 Ansteuern mit nur einem Kontakt

Es ist möglich, den Antrieb mit nur einem Kontakt AUF und ZU zu fahren.
➩ Kontakt geschlossen : Armatur öffnet
➩ Kontakt offen : Armatur schließt
Neben der Verdrahtung auf der Klemmenleiste müssen auch entsprechende Schalter (siehe
Kapitel 5.4) auf den Vorrang zum Öffnen eingestellt werden.
Die Umkehrung ist ebenfalls möglich :
➩ Kontakt geschlossen : Armatur schließt
➩ Kontakt offen : Armatur öffnet
Hierbei muß die Priorität zum Schließen über die entsprechenden Schalter (siehe Kapitel 5.4)
eingestellt werden.
5.4 Vorrang für AUF oder ZU

In der Standard-Einstellung besteht kein Vorrang für AUF oder ZU. Der Vorrang kann in folgen-
den Fällen sinnvollsein :
➩ Beim Drehrichtungswechsel während des AUF oder ZU-Fahrens, ohne die Stopp-Funktion zu
nutzen : in diesem Fall werden die Einstellungen für Vorrang AUF oder ZU benötigt.
➩ Beim Vorrang für eine Richtung : falls der Antrieb beide Fahrbefehle erhält, ist eine Angabe
des Vorrangs notwendig.
➩ Bei Ansteuerung mit nur einem Kontakt
☞ Schalter 9 und 10
Bringen Sie Schalter 9 in Stellung B bei Vorrang für Schließen.
Bringen Sie Schalter 10 in Stellung B bei Vorrang für Öffnen.
➯ Vorrang für Schließen
52
427/449
➯ Vorrang für Öffnen
➯ Drehrichtungswechsel
ohne Stopp-Befehl
Der „Vorrang“ Befehl stoppt die laufende Operation und ist sofort aktiv
5.5 Notfahrbefehl (ESD)
Der Notfahrbefehl ESD (Emergency Shut Down) ist eine Fernsteuer-Notfunktion, welche
Vorrang vor allen anderen Steuersignalen / Fahrbefehlen hat. Abhängig von der Aufgabe der
Armatur, kann der Notfahrbefehl diese öffnen oder schließen. Um in Extremsituationen die
Verfügbarkeit des Antriebes zu gewährleisten, kann ESD auch den Temperaturwächterkontakt
im Motor überbrücken.
Achtung : ESD ist ohne Funktion, wenn sich der Schalter der Ortssteuerstelle auf « OFF » befindet.
Standardmäßig wird die Notfahrt durch einen Schließkontakt ausgelöst. Der Jumper auf Sockel
27 steht in Position
☞ Jumper Sockel 27
Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 27 in Position , erfolgt die ESD-Funktion durch einen
Öffner-Kontakt.
Achtung : in der Einstellung « Öffner-Kontakt » fährt der Antrieb, bei fehlendem
Eingangssignal, in eine Endlage. Es wird daher empfohlen, vor dem Einschalten einen Jumper
auf den ESD-kontakt zu setzen.
In der Standardeinstellung bewirkt der ESD-Befehl ein Schließen der Armatur. Der Jumper auf
Sockel 28 steht in Position CLOSE.
Um ein Öffnen zu bewirken bringen Sie den Jumper in Position OPEN.
In der Standardeinstellung überbrückt der Notfahrbefehl den Temperaturwächterkontakt im
Motor nicht.
☞ Schalter 8
Bringen Sie Schalter 8 in Position B, um während der Notfahr-Funktion den
Temperaturwächterkontakt zu überbrücken.
➯ Einstellung des Notfahrbefehls : Jumper 27 und 28
53
428/449
➯ Überbrückung des
Temperaturwächterkontaktes
beim Notfahrbefehl ESD
5.6 Ortssteuerstelle verriegeln / blockieren

Die Verriegelung der Ortssteuerstelle ist durch ein Fernsignal möglich.
Dieser Befehl blockiert die Funktion AUF, ZU an der Ortssteuerstelle und ermöglicht ein Fahren
des Antriebes über Fernsignal auch in Stellung des LOCAL / REMOTE-Schalters auf LOCAL.
In der Standard-Einstellung bleiben die Funktion LOCAL-STOP und OFF an der Ortssteuerstelle
erhalten.
Um LOCAL-STOP und OFF zu verhindern, kann man Schalter 4 auf B stellen (siehe Kapitel 6.3).
Hinweis : ist die Steuerung mit dem Zubehör-Positioner (Elektronikkarte GAM-K) zur
Verarbeitung von (0)4 bis 20 mA (0-10V) Eingang ausgerüstet, so ist die Funktion «
Ortsteuerstelle verriegeln » nicht möglich. Sie wird automatisch durch die Funktion « AUTO –
Automatikbetrieb mit (0)4 … 20 mA (0-10V) - /ON-OFF CONTROLFernbetrieb mit AUF/ZU-
Befehlen- » ersetzt.
6. ORTSSTEUERSTELLE
Die Ortssteuerstelle erlaubt ein Umschalten von Fernbetrieb (REMOTE/DISTANCE) und vor-Ort-
Bedienung (LOCAL). Ein zweiter Schalter ermöglicht das das AUF- und ZU-Fahren des Antriebes
bei vor-Ort-Steuerung (Schalterstellung LOCAL). Die Stopp-Funktion wird durch ein kurzes
Drehen des LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalters ausgelöst.
6.1 Selbsthaltung
In der Standard-Einstellung funktionniert die vor-Ort-Befehlsfunktion mit Selbsthaltung. (Ein
AUF- oder ZU-Impuls reicht, um den Antrieb in die Auf- oder Zu-Position zu fahren.
☞ Schalter 5
Zum Abschalten der Selbsthaltung stellen Sie Schalter 5 auf B (Schalter muß dann festgehalten
werden, um in AUF- oder ZU-Position zu fahren).
➯ Vor-Ort-Steuerung ohne
Selbsthaltung
54
429/449
6.2 Stopp-Funktion
In der Standard-Einstellung erlaubt die Ortssteuerstelle ein Abschalten des Antriebes in der vor-
Ort (LOCAL) bzw. Fern (REMOTE)-Einstellung.
☞ Verriegelungs-Einsatz (Locking pin)
Um die Stopp-Möglichkeit bei Fernbetrieb zu verhindern, setzten Sie den Verriegelungs-Einsatz
in den Stellknopf.
Hinweis : das Blockieren ist nur dann sinnvoll, wenn der Schalter in Fernsteuerstellung
(REMOTE) mit einem Schloß verriegelt wird.
6.3 NOT-AUS Schaltung (OFF)
In der Standard-Einstellung erlaubt die Ortssteuerstelle ein NOT-AUS (OFF). Bringen Sie dazu
den LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter in Stellung OFF. Nun sind keinerlei Befehle (weder in LOCAL noch
in REMOTE-Stellung) ausführbar.
Wird der Fernbefehl « Ortssteuerstelle verriegeln / blockieren » benutzt, bleibt dennoch die
Priorität für den NOT-AUS (OFF)-Befehl bestehen.
☞ Schalter 4
Bringen Sie Schalter 4 in Stellung B, um beim Befehl « Ortssteuerstelle blockieren » LOCAL-
STOP und OFF zu unterdrücken.
➯ LOCAL-STOP und OFF

nicht möglich bei Befehl
« Ortssteuerstelle blockieren »
6.4 Abschließbarer Ort - / Fern-Umschalter

Der Ort (LOCAL) /Fern-(REMOTE) Umschalter kann mit einem Vorhängeschloß in den Positionen
OFF, vor-Ort (LOCAL) oder Fern (REMOTE) verriegelt werden.
7. MELDUNGEN
Die Rückmeldungen der INTEGRAL-Steuerung werden mit 5 Relais ausgeführt :
➩ Vier Relais zur Meldung der Funktionen. Die Kontaktausführung kann auf « Schließer » oder
« Öffner » eingestellt werden.
Hinweis : potentialfreie Kontakte, spannungslos sind die Relaiskontakte offen.
➩ Ein Ruhestrom-Relais zur Meldung von Fehlern und Ausfällen.
Hinweis : das Relais ist im Normalzstand mit Spannung versorgt und fällt bei Spannungsabfall ab.
Informationen der Relais :

(Grau : Standard-Einstellung)
55
430/449
Relais Nr Übermittelte Information Einstellung der jumper Anschlußklemme
Relais 1 Wegschalter AUF 14 - LSO 13 - 14
Drehmomentschalter AUF 14 - TSO
Relais 2 Wegschalter ZU 15 - LSC 15 - 16
Drehmomentschalter ZU 15 - TSC
Wegschalter AUF 16 - LSO 17 - 18
Drehmomentschalter AUF 16 - TSO
Relais 3 LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter auf LOCAL 17 - LOCAL
LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter auf REMOTE 17 - REMOTE
Antrieb fährt elektrisch 18 - RUNNING
Antrieb öffnet elektrisch 18 - OPENING
Wegschalter ZU 19 - LSC 19 - 20
Drehmomentschalter ZU 19 - TSC
Relais 4 Antrieb erhält Notfahrbefehl (ESD) 20 - ESD
Antrieb schließt elektrisch 20 - CLOSING
LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter auf LOCAL 21 - LOCAL
LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter auf REMOTE 21 - REMOTE
7.1 Blinkgeber
In der Standardeinstellung geben die Meldungen :
➩ Antrieb fährt elektrisch
➩ Antrieb öffnet elektrisch
➩ Antrieb schließt elektrisch
Dauerkontakt
☞ Schalter 11
Um anstelle des Dauersignals ein Blinksignal zu erhalten, stellen Sie Schalter 11 in Position B.
Meldungen
➩ Antrieb fährt
➩ Antrieb öffnet
➩ Antrieb schließt
Als Blinkkontakte
7.2 Meldung Relais 1

In der Standardeinstellung meldet Relais 1 « Wegschalter AUF ». Der Jumper auf Sockel 14 steht
in Position LSO (LIMIT SWITCH OPEN – Wegschalter offen).
Um das Ansprechen des Drehmomentschalters durch Relais 1 anzuzeigen, bringen Sie Jumper
auf Sockel 14 in Position TSO (TORQUE SWITCH OPEN – Drehmomentschalter öffnen).
In der Standardausführung, ist der Kontakt des Relais 1 als Schließer ausgeführt. Der Jumper
auf Sockel 22 steht in Position
Um den Kontakt in Relais 1 als Öffner zu benutzen, bringen Se den Jumper auf Sockel 22 in die
Position
➯ Einstellungvon Relais 1 : Jumper Sockel 14 und 22
56
431/449
7.3 Melding Relais 2
In der Standardeinstellung meldet Relais 2 « Wegschalter ZU ». Jumper auf Sockel 15 steht in
Position LSC (Limit Switch Close).
Durch Ändern des Jumpers auf Sockel 15 in Position TSC (Torque Switch Close) meldet Relais 2
« Drehmomentschalter schließen ».
In der Standardeinstellung ist der Kontaktvon Relais 2 als Schließer ausgeführt. Der Jumper auf
Sockel 23 steht in Position
Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 23 in Position , um den Kontakt von Relais 2 als Öff-
ner zu nutzen.
➯ Einstellung zu Relais 2 : Jumper auf Sockel 15 und 23

In der Standardeinstellung meldet Relais 3 « Wegschalter AUF ». Der Jumper auf Sockel 16
befindet sich in Position LSO (Limit Switch Open).
☞ Jumper Sockel 16, 17 and 18
Achtung: Es existiert nur ein Jumper für die drei Steckplätze Nummer 16, 17 and 18.
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 16 in Position TSO (Torque Switch Open), damit das Relais 3
« Drehmomentschalter öffnen » anzeigt.
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 17 in Position REMOTE, damit das Relais 3 meldet « Local/Remote in
Position REMOTE (Fernbetrieb) ».
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 17 in Position LOCAL, damit das Relais 3 meldet « Local/Remote in
Position LOCAL (vor-Ort-Betrieb) ».
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 18 in Position OPENING, damit Relais 3 meldet « Antrieb öffnet ».
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 18 in Position RUNNING, damit Relais 3 meldet « Antrieb läuft ».
In der Standardeinstellung ist Relais 3 als Schließer ausgeführt. Der Jumper auf Sockel 24 steht
in Position
Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 24 in Position , um das Relais als Öffner zu benutzen.
➯ Einstellungen an Relais 3 : Jumper Sockel 16, 17, 18 und 24

➯ Nur 1 Jumper für Sockel 16, 17 und 18
57
432/449
In der Standardeinstellung meldet Relais 4 « Wegschalter ZU ». Der Jumper auf Sockel 19 steht
in Position LSC (Limit Switch Close / Wegschalter zu).
☞ Jumper Sockel 19, 20 und 21
Achtung: Es existiert nur ein Jumper für die drei Steckplätze Nummer 19, 20 and 21.
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 19 in Position TSC (Torque Switch Close/Drehmomentschalter
schließen), damit Relais 4 meldet «Drehmomentschalter schließen».
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 20 in Position CLOSING, damit das Relais 4 anzeigt
« Antrieb läuft ZU ».
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 20 in Position ESD (Emergency Shut Down), damit das
Relais 4 anzeigt « ESD – Befehl erhalten »
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 21 in Position REMOTE, damit das Relais 4 anzeigt
« LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter in Position REMOTE (Fernbetrieb) ».
➩ Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 21 in Position LOCAL, damit das Relais 4 anzeigt
« LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter in Position LOCAL (vor-Ort-Betrieb).
In der Standardeinstellung wirkt der Kontakt von Relais 4 als Schließer. Der Jumper auf
Sockel 26 steht in Position
Bringen Sie den Jumper auf Sockel 26 in Position , damit Relaiskontakt 4 als öffner wirkt.
➯ Einstellung Relais 4 : Jumper-Sockel 19, 20, 21 und 26

➯ Nur 1 Jumper für Sockel 19, 20 und 21
7.6 Alarmrelais
Das Alarmrelais signalisiert, daß der Antrieb nicht verfügbar ist oder eine unnormale Funktion
ausführt. Das Alarmrelais steht im Normalfall unter Spannung und im Falle eines Fehler wird es
spannungsfrei (Ruhestromprinzip).
Das Relais wird durch folgende Effekte spannungsfrei :
➩ Ausfall der Stromversorgung, der Fernsteuerspannung oder einer Sicherung
➩ Ausfall eine Phase (bei Drehstromanschluß)
➩ Auslösen des Temperaturwächters im Motor
➩ Ausfall des Eingangssignals 4-20 mA (mit Zubehör-Positioner)*
➩ LOCAL/REMOTE –Wahlschalter in Position LOCAL oder OFF**
* Bei der Version ohne Positioner ist Schalter 2 ohne Funktion.
** Bei Zustand « Ortssteuerstelle blockiert/verriegelt » wird der Schalter in Position LOCAL nicht
als Fehler angezeigt, weil der Antrieb weiterhin per Fernansteuerung funktionniert.
Der Anwender kann die Bedingungen, in denen das Relais spannungslos wird, modifizieren.
58
433/449
☞ Schalter 2
Bringen Sie Schalter 2 in Position B, wenn Sie den Ausfall des Eingangssignals 4-20 mA nicht
als Fehler anzeigen möchten. (Nur bei Zubehör-Positioner möglich).
➯ Ausfall des Eingangssignals

4-20mA ist kein Fehler (nur
bei Zubehör-Positioner)
☞ Schalter 3
Bringen Sie Schalter 3 in Position B, wenn Sie am LOCAL/REMOTE Schalter LOCAL und OFF
nicht als Fehler anzeigen möchten.
➯ LOCAL/REMOTE Schalter
in Stellung LOCAL oder OFF
ist kein Fehler
☞ Schalter 12
Bringen Sie Schalter 12 in Position B, wenn Sie das Auslösen von « Drehmomentschalter
öffnen » als Fehler anzeigen möchten.
➯ Auslösen von
« Drehmomentschalter
schließen » ist ein Fehler
☞ Schalter 13
Bringen Sie Schalter 13 in Position B, wenn Sie das Auslösen von « Drehmomentschalter schlie-
ßen » als Fehler anzeigen möchten.
➯ Auslösen von
« Drehmomentschalter
öffnen » ist ein Fehler
Hinweis : die Systemüberwachung erkennt, ob Armaturen mit Drehmoment schließen ; in die-

sem Fall erfolgt keine Fehleranzeige.
59
434/449
8. SICHERUNGEN
Zugänglichkeit :
➩ Schalten Sie die Spannungsversorgung des Antriebs ab.
➩ Entfernen Deckel mit den lokalen Steuerschaltern.
➩ Achten Sie auf das Kabel der Steuerschalter innerhalb des Deckels.
➩ Entfernen Sie den Sicherungsverschluss und ändern Sie nötigenfalls die Sicherungen.
Technische Daten der Sicherungen :
FU1 : Transformator Primärsicherung 6,3 x 32mm - 0,5A - 500V
FU2 : Transformator Sekundärsicherung 5 x 20mm - 0,5A
FU3 : Transformator Sekundärsicherung 5 x 20mm - 0,05A
9. ZUBEHÖR-POSITIONER
Der optionale Positioner ist mit der Grundplatine CI12701 verbunden. Der Positioner ermöglicht
es dem Antrieb, eine Position proportional zu einem Eingangssignal einzunehmen. Das
Einstellboard (GAM-K) des L. BERNARD-Positioners erlaubt :
➩ lokale Stellanweisungen zu geben,
➩ den Antrieb an das Eingangs-Signal anzupassen,
➩ die Reaktion des Antriebs für den Fall eines Ausbleibens des Eingangssignals einzustellen.
9.1 Eingangssignal-Einstellung
Das Standard-Eingangssignal beträgt 4-20mA
9.1.1 Betrieb mit Eingangssignal 0-20mA
Stellen Sie Schalter 4 und 8 in Position B für den Betrieb mit einem 0-20mA-Signal. Das
Ausgangssignal ist ebenfalls 0-20mA.
9.1.2 Betrieb mit Eingangssignal 0-10V
☞ Schalter 4, 8, 9 and 10
Stellen Sie die Schalter 4, 8, 9 und 10 in Position B für den Betrieb mit einem 0-10V-Signal.
Das Ausgangssignal bleibt hierbei 0-20mA.
9.2 Einstellung der Arbeitsweise (Drehrichtung)
Die Standardeinstellung ist 4 mA = Armatur geschlossen, 20 mA = Armatur offen.
☞ Schalter 3
☞ Potentiometer Anschluß
Stellen Sie Schalter 3 in Position B und das Potentiometer von Stellung « POT STD » in Position
« POT REV », um bei 4 mA Armatur AUF und bei 20 mA Armatur ZU einzustellen.
Einstellung der Arbeitsweise/Drehrichtung
Schließen
Öffnen
Eingangs- 4mA 20mA 4mA 20mA
signal-Typ 0mA 20mA 0mA 20mA
0v 10V
0v 10V
Armatur Schließen im Schließen gegen Schließen im Schließen gegen
Reaktion Uhrzeigersinn den Uhrzeigersinn Uhrzeigersinn den Uhrzeigersinn
Karte GAMK :
KarteCI2701:
Schalter 3 in
Einstellung/ Schalter7aufBund Standard
Standard Stellung B und
Programmierung Potentiometerin
Potentiometer in
Stellung“POT REV”
Stellung
60
435/449
9.3 Einstellung der ‘Stay Put’-Funktion
Bei Verwendung des Eingangssignals 4-20 mA besteht die Möglichkeiten, eine Sicherheits-
Position im Falle des Ausfalls des Eingangssignal (=0 mA) einzustellen.
In der Standardeinstellung ist die Stay Put-Funktion aktiviert, d.h. bei Signalausfall bleibt der
Antrieb in der zuletzt angefahrenen Position stehen.
☞ Schalter 5, 6 and 8
Schalter 5 in Position B : Antrieb/Armatur öffnet bei Ausfall des Eingangssignals
Schalter 6 in Position B : Antrieb schlließt bei Ausfall des Eingangssignals
Schalter 8 in Position B, um die « Stay Put »-Funktion abzuschalten
Achtung : bei Eingangssignalen von 0-20 mA oder 0-10V kann die « Stay Put »-Funktion nicht
ausgeführt werden und muß inaktiviert werden. Bringen Sie dazu den Schalter 8 in Position B.
9.4 Totband
Diese Einstellung erfolgt werkseitig, man kann sie jedoch mit dem Potentiometer « DEAD BAND »
einstellen. Um das Totband zu vermindern drehen Sie das Poti gegen den Uhrzeigersinn.
Achtung : ein zu großen Reduzieren des Totbandes führt zum « Schwingen » des Antriebs
9.5 Probebetrieb vor Ort
Es ist möglich, vor Ort (Positioner-Karte GAM-K) ein Eingangssignal von 4-20 mA zu simulieren,
um die Funktion des Antriebes zu überprüfen. Bei Vorhandensein des Schalters
LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE muß sich dieser in Stellung REMOTE befinden.
➩ AUTO : Funktion mit externem Signal

➩ 0% : Internes Signal 0% (4 mA bei Standard)
➩ MAN : Internes Signal einstellbar von 0 bis 100%
➩ 100% : Internes Signal 100% (20 mA bei Standard)
Stellen Sie den Steuerschalter auf Position 0%, MAN oder 100%. In Gezeigter Stellung MAN
läßt sich mit dem Potentiometer « MANUELL » ein Eingangssignal von 4-20 mA simulieren.
9.6 0%-Einstellung
Falls vorhanden, muß sich der Schalter LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE in Position REMOTE befinden. Stellen
Sie den Steuerschalter auf Position 0%, um dem Antrieb einen Zufahr-Befehl zu erteilen (4mA).
Fall 1 : Antrieb beginnt zuzufahren, stoppt aber vor Anfahren des Wegschalters « ZU ».
Drehen Sie das Potentiometer im Antrieb so weit, bis der Antrieb an den Wegschalter « ZU /
CLOSED » heranfährt, LED an. Stellen Sie das Potentiometer ein wenig in Gegenrichtung, bis
die rote LED erlischt.
Fall 2 : Antrieb beginnt zu schließen, stoppt beim Wegschalter « ZU/CLOSED », die
Anzeige LED « CLOSE/SCHLIESSEN » verlöscht aber nicht.
Drehen Sie das Potentiometer des Antriebs vorsichtig so lange, bis die rote LED « CLOSE/ZU »
erlischt.
61
436/449
9.7 100% Einstellung
Falls vorhanden, muß sich der Wahlschalter LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE in Stellung REMOTE befinden.
Stellen Sie den Steuerschalter in Position 100%, damit der Antrieb einen Auffahrbefehl erhält
(20mA).
Fall 1 : Antrieb beginnt zu öffnen und stoppt vor « Wegschalter OFFEN/OPEN ».

Drehen Sie das Potentiometer « ADJ 100 % » (Adjustment 100% = 100% Einstellung) auf der
GAM-K-Elektronikkarte vorsichtig im Uhrzeigersinn bis der Wegschalter « OPEN » anspricht.
Drehen Sie das Potentiometer dann etwas gegen den Uhrzeigersinn, bis die grüne LED (OPEN)
erlischt.
Fall 2 : Antrieb beginnt zu öffnen, stoppt bei Stellung « OPEN » des Wegschalters, die
grüne LED verlöscht aber nicht.
Drehen Sie das Potentiometer « ADJ 100% » (Adjustment 100% = 100%- Einstellung) vorsich-
tig gegen den Uhrzeigersinn, bis die grüne LED erlischt.
9.8 Split Range (Geteiltes Signal)
Die Platine des Positioners kann auf SPLIT-RANGE (geteiltes Signal) eingestellt werden.
Split Range bedeutet die Teilung des Eingangs-Signals in 4-12 mA und 12-20 mA. Das übliche
kundenseitige Signal beträgt 4-20 mA. Ein erster Antrieb wird für den Betrieb mit 4-12 mA und
ein zweiter für 12 bis 20 mA-Signale eingestellt. Jeder Antrieb erhält aber die volle Signalbreite
von 4-20 mA. Der erste öffnet komplett zwischen 0 und 50% des Signals und der Zweite zwi-
schen 50 und 100%.
Bringen Sie Schalter in Position B, damit der Antrieb mit dem Eingangssignal 12-20 mA arbeitet.
Bringen Sie Schalter 2 in Position B, damit der Antrieb mit dem E4-12 mA arbeitet.
9.9 Stellungsabfrage mit elektronischem Stellungsrückmelder TAM 4-20mA
In der Standardeinstellung wird das Potentiometer des Antriebes zur Meldung der
Armaturenposition benutzt.
☞ Schalter 7
Bringen Sie Schalter 7 in Position B, um den Antrieb auf Betrieb mit Stellungsrückmelder TAM
4-20 mA anstelle des Potentiometers einzustellen. Die Platine CI2701 kann die
Versorgungsspannung zum Melder (TAM oder FSG) bereitstellen.
9.10 Fernansteuerung AUTO / EIN-AUS Steuerung
Der Positioner kann mit einem Fernsteuersignal (0) 4-20 mA / 0-10V oder mit ÖFFNEN /
SCHLIESSEN / STOPP-Funktionen angesteuert werden. Der Eingang AUTO / ON-OFF auf den
kundenseitigen Klemmen (Kl. 37) erlauben zwischen beiden Möglichkeiten hin- und herzuschal-
ten. Siehe hierzu auch Kapitel 5, ab Seite 4, Fernsteuerung.
Hinweis : die Fernansteuerung-Signale « AUTO / ON-OFF CONTROL » und « LOCAL CONTROL

INHIBITION » (Ortssteuerstelle blockiert) benutzen den gleichen Eingang auf der Klemmleiste.
Bei Inbetriebnahme des Positioners wird der Eingang automatisch der Funktion « AUTO / ON-
OFF CONTROL » zugewiesen. Die Funktion « Ortssteuerstelleblockieren (Local Control Inhibition)
» kann bei Betrieb mit Positioner nicht genutzt werden.
62
437/449
10. ZUBEHÖR : MELDELEUCHTEN
Als Zubehör zur Anzeige vor Ort sind 3 Meldebeleuchten an der Ortssteuerstelle des
Steuerungsgehäuses vorhanden :
➩ Anzeigelampe für OFFEN
➩ Anzeigelampe für GESCHLOSSEN
➩ Anzeigelampe für ANTRIEBS-SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG AN.
11. ZUBEHÖR : TAKTGEBER
Der Taktgeber ermöglicht eine Verringerung der Antriebsgeschwindigkeit. Zum Beispiel als
Schutz gegen Druckschläge bei zu schneller Stellgeschwindigkeit.
Dieses Modul ist mit dem Eingang „P202TEMPO“ der Integral + Steuerung verbunden. Die ein-
gehenden Steuersignale werden in Einschalt- und Pausenzeiten der Motorrelais aufgeteilt.
Die Einschalt- und Pausenzeiten sind separat einstellbar:

T. ON: 0,5 sek. bis 10 sek.
T. OFF: 3 sek. Bis 2 min.
Die Stellgeschwindigkeit des Antriebs bzw. der Armatur kann auf diesem Weg sehr klein ein-
gestellt werden.
Die Stellgeschwindigkeit ist für die Richtungen öffnen und schließen getrennt einstellbar.
Open
Weg- Zeit- Diagramm
1/ zusätzlicher Wegschalter „AUF“. 1 4
2/ zusätzlicher Wegschalter „AUF“. 5
3/ langsam öffnen.
3
4/ schnell öffnen.
5/ schnell schließen
6/ langsam schließen.
7/ einstellen der Pausenzeiten. 2 6
8/ einstellen der Einschaltzeiten. Close Time

9/ einstellen der Einschaltzeiten.
10/ einstellen der Pausenzeiten.
11/ Verbindung zu den zusätzlichen Wegschaltern (falls vorhanden).
12/ Verbindung zur INTEGRIERT + KARTE.
63
438/449
12. WAS TUN WENN …
MÖGLICHE FUNKTIONSFEHLER BEI DER INTEGRAL-PLUS VERSION
PROBLEM URSACHE BEHEBUNG
Keine Funktion Spannungsversorgung Überprüfen Sie die Spannung (Klemmen
des Antriebs L1, L2,L3 bei Drehstrom, oder 0,1 bei 1-
Phasen Wechselstrom). Die Spannung ist
auf dem Typenschild angegeben.
Ein Signal für Ort- Stellen Sie sicher, daß der Antrieb kein
steuerung blockieren Signal Ortsteuerstelle blockieren
liegt an. empfängt. Wenn bei ausgeschaltetem
Gerät der Verbindungsanschluß für
Ortssteuerstelle blockieren an Klemme
37 entfernt wird, kann ein Funktionstest
des Antriebs durchgeführt werden.
Ein Notfahrbefehl (ESD) Stellen Sie sicher, daß der Antrieb keinen
liegt an und überlagert Notfahrbefehl empfängt. Bei ausgeschal-
alle anderen Befehle. tetem Gerät kann Jumper 27 vom INTE-
GRAL+ Board entfernt werden. Achten
Sie unbedingt darauf, die Position zu
notieren, damit er wieder an die richtige
Stelle gesetzt werden kann. Bei entfern-
tem Jumper ist die Notfahrfunktion (ESD)
blockiert und ein Funktionstest des
Antriebes kann durchgeführt werden.
Stecken Sie danach den Jumper wieder
an seine ursprüngliche Position.
Sicherung defekt Sicherung überprüfen und ersetzen.
Einstellung der Art der Überprüfen Sie die Position von Jumper
Spannungsversorgung 100 auf dem INTEGRAL+-Board.
Bei Drehstrom: Position T
Bei Wechsel- oder Gleichspannung: M
Auslösen des Die TH -Anzeige im INTEGRAL+ Board
Thermoschutzkontaktes signalisiert das Auslösen des Thermo-
im Motor. schutzkontaktes. Der Antrieb ist nach
Abkühlung des Motors wieder
einsatzfähig.
Das auskuppelbare Handrad Stellen Sie sicher, daß sich das Handrad in
bleibt in Funktion (nur bei ausgekuppelter Position befindet.
Versionen mit elektrischem
Sicherheitskontakt)
Jumper (Brückenstecker)- Auf dem INTEGRAL+-Board müssen sich
Einstellung ist fehlerhaft 11 Jumper befinden. Es darf nur ein
oder Jumper fehlen. Jumper auf Sockel 16-17-18 sein und nur
einer auf 19-20-21.
64
439/449
Der Antrieb arbeit- Ortsteuerschalter Stellen Sie den LOCAL / REMOTE Schalter
et im LOCAL (LOCAL/REMOTE) steht auf REMOTE.
(vor- Ort-Modus , auf LOCAL oder OFF. Stellen Sie sicher, daß auf der
aber nicht im Kontaktfehler: keine Klemmleiste zwischen Klemme 5 und 6
Fernansteuer Spannung zwischen eine Brücke vorhanden ist. Überprüfen
(REMOTE) Modbus Klemme 6 und 7. Sie die Sicherung FU3 am INTEGRAL+
Board.
Spannungskontrolle: Prüfen Sie die Anschlüsse im Spannungs-
falsche Eingangsspannung. kontroll-Modus:
Spannung 10 bis 55V: Klemme 5
Spannung 55 bis 250V: Klemme 4
Der Antrieb Ortssteuerschalter Stellen Sie den LOCAL/REMOTE Schalter

arbeitet im (LOCAL/REMOTE) steht auf auf LOCAL.
Fernansteuermodus, REMOTE oder OFF. Stellen Sie sicher, daß der Antrieb keinen
jedoch nicht im Befehl zum Blockieren des Ortssteuer-
Ein Befehl Ortssteuerschalter schalters bekommt.
vor-Ort-Modus. blockieren/verriegeln liegt an. Bei ausgeschaltetem Gerät kann an
Klemme 11 der Anschlußdraht für den
Befehl entfernt werden, um eine
Funktionsprüfung am Antrieb
durchzuführen.
Der Antrieb Einstellung falsch. Prüfen Sie die Einstellung der
arbeitet nicht mit Drehrichtung. Schalter 7 auf dem INTE-
der korrekten Der Motor wurde neu GRAL+ Board:
Drehrichtung. ange-klemmt und dreht
jetzt in die falsche Position A: Schließen im Uhrzeigersinn
Richtung (z.B. bei Position B: Schließen gegen den Uhr
Motorwechsel). zeigersinn
Bei Motorwechsel müssen die
Anschlußdrahtfarben beachtet werden!
In Zweifels-fällen prüfen Sie vorher die
Drehrichtung. Um die Drehrichtung
umzukehren, tauschen Sie die Anschlüsse
2 und 3 an der Motor-Anschlußklemme.
Der Antrieb Der Antrieb ist auf Prüfen Sie die SCHLIESSEN -Einstellung
stoppt nicht bei Drehmo-ment-Schließen (Schalter 1 auf dem INTEGRAL+ Board).
Ansprechen des eingestellt.
Wegschalters
ZU/CLOSED . Der Wegschalter ZU Stellen Sie den Wegschalter ZU ein.
ist falsch eingestellt. Der Wegschalter ZU muß ansprechen,
selbst wenn der Antrieb auf
Drehmomentschließung eingestellt ist.
Der Motor wurde neu Bei Motorwechsel müssen die Anschluß-
ange-klemmt und dreht drahtfarben beachtet werden! In
jetzt in die falsche Zweifels-fällen prüfen Sie vorher die
Richtung (z.B. bei Drehrichtung. Um die Drehrichtung
Motorwechsel). umzukehren, tauschen Sie die Anschlüsse
65
440/449
Der Antrieb Der Wegschalter AUF Stellen Sie den Wegschalter AUF ein.
stoppt nicht bei Der Wegschalter AUF muß ansprechen
ist falsch eingestellt.
bei geöffneter Armatur.
Ansprechen des Der Motor wurde neu Bei Motorwechsel müssen die Anschluß-
Wegschalters ange-klemmt und dreht drahtfarben beachtet werden! In
AUF/OPEN jetzt in die falsche Zweifels-fällen prüfen Sie vorher die
Keine Anzeigen Der Antrieb ist aus- Anzeigen sind nur aktiv, wenn der
aktiv geschaltet Antrieb eingeschaltet ist.
Die Einstellungen falsch Prüfen Sie, ob das entsprechende

Drehmoment- Anzeige-relais auf Drehmoment-Anzeige
Schalter- eingestellt ist. Der Jumper auf dem INTE-
Anzeige ist nicht GRAL+ Board ist eingestellt:
aktiv TSO für Drehmomentschalter ÖFFNEN
TSC für Drehmomentschalter
SCHLIESSEN .
Der Drehmoment- Die Elektronik speichert die Daten nur
Schalter wurde manuell während der Funktion. Weiterhin spe-
ausgelöst. ichert die Elektronik die Daten nur in
Bezug zur Drehhrichtung.
Die Drehmoment- Drehmoment-Schalter- Die Drehmoment-Schalter-Daten werden

Schalter- Datenspeicherung elektronisch gespeichert. Um den
Anzeige kehrt Speicher zu löschen, muß ein entge-
nicht mehr zur gengesetzter Fahr-befehl erfolgen.
Grundeinstellung
zurück, obwohl
der Drehmoment-
Schalter nicht
mehr in Aktion Ist
66
441/449
13. WAS TUN WENN …
MÖGLICHE FUNKTIONSFEHLER BEI POSITIONERN POSIGAM-PLUS,
MODUGAM-PLUS
In Zweifelsfällen über die Funktion der Einheit, stellen Sie zuerst den LOCAL/REMOTE
Wahlschalter auf LOCAL = vor-Ort-Steuerung und betätigen Sie die ÖFFNEN/SCHLIESSEN
Funktionen.

Keine Funktion Spannungsversorgung Überprüfen Sie die Spannung (Klemmen
am Antrieb 1, 2, 3 bei Drehstrom oder 0,1 bei 1-
Phasen Wechselstrom). Die Spannung ist
auf dem Typenschild angegeben.
Ein Notfahrbefehl Stellen Sie sicher, daß der Antrieb kein
(ESD) liegt an und Notfahrsignal empfängt. Bei ausgeschal-
überlagert alle ande- tetem Gerät kann der Jumper von Sockel
27 auf dem INTEGRAL+-Board entfernt
ren Befehle.
werden.
Achten Sie unbedingt darauf, die Position
zu notieren, damit er wieder an die
richtige Stelle gesetzt werden kann. Bei
entferntem Jumper ist die Notfahr-
Funktion blockiert und ein Funktionstest
des Antriebes kann durchge-führt wer-
den. Stecken Sie danach den Jumper
wieder an seine ursprüngliche Position.
Sicherung defekt Sicherung am INTEGRAL+-Board über-
prüfen und ggf. ersetzen.
Einstellung der Art der Überprüfen Sie die Position von Jumper
100 auf dem INTEGRAL+-Board.
Spannungsversorgung Bei Drehstrom: Position T
Bei Wechsel- oder Gleichspannung: M
Auslösen des Die TH -Anzeige im INTEGRAL+ Board
signalisiert das Auslösen des
Thermoschutzkontakte
Thermoschutzkontaktes. Der Antrieb ist
im Motor. nach Ab-kühlung des Motors wieder ein-
satzfähig.
Das auskuppelbare Stellen Sie sicher, daß sich das Handrad in
Handrad bleibt in Funktion ausgekuppelter Position befindet.
(nur bei Versionen mit elek-
trischem Sicherheitskontakt)
Jumper (Brückenstecker)- Auf dem INTEGRAL+-Board müssen sich
Einstellung ist fehlerhaft 11 Jumper befinden. Es darf nur ein
oder Jumper fehlen. Jumper auf Sockel 16-17-18 sein und nur
einer auf 19-20-21.
67
442/449
Der Antrieb arbeitet Schalter Stellen Sie den LOCAL/REMOTE-Schalter
im LOCAL (vor-Ort) LOCAL/REMOTE steht in Position REMOTE, um den Positioner zu
ÖFFNEN/SCHLI auf LOCAL oder OFF nutzen (selbst wenn der Positioner auf
ESSEN Modus, nicht manuell eingestellt ist).
jedoch mit dem
Einheitssignal Ein automatischer Stellen Sie sicher, daß der Antrieb keinen
(0)4...20mA oder 0- AN/AUS- Befehl liegt AUTO/ONOFF-Befehl erhält.
10V. an und blockiert den Trennen Sie den Fernansteueranschluß
Positioner (an Klemme 11) wie zur Überprüfung
gefordert.
Der Anschluß zwis- Überprüfen Sie die Verbindung zwischen
chen Positioner Board Positioner-Board (GAM-K) und INTE-
und INTEGRAL+ Board GRAL+-Board (CI2701).
ist gestört.
Das Potentiometer für Drehen Sie das Potentiometer im Antrieb
die Signalübertragung um ein Vierteldrehung und wiederholen
im Antrieb ist falsch Sie die Einstellungen wie in der
eingestellt. Inbetriebnahme-Anleitung gefordert.
Eingangssignal falsch Überprüfen Sie die Signaleinstellungen
am Positioner Board (GAM-K):
4-20 mA Signal:
Schalter 4 steht auf A
0-20 mA Signal:
Schalter 4 steht auf B
0-10 V Signal:
Der Antrieb Der Auto - 0% - 100% Überprüfen SIe die Einstellung des Auto-
arbeitet in LOCAL Schalter steht nicht auf 0%-100% - Schalters auf dem Board des
Einstellung, Positioners (GAM-K).
Auto
nicht mit Fern-
Signalfehler Überprüfen Sie mit einem in Reihe an Klemme
ansteuerung
30 geschalteten Milliamperemeter das
(REMOTE).
Referenz-Signal.
Signalpolarität Stellen Sie sicher, daß der Plus (+) des
Signals an Klemme 30 anliegt.
68
443/449
Der Antrieb Potentiometer falsch Überprüfen Sie die Potentiometer-
folgt nicht dem herum angeschlossen Anschlüsse (auf GAM-K).
vorgegebenen Das Potentiometer sollte für POT STD
Eingangssignal (Standardposition) wie folgt eingestellt
sein:
• 4 mA (oder 0 mA oder 0 V
entsprechend zum Signal) = geschlossen
und Schließen im Uhrzeigersinn.
entsprechend zum Signal) = offen und
Öffnen gegen den Uhrzeigersinn.
Das Potentiometer sollte für POT REV
(umgekehrte Position) wie folgt
eingestellt sein:
entsprechend zum Signal) = geschlossen
und Schließen gegen den Uhrzeigersinn.
entsprechend zum Signal) = offen und
Schließen im Uhr-zeigersinn.
Signal vertauscht oder Überprüfen Sie die Signaleinstellung.
Einstellung falsch Schalter 3 am Positionerboard (GAM-K):
Position A: 4 mA = Armatur zu
Position B: 4 mA = Armatur auf
Drehrichtung vertauscht Überprüfen Sie die Signaleinstellung.
Schalter 7 am INTEGRAL+ -Board
(CI2701):
Position A: Schließen im Uhrzeigersinn
Position B: Öffnen gegen den
Uhrzeigersinn
Das Potentiometer für Drehen Sie das Potentiometer am Antrieb
die Signalübertragung um ein Vierteldrehung und wiederholen
Sie die Einstellungen wie in der
ist falsch eingestellt. Inbetriebnahme-Anleitung gefordert.
angeklemmt und dreht kabelfarben beachtet werden! In Zwei-
jetzt in die falsche felsfällen prüfen Sie vorher die
2 und 3 an der Motor- Anschlußklemme.
69
444/449
Der Antrieb Der Antrieb ist auf Überprüfen Sie die Einstellungen für
stoppt nicht bei Drehmoment- Schliessen (Schalter 1 am
Schließen eingestellt. INTEGRAL+ -Board.)
Auslösen des
Der Wegschalter ZU Stellen Sie den Wegschalter ZU richtig
Wegschalters ist falsch eingestellt. ein. Der Wegschalter ZU muß auch
STOPP . dann ansprechen, wenn der Antrieb auf
Dreh-moment -Schließen eingestellt ist.
Die Position 0% ist Stellen Sie das Potentiometer im Antrieb
falsch eingestellt. richtig ein.
angeklemmt und dreht kabelfarben beachtet werden! In
jetzt in die falsche Zweifels-fällen prüfen Sie vorher die
Der Antrieb Der Wegschalter Stellen Sie den Wegschalter OFFEN ein.
stoppt nicht bei OFFEN ist falsch Er muß bei Position OFFEN der Armatur
Ansprechen des eingestellt. ansprechen.
Wegschalters Die Position 100% Stellen Sie die 100% am Potentiometer
OFFEN/OPEN wurde falsch eingestellt. auf dem Positionerboard (GAM-K) ein.
Der Motor wurde neu Bei Motorwechsel müssen die
angeklemmt und dreht Anschlußkabelfarben beachtet werden!
jetzt in die falsche In Zwei-felsfällen prüfen Sie vorher die
Keine Anzeigen Der Antrieb ist aus- Anzeigen sind nur bei eingeschaltetem
aktiv geschaltet (OFF). Antrieb verfügbar.
Die Anzeigen des Einstellungen sind falsch Prüfen Sie, ob das entsprechende
Drehmoment Anzeige-relais auf Drehmoment-Anzeige
-schalters sind eingestellt ist. Der Jumper auf dem INTE-
inaktiv. GRAL+ Board ist eingestellt :
TSO für Drehmomentschalter ÖFFNEN
TSC für Drehmomentschalter SCHLIESSEN .
Der Drehmoment- Die Elektronik speichert die Daten nur
schalter wurde während der Funktion. Weiterhin spe-
manuell ausgelöst. ichert die Elektronik die Daten des Über-
lastschutzes nur in Bezug zur
Drehrichtung.
Die Anzeige des Datenspeicher für Die Drehmoment-Schalter-Daten werden
Drehmoment- Drehmomentwerte elektronisch gespeichert. Um den
schalters kehrt nicht korrekt. Speicher zu löschen, muß ein entge-
nach dessen gengesetzter Fahr-befehl erfolgen.
Betätigung nicht
zur Ausgangsanzeige
zurück.
70
445/449
Es erscheint eine Das Grundsignal liegt Schicken Sie ein Test-Signal zum Eingang.
Fehleranzeige, nicht an. Bei Standard-
aber der Antrieb einstellung meldet der
funktioniert nor- Antrieb einen Fehler
mal. und verharrt in der
momentanen Position.
Der Wahlschalter steht Stellen Sie den Wahlschalter auf
auf LOCAL oder REMOTE
AUS/OFF .
In der Standard-ein-
stellung meldet der
Antrieb einen Fehler.
14. BENUTZEREINSTELLUNGEN (*)

INTEGRAL+ (CI2701)
1 A B POSITIONER GAM-K
2 A B 1 A B
3 A B
4 A B 2 A B
5 A B 3 A B
6 A B 4 A B
7 A B 5 A B
8 A B
A B
6 A B
9
Springer & Schalter
10 A B 7 A B
11 A B 8 A B
12 A B 9 A B
13 A B 10 A B
14 LSO TSO
15 LSC TSC
16/17/18 LSO TSO lokal fern laufen öffnen
(*) Kreis oder Hervorhebung
19/20/21 LSC TSC ESD schließen lokal fern
der Optionen im Zusammenhang
22 mit Ihren Systemeinstellungen
23
24
25 50 200
26
27
28 close open
71
446/449
At your service around the world
AUSTRALIA FINLAND MIDDLE-EAST SPAIN
TRANSMARK - FCX OY SOFFCO AB BERNARD MIDDLE-EAST BERNARD SERVOMOTORES
ROWVILLE, VICTORIA ESPOO DUBAI - U.A.E. MADRID
Tel.:+ 61 3 97 65 61 11 Tel.:+358 0 207 420 740 Tel.:+971 4 39 80 726 Tel.:+34 91 30 41 139
Fax:+ 61 3 97 65 61 65 Fax:+358 0 207 420 759 Fax:+971 4 39 80 726 Fax:+34 91 32 73 442
fcx@fcxaustralia.com.au info@soffco.fi bernact@emirates.net.ae bernardservo@bernard.es
AUSTRIA GERMANY MOROCCO SOUTH AFRICA

IPU ING PAUL UNGER DEUFRA GmbH AQUATEL sarl A-Q-RATE AUTOMATION CC
WIEN TROISDORF CASABLANCA BERTSHAM
Tel.:+43 1 602 41 49 Tel.:+49 22 41 98 340 Tel.:+212 22 66 55 71 Tel.:+27 11 432 58 31
Fax:+43 1 603 29 43 Fax:+49 22 41 98 34 44 Fax:+212 22 66 55 74 Fax:+27 11 432 41 04
hammermueller@IPU.co.at bernard@deufra.de aquatel@wanadoo.net.ma aqr@wol.co.za
BELGIUM HUNGARY NETHERLANDS SWEDEN

BERNARD BENELUX SA APAGYI TRADEIMPEX KFT BERNARD BENELUX NV G. FAGERBERG AB
BRUXELLES BUDAPEST AN ZWAAG GOETEBORG
Tel.:+32 (0)2 343 41 22 Tel.:+36 1 223 1958 Tel.:+31 (0)229-298083 Tel.:+46 31 69 37 00
Fax:+32 (0)2 347 28 43 Fax:+36 1 273 0680 Fax:+31 (0)229-298089 Fax:+46 31 69 38 00
christian.baert@bernard-benelux.com bela.apagyi@mail.tvnet.hu bernard.benelux@12move.nl peter.fredriksson@fagerberg.se
BRAZIL INDIA NORWAY SWITZERLAND

JCN CHEMTROLS LTD FAGERBERG NORGE a.s MATOKEM AG
SAO PAULO MUMBAI GRESSVIK ALLSCHWIL
Tel.:+55 11 39 02 26 00 Tel.:+91 22 2857 9992 Tel.:+47 69 35 55 30 Tel.:+41 61 483 15 40
Fax:+55 11 39 02 40 18 Fax:+91 22 2857 9995 Fax:+47 69 35 55 31 Fax:+41 61 483 15 42
jcn@jcn.com.br chemtrolssam@vol.net.in jer@fagerberg.no info@matokem.ag
CHINA IRAN POLAND THAILAND

BERNARD BEIJING ASIA INSTRUMENTS Co. Ltd. MARCO BERNARD SOUTH-EAST ASIA
PEKIN TEHRAN WARSAW BANGKOK
Tel.:+86 10 8739 77 27 Tel.:+98 21 88 76 60 24 Tel.:+48 22 864 55 43 Tel.:+66 2 640 82 64
Fax:+86 10 8739 77 04 Fax:+98 21 88 74 29 40 Fax:+48 22 864 94 22 Fax:+66 2 640 82 60
bbce@bernard-actuators.cn info@asiainstrumentsltd.com matzanke@pol.pl chounramany@csloxinfo.com
CZECH REPUBLIC ITALY PORTUGAL UNITED ARABS EMIRATES

FLUIDTECHNIK BOHEMIA s.r.o. BERNARD SERVOMOTORI SRL PINHOL, GOMES & GOMES LDA. EMIRATES HOLDINGS
BRNO RHO /MILANO CARNAXIDE ABU DHABI
Tel.:+420 548 213 233-5 Tel.:+39 02 931 85 233 Tel.:+351 21 425 68 50 Tel.:+97 12 644 73 73
Fax:+420 548 213 238 Fax:+39 02 931 85 260 Fax:+351 21 425 68 59 Fax:+97 12 644 40 66
brno@fluidbohemia.cz info.servomotori@bernard-italia.com import.export@pinhol.com.pt emhold@emirates.net.ae
DENMARK JAPAN RUSSIA UNITED-KINGDOM

ARMATEC A/S BERNARD JAPAN c/o ALCAN A.E.T. ZOEDALE Plc
GLOSTRUP TOKYO ST PETERSBURG BEDFORD
Tel.:+45 46 96 00 00 Tel.:+81 3 33 49 66 39 Tel./Fax: +7 812 320 55 97 Tel.:+44 12 34 83 28 28
Fax:+45 46 96 00 01 Fax:+81 3 33 49 67 50 Mob.: +7 812 956 35 14 Fax:+44 12 34 83 28 29
jo@armatec.dk info@bernard.jp aet@ctinet.ru enquiries@zoedale.co.uk
EGYPT MALAYSIA SINGAPORE USA/CANADA/MEXICO

ATEB ACTUATION & CONTROLS ENGINEER ACTUATION & CONTROLS ENG. BERNARD CONTROLS Inc
ALEXANDRIA JOHOR BAHRU SINGAPORE HOUSTON - TEXAS
Tel.:+203 483 13 53 Tel.:+60 7 23 50 277 / 23 50 281 Tel.:+65 65 654 227 Tel.:+1 281 578 66 66
Fax:+203 484 99 35 Fax:+60 7 23 50 280 / 23 50 285 Fax:+65 65 650 224 Fax:+1 281 578 27 97
rfserv@atebreefer.com tcmeng@pc.jaring.my acesin@singnet.com.sg bsales@bernardcontrols.com
4 rue d’Arsonval - BP 70091 - 95505 Gonesse Cedex - France

Tel: +33.1.34.07.71.00 - Fax: +33.1.34.07.71.01
E-mail: mail@bernard-actuators.com
Internet: http://www.bernard-actuators.com
447/449
448/449
DECLARATION D’INCORPORATION DE QUASI MACHINE (DIRECTIVE 2006/42/CE) ET
DECLARATION CE DE CONFORMITE SELON LES DIRECTIVES CEM ET BASSE TENSION
DECLARATION OF INCORPORATION OF PARTLY COMPLETED MACHINERY AND EC

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ACCORDING THE DIRECTIVES EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE
BERNARD CONTROLS.
4, rue d'Arsonval
95505 GONESSE France
Déclarons, sous notre seule responsabilité, que les Hereby declare, in our own responsibility, that the electric
servomoteurs électriques types: actuators type:
MAS1, MAS4, MA, MA4, MB, MB1, MBS2, CP-2, CP-4 MAS1, MAS4, MA, MA4, MB, MB1, MBS2, CP-2, CP-4
auxquels cette déclaration se rapporte, sont conformes aux to which this declaration relates, are complying with the
exigences essentielles de la Directive Machines 2006/42/CE following basic requirements of the Machinery Directive
Annexe 1, paragraphes : 1.1.2, 1.1.3, 1.1.5, 1.2.1, 1.2.6, 2006/42/EC Annex 1, paragraphs: 1.1.2, 1.1.3, 1.1.5, 1.2.1,
1.3.1, 1.3.7, 1.5.1, 1.7.1, 1.7.3, 1.7.4 1.2.6, 1.3.1, 1.3.7, 1.5.1, 1.7.1, 1.7.3, 1.7.4
Les normes harmonisées suivantes ont été appliquées au The following harmonized standards have been considered
sens de la Directive Machines : EN ISO 12100 (2010), EN in the sense of the Machinery Directive: EN ISO 12100
ISO 5211 (2001), 5210 (1996) (2010), EN ISO 5211 (2001), 5210 (1996)
Cette conformité permet l’incorporation des servomoteurs This document allows incorporation of actuators listed
précédemment nommés à une machine soumise à la above in a machine subject to the Machinery Directive
Directive Machines 2006/42/CE et ne pourront être mis en 2006/42/EC and will not be able to be commissioned before
service avant que la machine ne soit déclarée conforme à the machine, in which they will be incorporated, is declared
cette Directive in accordance with this Directive.
La documentation spécifique est transmise à la demande The associated documentation is sent to the request of the
des autorités nationales compétentes. national authorities.
Responsable du dossier technique : Guillaume Fauré Person in charge of the technical file: Guillaume Fauré
Les servomoteurs en tant que quasi machine sont aussi The actuators, as partly completed machinery, comply also
conformes aux Directives suivantes et aux normes with following Directives and harmonized standards:
harmonisées listées :
Directive CEM 2004/108/CE - Compatibilité The 2004/108/EC EMC Directive -Electromagnetic

électromagnétique. Normes, EN 61000-6-4 2007/A1 (2011), compatibility. Standards, EN 61000-6-4 2007/A1 (2011), EN
EN 61000-6-2 (2005) 61000-6-2 (2005)
A la Directive Basse tension 2006/95/CE. Marquage The 2006/95/EC Low voltage Directive. CE marking
CE année 2009. Norme EN 60034-1 (2010) year 2009. Standard EN 60034-1 (2010)
Fait à Gonesse, le 3 Avril 2014 Done at Gonesse, April 3, 2014

SPEB 1011 01 S
Guillaume Fauré
Directeur R&D Guillaume Fauré
Executive Vice president, R&D
449/449

F193-Flow Control Gate PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

F193-Flow Control Gate PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

COMPONENTS

Client: TCDRI FOR PAKISTAN

A Langley Holdings Company ©

Project manager: Mr. Samuel Wat

Assembly / commissioning: Mr. Denis Foo

Spare parts: Ms. Yan Yan

A Langley Holdings Company ©

TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION

Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date

0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 02-0/250883-153/A-00.en 00 16.03.2017

02-0-250883-153-A-00-en.xls 1/2 16.03.2017

TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION

Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date

4 3 FLOW CONTROL GATE TYPE MP / MCD

02-0-250883-153-A-00-en.xls 2/2 16.03.2017

PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES

CHAPTER 1 PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES

Basic safety instructions

• Packing, Transport, Storage, Assembly

• Maintenance and Repair

• Dismantling and Disposal

Warning of suspended loads

Wear hard hat

Wear protective gloves

Use protective footwear

Use ear protectors

Wear safety goggles

Wear face mask

3 Information on Copyright and Protection Rights as per DIN ISO

Information warning of immediately dangerous

Information warning of potentially dangerous

Information warning of potentially dangerous situations

4.2 Basic Principle / Designated Use

Safety equipment must never be dismantled or taken out of operation.

Do not make any changes to programs (software) in programmable control systems.

4.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities

Symbols that may be found on the packing must be observed!

Do not stay or work below suspended loads!

Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.

Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.

Carefully remove any auxiliary equipment before starting operation again.

Proceed only in accordance with the instruction manual to restart operation.

Avoid setting loads down on or standing on the plant, machine or assembly!

Climbing on the equipment, machines and assemblies

The materials incurred when removing packaging must be disposed of

Do not enter or work in the area underneath a suspended load!

Plant, machines and subassemblies must not be used as climbing aids!

Electrical connections may only be carried out by an electrician!

Assembly work may only be carried out by trained specialists who

Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.

Under no circumstances may safety equipment be blocked, bridged or made ineffective.

Observe any applicable national regulations!

Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).

Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.

Aggressive cleaning agents must not be used!

Plant, machines and subassemblies must not be used as climbing aids!

Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.

• the correct sense of rotation of the drive is ensured,

• the operating voltage is in accordance with the motor name plate,

Under no circumstances must safety equipment be prevented from operating.

• lock the main switch and withdraw the keys

Plant, machines and subassemblies must not be used as climbing aids!

Doors and covers for maintenance and repair work have to be